CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version PDF

Contents 1 - TeSys motor starters:
open version
b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

1
Combination automatic motor starters
b D.O.L starters, type 1 coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/6
1
b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10
2 Combination starters for customer assembly

b D.O.L starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into
the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate
thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22
b Star-delta starters
v With circuit-breaker and overload protection built into
the circuit-breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26
4 v With circuit-breaker and overload protection by separate
thermal overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/28
v With fuse protection (NF C or DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30
v With fuse protection (BS fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

5 b 4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34
Star-delta starters for motor control

b 5.5 to 132 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/37
6 b 7.5 to 132 kW, without mechanical interlock,for customer assembly . . . page 1/41 1
b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

b 90 to 375 kW, on chassis for customer assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/47
TeSys U starter-controllers
7 b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/52
b Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/58
b Non-reversing and reversing power bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/62
1
b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64

b Control units and function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/68
8
b PowerSuite software workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/72
b Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection components . . . . page 1/76
b AS-Interface communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/78
1
b 3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80

9 b CANopen communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/84
b DeviceNet communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/86
b Advantys STB communication module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/90
b Modbus communication modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/92
b Communication gateways LUF P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/94
10 b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/96
b Tripping Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/104
1/0
0
b Selection curves according to categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/108
b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/110
b Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/112 1
b TeSys U starter-controllers, variable speed controllers
and soft start/soft stop units
v Altistart U01 and TeSys U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/124
v Magnetic control unit for the protection of variable speed controllers
and soft start/soft stop units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/134
b Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/138
2
integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor

breakers
b General, terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/140
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/150
b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/160
b Accessories and coils references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/165
b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/174 4
Adaptators for use with busbar systems
b With 40 mm and 60 mm pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/178
7H6\V4XLFN¿WLQVWDOODWLRQV\VWHPIRUPRWRUVWDUWHU 5
components
Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/190
b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/192

6
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/200
b Dimensions, schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/202
AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/207 7
b Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/208
b Mounting (equipment possibilities). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/210
b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/214
8
10
1/1
1
General TeSys motor starters
Levels of service
Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

7KHVWDQGDUGGH¿QHVWHVWVDWGLIIHUHQWOHYHOVRIFXUUHQWWKHSXUSRVHRIWKHVHWHVWVLV
1 to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
7KHVWDQGDUGGH¿QHVW\SHVRIFRRUGLQDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQGLWLRQRIWKH
components after testing:
type 1,
type 2.
To determine the type of coordination, the standard requires that the behaviour of the
equipment be tested under overload and short-circuit conditions for 3 fault current
2 values, covering overload and short-circuit conditions.
Type 1 coordination
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
3 Type 2 coordination
Type 2 coordination requires that In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must subsequently
EHDEOHWRUHVXPHRSHUDWLRQ7KHULVNRIFRQWDFWZHOGLQJLVSHUPLVVLEOHLQWKLVFDVH
the manufacturer must indicate measures to be taken regarding maintenance of the
equipment.
4 Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

t
Current values
Overload zone Low-level Short-circuit zone Current “Ico” (overload I < 10 In)
short-circuit zone
The thermal overload relay associated with the contactor provides protection against
WKLVW\SHRIIDXOWXSWRDYDOXH,FRVHHFXUYHGH¿QHGE\WKHPDQXIDFWXUHU
5 6WDQGDUG,(&VSHFL¿HVWKHFXUUHQWYDOXHVWREHXVHGIRUFKHFNLQJ
coordination between the thermal overload relay and the short-circuit protection
1 2 device:
b at 0.75 Ico only the thermal overload relay must trip,
4 b at 1.25 Ico the short-circuit protection device must operate.
5
6 Current “r” (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)

The main cause of this type of fault is the deterioration of insulating materials.
6WDQGDUG,(&GH¿QHVDQLQWHUPHGLDWHVKRUWFLUFXLWFXUUHQW³U´7KLVWHVW
current makes it possible to check whether the protection device is providing
7 protection against low-level short-circuits.
Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A) Current “r” (kA)

7 1
3
10
6
50
Ie y 16
16 < Ie y63
1
3
In Ir Iq
0,75 Ico 1,25 Ico
63 < Ie y125 5
Ico
125 < Ie y 315 10
1 Thermal overload relay curve. 315 < Ie y 630 18
2 Fuse. 630 < Ie y 1000 30
3 Tripping of thermal overload relay only.
8 4 Thermal limit of the circuit-breaker. Current “Iq” (short-circuit > current “r”)
5 Thermal overload relay limit. This type of fault corresponds to a dead short and is relatively rare. It can be caused
6 Current broken by the SCPD (1). by a connection error during maintenance work. Short-circuit protection is provided
7 Circuit breaker magnetic trip. by fast operating devices.
6WDQGDUG,(&GH¿QHVDFXUUHQW³,T´7KHFRRUGLQDWLRQWDEOHVVXSSOLHGE\
6FKQHLGHU(OHFWULFDUHEDVHGRQDFXUUHQW³,T´WKDWLVJHQHUDOO\u 50 kA.
9
(1) SCPD: short-circuit protection device.
10
1/2
General (continued) TeSys motor starters
Levels of service
Selection
No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and

equipment.
1
Not authorised by standards:
v NF C 15-100 and IEC 60364-1, article 133-1
(installation regulations),
v EN/IEC 60204-1, article 7
(electrical equipment in machines),
v IEC 60947-4-1, article 8.2.5. (starters)
2
Type 1 coordination The most frequently used solution.
b Equipment costs are lower.
b Reliability of operation is not a requirement.
b Before restarting, it may be necessary to repair the
motor starter.
3
Consequences:
v VLJQL¿FDQWDPRXQWRIPDFKLQHGRZQWLPH
v skilled maintenance personnel required to repair,
check, obtain supplies.
Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.

4
Type 2 coordination This solution ensures reliability of operation.
Consequences:
v reduced machine downtime,
v reduced maintenance after a short-circuit.
Example: escalators.
5
Total coordination With this solution, no damage or misadjustment is
permissible and reliability of operation is
guaranteed.
Consequences:
v immediate return to service,
6
v no special precautions required.
([DPSOHVVPRNHH[WUDFWLRQ¿UH¿JKWLQJSXPSV
10
1/3
Selection guide TeSys motor starters - open version
Applications Pre-assembled starters
1 Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters Machines starting
under no-load:
star-delta starters
Starter type D.O.L. or reversing starters with circuit-breaker D.O.L. starters with Soft start units or
2 fuse protection star-delta starters to
be used in association
with a circuit-breaker or
fuses
Level of service Type 1 coordination Type 2 coordination – –

6
Power at 400 V Up to 5.5 kW Up to 37 kW Up to 37 kW Up to 132 kW
7 Type of components Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection

built into the circuit-breaker
Fuse carrier
+ plate-mounted
3 contactors
(line, star and delta,
contactor mounted on plate,
rail or chassis)
8 Pages 1/6 and 1/7 1/8 and 1/9 1/10 and 1/11 1/34 1/37
10
1/4
Starters for customer assembly
Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Machines starting under no-load: star-delta starters
1
D.O.L. or reversing starters D.O.L., reversing or star-delta starters with circuit-breakers D.O.L., reversoing or star-delta starters with fuses
2
Total coordination Type 1 and type 2 coordination – –

6
Up to 15 kW Up to 110 kW Up to 315 kW Up to 355 kW
Starter-controller Thermal magnetic

circuit-breaker
Magnetic circuit-breaker
+ contactor(s)
Fuse carrier
+ contactor(s)
Switch-disconnector-fuse
+ contactor(s) 7
+ contactor(s) + thermal overload relay + thermal overload relay + thermal overload relay
1/62 and 1/63 1/16 and 1/17, 1/26

and 1/27
1/18 and 1/19,
1/28 and 1/29
1/22
1/31
1/23, 1/31
1/32 and 1/33 8
10
1/5
References 1
TeSys motor starters - open version 1

with overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination
1 This pre-assembled combination comprises:

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 ME,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 K,
b 1 combination block GV2 AF01.
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 ME06K1 ME07K1 ME08K1 ME10K1 ME14K1 ME16K1
2 Breaking
capacity (lq)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V kA 50 50 50 50 50 15
(1) 440 V kA 50 50 50 50 15 8
500 V kA 50 50 50 50 10 (4 kW) 6
6 (5.5 kW)
References
3 D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Standard power ratings Setting Fixed For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight
of 3-phase motors range of magnetic
50/60 Hz in AC-3 thermal tripping
400/ 440 V 500 V trips current Motor Contactor Basic reference,
415 V 13 Irth circuit- Reference to be completed
breaker to be by adding the
4 Reference completed
(2)
voltage code
(3)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.37 0.37 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC1 K06 GV2 ME06K1pp 0.460
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC1 K06 GV2 ME07K1pp 0.460
5 – 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC1 K06 GV2 ME08K1pp 0.460
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC1 K06 GV2 ME10K1pp 0.460
– 3 3
6 GV2 ME10K1pp 3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC1 K09 GV2 ME14K1pp 0.460
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC1 K12 GV2 ME16K1pp 0.460
Add-on blocks
7 Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 10 GV2 AF01 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11
3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2I¿FH
6WDQGDUGFRQWUROFLUFXLWYROWDJHVIRURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2I¿FH
8 Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24
B7
110
F7
220/230
M7
230
P7
230/240
U7
380/400
Q7
c (4) BW3 – – – – –
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.7…1.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
10
Dimensions : Schemes :
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/6
References 1

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

This pre-assembled combination comprises:
1
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 K,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 ME06K2 ME07K2 ME08K2 ME10K2 ME14K2 ME16K2
Breaking
capacity (lq)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-4-1
400/415 V kA 50 50 50 50 50 15 2
(1) 440 V kA 50 50 50 50 15 8
500 V kA 50 50 50 50 10/4 kW 6
6/5.5 kW
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing 3
Reference completed
(2)
voltage code
(3) 4
kW kW kW A A kg
0.37 0.37 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC2 K06 GV2 ME06K2pp 0.460
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC2 K06 GV2 ME07K2pp 0.460
– 1.1 1.1
5
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC2 K06 GV2 ME08K2pp 0.460
1.5 1.5 2.2
GV2 ME10K2pp
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC2 K06 GV2 ME10K2pp 0.460
– 3 3
3
4
–
4
4
5.5
6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC2 K09 GV2 ME14K2pp 0.460 6
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC2 K12 GV2 ME16K2pp 0.460
Add-on blocks
Description Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg 7
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 10 GV2 AF01 0.020
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 ME can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
Volts 24 110 220/230 230 230/240 380/400 8
a 50/60 Hz B7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7
c (4) BW3 – – – – –
(4) Coil: low consumption (1.5 W), wide range (0.7…1.3 Uc) with integral suppression device as standard.
10
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/7
References 1

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DM 102 to DM 114 DM 116 DM 120 DM 121 DM 122 DM 132
2 DM 110
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA 50 50 15 15 15 15 10

capacity (lq) IEC 60947-4-1 440 V kA 50 15 8 8 6 6 6
(1)
500 V kA 50 6 6 6 4 4 4
References
3 D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
Reference completed voltage code
4 (2) (2)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 0.06 – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 ME02 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM102pp (3) 0.596
0.09 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 ME03 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM103pp (3) 0.596
– 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME04 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM104pp (3) 0.596
0.18 0.18 –
5 0.25
0.37
0.25
0.37
–
–
0.63…1 13 GV2 ME05 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM105pp (3) 0.596
– – 0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM106pp (3) 0.596
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM107pp (3) 0.596
– 1.1 1.1
GV2 DM102pp
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM108pp (3) 0.596
6 1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2 2.2 – 4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM110pp (3) 0.596
– 3 3
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC1 D09pp GV2 DM114pp (3) 0.596
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC1 D12pp GV2 DM116pp 0.601
7.5 7.5 – 13…18 223 GV2 ME20 LC1 D18pp GV2 DM120pp 0.606
7 –
9
9
11
9
11 17…23 327 GV2 ME21 LC1 D25pp GV2 DM121pp 0.646
11 – 15 20…25 327 GV2 ME22 LC1 D25pp GV2 DM122pp 0.646
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 ME32 LC1 D32pp GV2 DM132pp 0.651
Add-on blocks
Description Mounting of Sold in Unit Weight
8 GV2
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail
lots of
10
reference
GV2-AF3
kg
0.016
Mounting plate 10 GV2-AF4 0.016
LAD 311
9 Volts
a 50/60 Hz
24
B7
220
M7
230
P7
c (4) BD – –
(3) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/17
(4) Only available for GV2 DM. Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
10
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/8
References 1

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DM202 to DM214 DM216 DM220 DM221 DM222 DM232
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA

DM210
50 50 15 15 15 15 10
2
(1)
500 V kA 50 10 6 6 4 4 4
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing (2)
Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
Setting
range of
Fixed
magnetic
For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight 3
Reference completed (3) voltage code (4)
kW kW kW A A kg
0.06 0.06 – 0.16…0.25 2.4 GV2 ME02 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM202pp 0.963 4
0.09 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 ME03 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM203pp 0.963
– 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 ME04 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM204pp 0.963
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 ME05 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM205pp 0.963
0.37 0.37 –
–
0.55
–
0.55
0.37
0.55
1…1.6 22.5 GV2 ME06 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM206pp 0.963 5
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 ME07 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM207pp 0.963
GV2 DM202pp – 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 ME08 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM208pp 0.963
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2
–
2.2
3
–
3
4…6.3 78 GV2 ME10 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM210pp 0.963
6
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 ME14 LC2 D09pp GV2 DM214pp 0.963
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 ME16 LC2 D12pp GV2 DM216pp 0.973
7.5 7.5 – 13…18 223 GV2 ME20 LC2 D18pp GV2 DM220pp 0.983
– 9 9
9
11
11
–
11
15
17…23
20…25
327
327
GV2 ME21
GV2 ME22
LC2 D25pp
LC2 D25pp
GV2 DM221pp
GV2 DM222pp
1.063
1.063
7
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 ME32 LC2 D32pp GV2 DM232pp 1.073
Add-on blocks
GV2 lots of reference kg
Combination block between
circuit-breaker and contactor
5 rail
Mounting plate 10
10 GV2-AF3
GV2-AF4
0.016
0.016
8
LAD 311
(2) Type 2 coordination also possible, see page 1/20.
(3) See page 5/62.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7 9
c (5) BD – –
(5) Coil with integral suppression device as standard.
10
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/9
References 1

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 P,
b 1 3-pole contactor LC1 D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DP102 to DP114 DP116 DP120 DP121 DP122 DP132
2 Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA
DP110
130 130 130 50 50 50 50
(1)
500 V kA 130 50 42 10 10 10 10
References
D.O.L. starters, non-reversing
3 Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
Setting
range of
Fixed
magnetic
For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight

(2) (3)
4 kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
–
A
0.16…0.25
A
2.4 GV2 P02 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP102pp
kg
0.686
– 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 P03 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP103pp 0.686
0.09 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 P04 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP104pp 0.686
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 P05 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP105pp 0.686
5 GV2 DP102pp
0.37
–
0.37
–
–
0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 P06 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP106pp 0.686
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 P07 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP107pp 0.686
– 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 P08 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP108pp 0.696
1.5 1.5 2.2
6 2.2
–
2.2
3
–
3
4…6.3 78 GV2 P10 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP110pp 0.736
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 P14 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP114pp 0.736

4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 P16 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP116pp 0.741
– 7.5 9
7.5 9 – 13…18 223 GV2 P20 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP120pp 0.736
9 11 11 17…23 327 GV2 P21 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP121pp 0.741
7 11 – 15 20…25 327 GV2 P22 LC1 D25pp GV2 DP122pp 0.741
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 P32 LC1 D32pp GV2 DP132pp 0.741
18.5 – – 30…40 560 GV3 P401 (4) LC1 D50App – 1.725
– 18.5 22 30…40 560 GV3 P401 (4) LC1 D65App – 1.730
22 – – 37…50 700 GV3 P501 (4) LC1 D50App – 1.725
– 22 30 37…50 700 GV3 P501 (4) LC1 D65App – 1.730
8 30 37 – 48…65 910 GV3 P651 (4) LC1 D65App – 1.730
Add-on blocks
Combination block between 5 rail 10 GV2-AF3 0.016
circuit-breaker and contactor Mounting plate 10 GV2-AF4 0.016
GV3 P651 LAD 311
9 +
LC1 D65App
(1) The breaking performance of circuit-breakers GV2 P can be increased by adding a current limiter GV1 L3, see page 3/11.
(2) See page 5/62.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (5) BD – –
10 (4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink® power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see
page 5/85).
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/10
References 1
Combination automatic motor starters with overload

protection built into the circuit-breaker
D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

b 1 motor circuit-breaker GV2 P,
1
b 1 3-pole reversing contactor LC2 D,
Characteristics
Starter type GV2 DP202 to DP214 DP216 DP220 DP221 DP222 DP232
Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA

DP210
130 130 130 50 50 50 50
2
(1)
500 V kA 130 50 42 10 10 10 10
References
D.O.L. starters, reversing
of 3-phase motors
Setting
range of
Fixed
magnetic
For customer assembly Pre-assembled Weight 3
(2) (3)
kW
0.06
kW
0.06
kW
–
A
0.16…0.25
A
2.4 GV2 P02 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP202pp
kg
1.053
4
– 0.09 – 0.25…0.40 5 GV2 P03 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP203pp 1.053
0.09 0.12
0.12 – – 0.40…0.63 8 GV2 P04 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP204pp 1.053
0.18 0.18 –
0.25 0.25 – 0.63…1 13 GV2 P05 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP205pp 1.053
GV2 DP202pp
0.37
–
0.37
–
–
0.37 1…1.6 22.5 GV2 P06 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP206pp 1.053
5
0.55 0.55 0.55
– – 0.75
0.75 0.75 – 1.6…2.5 33.5 GV2 P07 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP207pp 1.053
– 1.1 1.1
1.1 – 1.5 2.5…4 51 GV2 P08 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP208pp 1.073
1.5 1.5 2.2
2.2
–
2.2
3
–
3
4…6.3 78 GV2 P10 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP210pp 1.153 6
3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 P14 LC2 D09pp GV2 DP214pp 1.153
4 4 5.5
5.5 5.5 7.5 9…14 170 GV2 P16 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP216pp 1.163
– 7.5 9
7.5 9 – 13…18 223 GV2 P20 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP220pp 1.153
9 11 11 17…23 327 GV2 P21 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP221pp 1.163
11 – 15 20…25 327 GV2 P22 LC2 D25pp GV2 DP222pp 1.163 7
15 15 18.5 24…32 416 GV2 P32 LC2 D32pp GV2 DP232pp 1.163
18.5 – – 30…40 560 GV3 P401 (4) LC2 D50App – 2.750
– 18.5 22 30…40 560 GV3 P401 (4) LC2 D65App – 2.760
22 – – 37…50 700 GV3 P501 (4) LC2 D50App – 2.750
– 22 30 37…50 700 GV3 P501 (4) LC2 D65App – 2.760
30 37 – 48…65 910 GV3 P651 (4) LC2 D65App – 2.760 8
Add-on blocks
Combination block between circuit-breaker and contactor 5 rail 10 GV2-AF3 0.016
Mounting plate 10 GV2-AF4 0.016
GV3 P651
+
LC2 D65App
LAD 311
9
(2) See page 5/62.
Volts 24 220 230
a 50/60 Hz B7 M7 P7
c (5) BD – –
(4) Circuit-breaker supplied without downstream EverLink® power terminal block, which is required for vertical mounting.
For side by side mounting, use a GV3 P circuit-breaker with terminal blocks and the GV3S set of S-shape busbars (see 10
page 5/85).
page 1/12 page 1/14
1/11
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open
mounting 1
version 1
GV2 MEppKppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 GV2 MEppK1pp GV2 MEppK2pp
152
152
2
11 66 45 90
3 87
4
GV2 DMppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DM1pppp GV2 DM2pppp
5
1
b
b
125 ± 3
234
c1 45 90
c
7 c1
c
d1
d
GV2 DMp02pp to DMp21pp to GV2 DMp02pp to DMp21pp to

8 b
DMp20pp
176.4
DMp32pp
186.8 c
DMp20pp
135.6
DMp32pp
141.9
c 99.6 105.9 c1 130.1 136.4
c1 94.1 100.4 d 112.5 112.5
d1 107 107
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/12
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open
mounting (continued) 1 version 1
GV2 DPppppp
On mounting rail AM1 DE200 With adapter plate LAD 311 GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
1
1
b
2
b
125 ± 3
234
c1 45 90
c
d1
3
d c1
c
GV2 DPp02pp to DPp10pp to GV2 DPp02pp to DPp10pp to

DPp08pp DPp32pp DPp08pp DPp32pp
b
c
176.4
105.6
186.8
111.9
c
c1
141.6
136.5
147.9
142.4
4
c1 100.1 106.4
d 100.5 100.5
d1 95 95
GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40A…D65A (for customer assembly)

Vertical mounting (1) Side by side mounting with S-shape busbar system GV3 S (2) 5
138
6
+3
0
120
231
136 119
141
7
120
136 55
141
8
(1) For several side-by-side motor starters, the maximum current allowed is equal to the nominal current under 400 V.
Example: 55 A for a 30 kW motor under 400 V, for a GV3 P65 circuit-breaker and a LC1 D65A contactor association.
(2) The maximum current allowed is equal to 90 % of maximum current. Example: 45 A for a LC1 D50A contactor.
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/13
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
A2 A1 A2 A1
1/14
T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1
References :
T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2
pages 1/6 to 1/11

T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
GV2 DM1pppp
T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
GV2 MEppK1pp
Schemes
14 13/NO 14 13/NO
22 21/NC
1
A2 A1
A2 A1
2 1 L1 2/T1 1/L1 T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1
4 3 L2 4/T2 3/L2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2
6 5 L3 6/T3 5/L3 T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3
GV2 DM2pppp
GV2 MEppK2pp
version
14 13/NO 14 13/NO
22 21/NC
U 2 1 T1/2 1/L1
V 4 3 T2/4 3/L2
W 6 5 T3/6 5/L3
14 13/NO 14 13/NO
22 21/NC A2 A1
A2 A1
TeSys motor starters - open
1
Schemes (continued) 1
TeSys motor starters - open
version 1
GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
L1 2/T1
L2 4/T2
L3 6/T3
13/NO
21/NC
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A1
A2
13/NO
13/NO
22
3
14
21/NC
21/NC
T1/2
T2/4
T3/6
3
5
5
1
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
6
6
2
4
22
22
14
14
4
W
U
Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

Control circuit a Control circuit c
5
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
A1
01
02
02
01
01
01
— KM1 — KM2
A1
A1
02
— KM1 — KM2 — KM1 — KM2 6

02
A2
A2
A2
A2
10
References :
pages 1/6 to 1/11
1/15
Combination starters TeSys motor starters - open version
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker
and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Contactor
1 50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
Reference Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2)
P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1)

kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A
0.06 0.2 50 0.06 0.19 50 – – – GV2 ME02 0.16…0.25 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.09 0.3 50 0.09 0.28 50 – – – GV2 ME03 0.25…0.40 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
2 0.12 0.44 50
0.12
–
0.37
–
50
– – – – GV2 ME04 0.40…0.63 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.18 0.6 50 0.18 0.55 50 – – –
0.25 0.85 50 0.25 0.76 50 GV2 ME05 0.63…1 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.37 1.1 50 0.37 0.99 50
– – – – – – 0.37 0.88 50 GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.55 1.5 50 0.55 1.36 50 0.55 1.2 50
3 – – – – – – 0.75 1.5 50 GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
0.75 1.9 50 0.75 1.68 50 – – – GV2 ME07 1.6….2.5 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
– – – 1.1 2.37 50 1.1 2.2 50
1.1 2.7 50 – – – 1.5 2.9 5050 GV2 ME08 2.5…4 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
1.5 3.6 50 1.5 3.06 50 2.2 3.9
2.2 4.9 50 2.2 4.42 50 – – – GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09
4 –
3
–
6.5
–
50
3
–
5.77
–
50
–
3
4
5.2
6.8
50
10 GV2 ME14 6…10 LC1 K09 or LC1 D09
4 8.5 50 4 7.9 15 5.5 9.2 10
5.5 11.5 15 5.5 10.4 8 7.5 12.4 6 GV2 ME16 9…14 LC1 K12 or LC1 D12
7.5 15.5 15 7.5 13.7 8 9 13.9 6 GV2 ME20 13…18 LC1 D18
– – – 9 16.9 8 – – –
9 18.1 15 11 20.1 6 11 17.6 4 GV2 ME21 17…23 LC1 D25
5
11 22 15 – – – 15 23 4 GV2 ME22 20…25 LC1 D25
15 29 10 15 26.5 6 18.5 28 4 GV2 ME32 24…32 LC1 D32
18.5 35 50 18.5 32.8 50 22 33 10 GV3 P40 30…40 LC1 D40A
6 22 41 50 22 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 P50 37…50 LC1 D50A
37 55 50 37 51.5 50 37 53 10 GV3 P65 48…65 LC1 D65A
– – – 37 64 25 45 64 18 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC1 D65A
37 66 15 45 76 10 55 78 4 GV3 ME80 56…80 LC1 D80

7 37 66 25 45 76 25 55 78 18 GV7 RE80 48…80 LC1 D80
45 80 25 – – – – – – GV7 RE100 60…100 LC1 D95
– – – 50 90 25 – – – GV7 RE100 60…100 LC1 D115
8 55 97 25 – – – 75 106 30 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC1 D115
75 132 35 75 125 35 90 128 30 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC1 D150
– – – 90 146 35 – – – GV7 RE150 90…150 LC1 F185
90 160 35 – – – 110 156 30 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC1 F185
9 –
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
–
178
–
35
132
160
184
224
30
30
GV7 RE220 132…220 LC1 F265
110 195 35 132 215 35 – – – GV7 RE220 132…220 LC1 F225
)RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH¿[/&ZLWK/&
10
1/16
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker
and overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Contactor
50/60 Hz in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
Reference Setting range
of thermal trips
Reference (2) 1
P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1)
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A
0.06 0.2 130 0.06 0.19 130 – – – GV2 P02 or GV2 ME02 0.16…0.25 LC1 D09
– – – 0.09 0.28 130 – – – GV2 P03 or GV2 ME03 0.25…0.4 LC1 D09
0.09
0.12
0.3
0.44
130
130
0.12
–
0.37
–
130
–
–
–
–
–
–
– GV2 P04 or GV2 ME04 0.4…0.63 LC1 D09
2
0.18 0.6 130 0.18 0.55 130 – – –
0.25 0.85 130 0.25 0.76 130 – – – GV2 P05 or GV2 ME05 0.63…1 LC1 D09
0.37 1.1 130 0.37 0.99 130 – – –
– – – – – – 0.37 0.88 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 D09
0.55 1.5 130 0.55 1.36 130 0.55 1.2 130
– – – – – – 0.75 1.5 130 GV2 P06 or GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 D09
3
0.75 1.9 130 0.75 1.68 130 – – – GV2 P07 or GV2 ME07 1.6…2.5 LC1 D09
– – – 1.1 2.37 130 1.1 2.2 130
1.1 2.7 130 – – – 1.5 2.9 130 GV2 P08 or GV2 ME08 2.5…4 LC1 D09
1.5 3.6 130 1.5 3.06 130 2.2 3.9 130
– – – – – – – – – GV2 P10 or GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC1 D09
2.2
–
4.9
–
130
–
–
2.2
–
4.42
–
50
–
–
–
–
–
– GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC1 D09 4
– – – 3 5.77 50 3 5.2 50
– – – 2.2 4.42 130 – – – GV2 P10 4…6.3 LC1 D09
– – – 3 5.77 130 3 5.2 130
3 6.5 130 – – – – – – GV2 P14 or GV2 ME14 6…10 LC1 D09
4 8.5 130 – – – – – –
– – – 4 7.9 15 4 6.8 10 GV2 ME14 6…10 LC1 D09
– – – – – – 5.5 9.2 10 5
– – – – – – 4 6.8 50 GV2 P14 6…10 LC1 D12
– – – 4 7.9 130 5.5 9.2 50
5.5 11.5 130 5.5 10.4 50 7.5 12.4 42 GV2 P16 or GV2 ME16 9…14 LC1 D25
– – – 7.5 13.7 50 9 13.9 42
7.5 15.5 50 9 16.9 20 – – – GV2 P20 or GV2 ME20 13…18 LC1 D25
9 18.1 50 11 20.1 20 11 17.6 10 GV2 P21 or GV2 ME21 17…23 LC1 D25
11 22 50 – – – – – – GV2 P22 or GV2 ME22 20…25 LC1 D25 6
– – – – – – 15 23 10 GV2 P22 20…25 LC1 D32
15 29 35 15 26.5 25 18.5 28 10 GV2 P32 or GV2 ME32 25…40 LC1 D32
18.5 35 50 – – – – – – GV3 P40 30…40 LC1 D50A
– – – 18.5 32.8 50 22 33 10 GV3 P40 30…40 LC1 D65A
22 41 50 – – – – – – GV3 P50 37…50 LC1 D50A
–
37
–
55
–
50
22
37
39
51.5
50
50
30
–
44
–
10
–
GV3 P50
GV3 P65
37…50
48…65
LC1 D65A
LC1 D65A
7
– – – – – – 37 53 10 GV3 P65 48…65 LC1 D80
– – – 22 39 65 – – – GV7 RS40 25…40 LC1 D80
– – – – – – 30 44 50 GV7 RS50 30…50 LC1 D80
– – – – – – 37 53 50 GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
22
30
41
55
70
70
–
30
–
51.5
–
65
–
–
–
–
–
–
GV7 RS50
GV7 RS80
30…50
48…80
LC1 D80
LC1 D80
8
37 66 70 37 64 65 – – – GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
– – – 45 76 65 – – – GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D80
– – – – – – 45 64 50 GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D115
– – – – – – 55 78 50 GV7 RS80 48…80 LC1 D115
45 80 70 – – – – – – GV7 RS100 60…100 LC1 D115
– – – 55 90 65 – – – 9
55 97 70 75 125 65 – – – GV7 RS150 90…150 LC1 D150
75 132 70 90 146 65 90 128 50
90 160 70 110 178 65 110 156 50 GV7 RS220 132…220 LC1 F185
110 195 70 132 215 65 – – – GV7 RS220 132…220 LC1 F225
– – – – – – 132 184 50 GV7 RS220 132…220 LC1 F265
– – – – – – 160 224 50
(2) Combinations with circuit-breaker GV2 ME are type 2 coordinated only at 400/415 V and 440 V.
10
1/17
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with circuit-breaker and overload
protection by separate thermal overload relay

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Contactor Thermal overload relay
400/415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Rating Irm (1) Reference (2) Reference Setting
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq P Ie Iq range
kW A kA kW A kA kW A kA A A A
0.06 0.2 50 0.06 0.19 50 – – – GV2 LE03 0.4 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0302 0.16…0.23
– – – 0.09 0.28 50 – – – GV2 LE03 0.4 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0303 0.23…0.36
2 0.09 0.3 50 0.12 0.37 50 – – – GV2 LE03 0.4 5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 0.36…0.54
0.12 0.44 50 – – – GV2 LE04 0.63 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 0.36…0.54
0.18 0.6 50 0.18 0.55 50 – – – GV2 LE04 0.63 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 0.54…0.8
3 – – – 0.25 0.76 50 – – – GV2 LE05 1 13 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 0.54…0.8
0.25 0.85 50 – – – – – – GV2 LE05 1 13 LC1 K06 LR2 K0306 0.8…1.2

0.37 1.1 50 0.37 1 50 0.37 0.88 50
0.55 1.5 50 0.55 1.36 50 0.55 1.2 50 GV2 LE06 1.6 22.5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 1.2…1.8
– – – – – – 0.75 1.5 50
– – – 0.75 1.68 50 – – – GV2 LE07 2.5 33.5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 1.2…1.8
4 0.75 1.9 50 – – – – – – GV2 LE07 2.5 33.5 LC1 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
1.1 2.7 50 1.1 2.37 50 1.1 2.2 50
1.5 3.6 50 1.5 3.06 50 1.5 2.9 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC1 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
– – – – – – 2.2 3.9 50 GV2 LE08 4 51 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
2.2 4.9 50 2.2 4.4 50 3 5.2 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
5
– – – 3 5.77 50 – – – GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC1 K06 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
– – – 4 7.9 15 – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
3 6.5 50 – – – 4 6.8 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
6 4 8.5 50 – – – – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
5.5 11.5 15 5.5 10.4 8 7.5 12.4 6 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC1 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
– – – 7.5 13.7 8 9 13.9 6 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
7.5 15.5 15 9 16.9 8 – – – GV2 LE20 18 223 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
7 9 18.1 15 – – – 11 17.6 4 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
11 22 15 11 20.1 6 15 23 4 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 29 10 15 26.5 6 18.5 28 4 GV2 LE32 32 416 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
8 18.5 35 50 18.5 32.5 50 22 33 10 GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D40A LRD 340 30…40
22 41 50 22 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 L50 50 700 LC1 D50A LRD 350 37…50
(1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

10
1/18
(continued) protection by separate thermal overload relay
0.06 to 250 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination (continued)

1
37 55 50 37 51.5 50 37 53 10 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
– – – 37 64 50 37 53 10 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
– – – – – – 45 64 50 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 48…65

2
37 66 70 45 76 65 55 78 25 NS80HMA 80 1040 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 80 (3) – – – – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 1300 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…104
– – – – – – 50 90 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1200 LC1 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
3
– – – – – – 75 106 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1500 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
55 97 (3) – – – – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1350 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
75 132 (3) 75 125 (3) 90 128 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1800 LC1 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
– – – 90 146 (3) – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220 4
90 160 (3) – – – 110 156 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 2200 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 195 (3) – – – – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2640 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 110 178 (3) – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2420 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
5
– – – – – – 132 184 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 2640 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 132 215 (3) – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2860 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 230 (3) – – – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 3200 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 160 224 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 2860 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330 6
– – – 160 256 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 3520 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 280 (3) 200 321 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 4160 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 200 280 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 3840 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 220 310 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 4160 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
7
200 350 (3) 220 353 (3) – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – 250 401 (3) – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5550 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 250 344 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
8
220 388 (3) – – – – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 430 (3) 280 470 (3) 315 432 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 6000 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 355 488 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 6500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630

9
(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA and NS250pMA NS400pMA and NS630pMA
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130
500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70
660/690 V 8 10 8 10 20 35 10
Code N H N H H L
1/19

0.06 0.2 130 0.06 0.19 130 – – – GV2 L03 or LE03 0.4 5 LC1 D09 LRD 02 0.16…0.25
0.09 0.3 130 0.09 0.28 130 – – – GV2 L03 or LE03 0.4 5 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0.25…0.40
2 –
0.12
–
0.44
–
130
0.12
–
0.37
–
130
–
–
–
–
–
–
– GV2 L04 or LE04 0.63 8 LC1 D09 LRD 04 0.4…0.63
0.18 0.6 130 0.18 0.55 130 – – –
0.25 0.85 130 0.25 0.76 130 – – – GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
0.37 1.1 130 0.37 0.99 130 – – –
– – – – – – 0.37 0.88 130 GV2 L05 or LE05 1 13 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
3 0.55
–
1.5
–
130
–
–
0.55
–
1.36
–
130
0.55
0.75
1.2
1.5
130
130
GV2 L06 or LE06 1.6 22.5 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
0.75 1.9 130 0.75 1.68 130 1.1 2.2 130 GV2 L07 or LE07 2.5 33.5 LC1 D09 LRD 07 1.6…2.5
1.1 2.7 130 1.1 2.37 130 1.5 2.9 130 GV2 L08 or LE08 4 51 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
1.5 3.6 130 – – – 2.2 3.9 130
– – – 1.5 3.06 130 – – – GV2 L08 or LE08 4 51 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
4 2.2 4.9 130 – – – – – – GV2 L10 or LE10 6.3 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
– – – – – – 3 5.2 13
– – – 2.2 4.42 50 – – – GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
– – – 3 5.77 50 3 5.2 50
– – – 2.2 4.42 130 – – – GV2 L10 6.3 78 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
– – – 3 5.77 130 3 5.2 130
3 6.5 130 – – – – – – GV2 L14 or LE14 10 10 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
5
– – – – – – 4 6.8 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D12 LRD 12 5.5…8
– – – – – – 4 6.8 50 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D12 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.5 130 – – – – – – GV2 L14 or LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
6 – – – 4 7.9 15 – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – 4 7.9 130 – – – GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – – – – 5.5 9.2 10 GV2 LE14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
– – – – – – 5.5 9.2 50 GV2 L14 10 138 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10

7 5.5 11.5 130 5.5 10.4 50 7.5 12.4 42 GV2 L16 14 170 LC1 D25 LRD 16 9…13
– – – 7.5 13.7 50 – – – GV2 L16 14 170 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
7.5 15.5 50 9 16.9 20 9 13.9 42 GV2 L20 18 223 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
8 9
11
18.1
22
50
50
–
11
–
20.1
–
20
–
–
–
–
–
–
GV2 L22 25 327 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
– – – – – – 11 17.6 10 GV2 L22 25 327 LC1 D32 LRD 22 16…24

– – – – – – 15 23 10
15 29 50 15 26.5 50 – – – GV3 L32 32 448 LC1 D40A LRD 332 23…32
– – – – – – 18.5 28 10 GV3 L32 32 448 LC1 D65A LRD 332 23…32
9 (1) Irm: setting current of the magnetic trip.

10
1/20

1
18.5 35 50 – – – – – – GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D50A LRD 340 30…40
– – – 18.5 32.5 50 – – – GV3 L40 40 560 LC1 D65A LRD 340 30…40
22 41 50 – – – – – – GV3 L50 50 700 LC1 D50A LRD 350 37…50

2
– – 22 39 50 30 44 10 GV3 L50 50 700 LC1 D65A LRD 350 37…50
37 55 50 37 51.5 50 – – – GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
– – – 37 64 50 37 53 10 GV3 L65 65 910 LC1 D80 LRD 3359 48…65

3
37 66 70 45 76 65 – – – NS80HMA 80 1000 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – – – 55 78 (3) NS100pMA (3) 100 1040 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 80 (3) 55 90 (3) – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 1300 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
55 97 (3) – – – – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1500 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150 4
– – – – – – 75 106 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1050 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 132 (3) 75 125 (3) – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – 90 146 (3) – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1950 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
5
– – – – – – 90 128 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 160 (3) 110 178 (3) – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2420 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – – – – 110 156 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 1540 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 195 (3) – – – – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 2860 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220 6
– – – 132 215 (3) 132 184 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 2200 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 230 (3) 160 256 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 3520 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 160 224 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 2200 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 280 (3) – – – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 4000 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
7
– – – 200 321 (3) – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 4000 LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 200 280 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 3500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – – – 220 310 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 3500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
8
– – – 220 353 (3) – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 5500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
200 350 (3) 250 401 (3) – – –
– – – – – – 250 344 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 4500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – – – 315 432 (3)
220 388 (3) – – – – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 6250 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 430 (3) – – – – – –
– – – – – – 355 488 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 5000 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630 9
(3) Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA and NS250pMA NS400pMA and NS630pMA
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130 10
500 V 18 50 30 50 50 70
660/690 V 8 10 8 10 20 35
Code N H N H H L
1/21
for customer assembly D.O.L starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz Fuse carrier (1) aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
1 in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
(basic block)
Reference Size Rating Reference (2)
class 10
Reference Setting
P Ie P Ie P Ie range
kW A kW A kW A A A
0.06 0.2 0.06 0.19 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0302 0.16…0.23
2 – – 0.09 0.28 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0303 0.23…0.36
0.09 0.3 – – – –
0.12 0.44 0.12 0.37 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0304 0.36…0.54
0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 – –

3 – – 0.25 0.76 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0305 0.54…0.8
0.25 0.85 – – – –
0.37 1.1 0.37 1 0.37 0.88 LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0306 0.8…1.2
0.55 1.5 0.55 1.36 0.55 1.2

– – 0.75 1.68 0.75 1.5 LS1 D32 10 x 38 2 LC1 K06 LR2 K0307 1.2…1.8
4 0.75
1.1
1.9
2.7
–
1.1
–
2.37
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.9 LS1 D32 10 x 38 4 LC1 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
1.5 3.6 1.5 3.06 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 4 LC1 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
2.2 4.9 – – 2.2 3.9
5 – – – – 3 5.2 LS1 D32 10 x 38 6 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
– – 2.2 4.42 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC1 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6.8 LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC1 K09 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
6 4 8.5 4 7.9 5.5 9.2 LS1 D32 10 x 38 12 LC1 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.

(2))RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH¿[/&ZLWK/&.
10
1/22
(continued) (NF C or DIN fuses, type aM)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz Fuse carrier (1) aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
(basic block)
Reference Size Rating Reference (2)
classe 10
Reference Setting
1
kW A kW A kW A A A
5.5 11.5 5.5 10.4 7.5 12.4 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC1 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
7.5 15.5 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18 2
– – 9 16.9 – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 20 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 – – 11 17.6
11 22 11 20.1 15 23 GK1 EK 14 x 51 25 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 29 15 26.5 18.5 28 GK1 EK 14 x 51 32 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32

3
18.5 35 18.5 32.8 22 33 GK1 EK 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
22 41 22 39 30 44 GK1 FK 22 x 58 50 LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50 4

– – 30 51.5 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
– – – – 37 53 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
5
30 55 37 64 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65 LRD 3361 55…70
– – – – 45 64 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC1 D80 LRD 3361 55…70
37 (3) 66 45 76 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 100 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80

6
45 80 – – 55 78 GK1 FK 22 x 58 100 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…93
– – 55 90 – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 125 LC1 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
55 97 – – 75 106 GK1 FK 22 x 58 125 LC1 D115 LRD 4367 95…120

7
(1) For breaking under load, add a rotary switch-disconnector.
(3) 400 V maximum.
10
1/23

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz Switch- aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
1 in category AC-3
400/415 V 440 V 500 V
disconnector
Reference (1) Size Rating Reference (2)
classe 10
Reference Setting
kW A kW A kW A A A
0.06 0.2 0.06 0.19 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 02 0.16…0.25
– – 0.09 0.28 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0.25…0.4
0.09 0.3 – – – –
2 0.12 0.44 0.12 0.37 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 04 0.4…0.63
0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 – –
– – 0.25 0.76 – – GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
0.25 0.85 – – 0.37 0.88
0.37 1.1 0.37 1 0.55 1.2
0.55 1.5 0.55 1.36 0.75 1.5 GS1 DD 10 x 38 2 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
0.75 1.9 0.75 1.68 – –
3 –
1.1
–
2.7
1.1
–
2.37
–
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.9
GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LRD 07 1.6…2.5
1.5 3.6 1.5 3.06 2.2 3.9 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 4.9 2.2 4.42 3 5.2 GS1 DD 10 x 38 6 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6.8 GS1 DD 10 x 38 8 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.5 4 7.9 5.5 9.2 GS1 DD 10 x 38 10 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11.5 5.5 10.4 7.5 12.4 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13
4 7.5 15.5 7.5 13.7 9 13.9 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
– – 9 16.9 – – GSp F 14 x 51 20 LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 11 20.1 11 17.6
11 22 – – 15 23 GSp F 14 x 51 25 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 29 15 26.5 18.5 28 GSp F 14 x 51 3 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
18.5 35 18.5 32.8 22 33 GSp F 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40A LRD 340 30…40
5 22
–
41
–
22
30
39
51.5
30
–
44
–
GSp J
GSp J
22 x 58
22 x 58
50
80
LC1 D50A
LC1 D65A
LRD 350
LRD 365
37…50
48…65
– – – – 37 53 GSp J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
30 55 37 64 – – GSp J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
– – – – 45 64 GSp J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D95 LRD 3361 55…70
37 66 45 76 – – GSp J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – 55 78 GSp J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
6 45 80 – – – – GSp J 22 x 58 100 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…93
55 97 55 90 75 106 GSp L T0 125 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 132 75 125 90 128 GSp L T0 160 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 160 90 146 110 156 GSp N T1 200 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 195 110 178 132 184 GSp N T1 250 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 230 132 215 160 224 GSp QQ T2 315 LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
7 –
160
–
280
160
200
256
321
–
200
–
280
GSp QQ
GSp QQ
T2
T2
315
400
LC1 F330
LC1 F330
LR9 F7375
LR9 F7375
200…330
200…330
– – – – 220 310 GSp QQ T2 400 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330
200 350 – – – –
220 388 220 353 250 344 GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 430 250 401 – – GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – 315 432
8 – – – – 355 488 GS2 S T3 630 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630
315 540 315 505 – – GS2 S T3 630 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
– – 355 549 – –
– – 400 611 400 552 GS2 V T4 800 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
10
1/24
0.75 to 400 kW at 690 V: type 2 coordination

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- aM fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz
in category AC-3
disconnector classe 10
1
P Ie Reference (1) Size Rating Reference (2) Reference Setting range
kW A A A
0.75 1.1 GSp F 14 x 51 2 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.6
1.1 1.6 GSp F 14 x 51 2 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.6
1.5 2.1 GSp F 14 x 51 4 LC1 D09 LRD 07 1.6…2.5

2
2.2 2.8 GSp F 14 x 51 4 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
3 3.8 GSp F 14 x 51 6 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
4 4.9 GSp F 14 x 51 6 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6

3
5.5 6.7 GSp F 14 x 51 8 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
7.5 8.9 GSp F 14 x 51 10 LC1 D25 LRD 16 9…13
11 12.8 GSp F 14 x 51 16 LC1 D25 LRD 16 9…13
15 17 GSp F 14 x 51 20 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24 4

18.5 21 GSp F 14 x 51 25 LC1 D32 LRD 22 16…24
22 24 GSp F 14 x 51 32 LC1 D40A LRD 332 23…32
30 32 GSp F 14 x 51 40 LC1 D40A LRD 340 30…40
37 39 GSp F 14 x 51 50 LC1 D65A LRD 350 37…50

5
45 47 GSp J 22 x 58 63 LC1 D80 LR2 D3357 37…50
55 57 GSp J 22 x 58 80 LC1 D115 LR2 D3359 48…65
75 77 GSp KK T00 100 LC1 D115 LR2 D3363 63…80

6
90 93 GSp KK T00 125 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
110 113 GSp KK T00 125 LC1 F185 LR9 D5369 90…150
132 134 GSp L T0 160 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220
160 162 GSp N T1 200 LC1 F265 LR9 F5371 132…220 7

200 203 GSp N T1 250 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
220 224 GSp QQ T2 250 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330
250 250 GSp QQ T2 315 LC1 F400 LR9 F7375 200…330
315 313 GSp QQ T2 355 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500

8
355 354 GSp QQ T2 400 LC1 F630 LR9 F7379 300…500
400 400 GS2 S T3 500 LC1 F630 LR9 F7379 300…500
(1) GSp: GS1 for direct operator or GS2 for external operator.
(2))RUUHYHUVLQJRSHUDWLRQUHSODFHWKHSUH¿[/&ZLWK/&. 9
10
1/25
for customer assembly Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and
overload protection built into the circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate:/&.VWDUWVKRXU/&'VWDUWVKRXU
1 Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Star-delta

50-60 Hz in category AC-3 contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Setting range Reference
P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2) P Ie IrD (1) Iq (2) of thermal trips
kW A A kA kW A A kA A
2 1.5 3.6 2 50 1.5 3.06 1.8 50 GV2 ME08 2.5…4 LC3 K06
2.2 4.9 2.9 50 2.2 4.42 2.6 50 GV2 ME10 4…6.3 LC3 K06
– – – – 3 5.77 3.3 50
3 6.5 3.8 50 – – – – GV2 ME14 6…10 LC3 K06
4 8.5 4.9 50 4 7.9 4.6 15
5.5 11.5 6.4 15 5.5 10.4 6 8 GV2 ME16 9…14 LC3 K06
3 7.5 15.5 8.6 15 7.5 13.7 7.9 8 GV2 ME20 13…18 LC3 K09
– – – – 9 16.9 9.8 8 GV2 ME20 13…18 LC3 D12A
9 18.1 10 15 11 20.1 12 6 GV2 ME21 17…23 LC3 D12A
4 11 22 12 15 – – – – GV2 ME22 20…25 LC3 D12A
15 29 17 10 15 26.5 15 6 GV2 ME32 24…32 LC3 D18A
18.5 35 20 50 18.5 32.8 19 50 GV3 P40 30…40 LC3 D18A
– – – – 22 39 23 50 GV3 P50 37…50 LC3 D32A
5 22 41 24 50 30 51.5 30 50 GV3 P50 37…50 LC3 D32A
30 55 33 50 30 51.5 30 50 GV3 P65 48…65 LC3 D32A
37 66 40 50 37 64 37 50 GV3 P65 48…65 3 x LC1 D40A (3)
6 37 66 40 25 37 64 37 25 GV7 RE80 48…80 3 x LC1 D40A (3)
– – – – 45 76 44 10 GV3 ME80 56…80 2 x LC1 D50A

+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
– – – – 45 76 44 25 GV7 RE80 48…80 2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
45 80 47 25 – – – – GV7 RE100 60…100 2 x LC1 D50A
55 97 58 25 55 90 52 25 + 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
7 75 132 78 35 75 125 72 35 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC3 D80
– – – – 90 146 84 35 GV7 RE150 90…150 LC3 D115
90 160 95 35 110 178 103 35 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC3 D115

110 195 115 35
– – – – 132 215 124 35 GV7 RE220 132…220 LC3 D150
8
(1) IrD: current in the motor windings in delta connection.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
10
1/26
Combination starters or TeSys motor starters - open version
customer assembly Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and
overload protection built into the circuit-breaker
(continued)

Maximum operating rate:/&'VWDUWVKRXU/&)VWDUWVKRXU
Maximum starting time:/&'VHFRQGV/&)VHFRQGV 1
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50-60 Hz in category AC-3 Circuit-breaker Star-delta contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Setting range Reference
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq (1) of thermal trips
kW A kA kW A kA A
1.5 3.6 130 1.5 3.06 130 GV2 P08 2.5…4 3 x LC1 D09 (2)
2
2.2 4.9 130 2.2 4.42 130 GV2 P10 4…6.3 3 x LC1 D18 (3)
– – – 3 5.77 130 GV2 P10 4...6.3 3 x LC1 D18 (3)
3 6.5 130 – – – GV2 P14 6…10 3 x LC1 D18 (3)
4 8.5 130 4 7.9 130 GV2 P14 6…10 3 x LC1 D18 (3) 3
5.5 11.5 130 5.5 10.4 50 GV2 P16 9…14 3 x LC1 D25 (3)
– – – 7.5 13.7 50 GV2 P16 9…14 3 x LC1 D25 (3)
7.5 15.5 50 9 16.9 20 GV2 P20 13…18 3 x LC1 D25 (3)
9 18.1 50 11 20.1 20 GV2 P21 17…23 3 x LC1 D25 (3)

4
11 22 50 – – – GV2 P22 20…25 3 x LC1 D25 (3)
15 29 50 15 26.5 50 GV3 P32 23…32 3 x LC1 D40A (4)
18.5 35 50 – – – GV3 P40 30…40 2 x LC1 D50A

+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3) 5
– – – 18.5 32.8 50 GV3 P40 30…40 2 x LC1 D65A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
22 41 50 – – – GV3 P50 37…50 2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (3)
– – – 22 39 50 GV3 P50 37…50 2 x LC1 D65A
30 55 50 30 51.5 50 GV3 P65 48…65

+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
2 x LC1 D65A
6
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
37 66 70 37 64 65 GV7 RS80 48…80 3 x LC1 D80 (5)
– – – 45 76 65 GV7 RS80 48…80 3 x LC1 D80 (5)
45 80 70 – – – GV7 RS100 60…100 3 x LC1 D115 (6)

7
55 97 70 55 90 65 GV7 RS100 60…100 3 x LC1 D115 (6)
75 132 70 75 125 65 GV7 RS150 90…150 3 x LC1 D150 (6)
– – – 90 146 65 GV7 RS150 90…150 3 x LC1 D150 (6)
90 160 70 110 178 65 GV7 RS220 132…220 3 x LC1 F185 (7) 8

110 195 70 132 215 65 GV7 RS220 132…220 3 x LC1 F225 (7)
(2) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D09, star-delta starter kit LAD 91217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(3) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D18 or LC1 D25, star-delta starter kit LAD 93217 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(4) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 DppA, star-delta starter kit LAD 9SD3 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
(5) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D80, star-delta starter kit LA9 D8017 must be ordered separately, see page 5/76.
9
(6) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 D115 or LC1 D150, see page 1/41
(7) For mounting 3 contactors LC1 F185 or LC1 F225, see pages 1/47 and 1/49
10
1/27
for customer assembly Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload

Maximum operating rate:/&.DQG/&)VWDUWVKRXU/&'VWDUWVKRXU
1 Maximum starting time:/&.DQG/&'VHFRQGV/&)VHFRQGV
Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Star-delta Thermal overload relay
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (2) Reference Reference Setting
P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq range
kW A A kA kW A A kA A A A
2 –
1.5
–
3.6
–
2
–
50
1.5
2.2
3.06
4.42
1.8
3
50
50
GV2 LE08 4 51 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
2.2 4.9 3 50 3 5.77 3 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
3 6.5 4 50 – – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
– – – – 4 7.9 5 50 GV2 LE10 6.3 78 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
4 8.5 5 50 – – – – GV2 LE14 10 138 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
3 –
5.5
–
11.5
–
6
–
15
5.5
–
10.4
–
6
–
15
–
GV2 LE14
GV2 LE16
10
14
138
170
LC3 K06
LC3 K06
LR2 K0314
LR2 K0314
5.5…8
5.5…8
– – – – 7.5 13.7 8 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
7.5 15.5 9 15 – – – – GV2 LE20 18 223 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
– – – – 9 16.9 1 8 GV2 LE16 14 170 LC3 D12A LRD 16 9…13
9 18.1 10 15 – – – – GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 K12 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
– – – – 11 20.1 12 8 GV2 LE20 18 223 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
4 11 22 12 15 – – – – GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 K12 LR2 K0321 10…14
– – – – 15 26.5 15 6 GV2 LE22 25 327 LC3 D18A LRD 21 12…18
15 29 16 10 – – – – GV2 LE32 32 384 LC3 D18A LRD 21 12…18
18.5 35 20 50 18.5 32.8 19 50 GV3 L40 40 560 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24
22 41 24 50 22 39 23 50 GV3 L50 50 700 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
– – – – 30 51.5 30 50 GV3 L65 65 910 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
5 30 55 33 50 – – – – GV3 L65 65 910 LC3 D32A LRD 35 30…38
– – – – 37 64 37 50 GV3 L65 65 910 3 x LC1 D40A (4) LRD 340 30…40
– – – – 45 76 44 65 NS80HMA 80 640 2 x LC1 D50A LRD 350 37…50
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
– – – – 55 90 52 65 NS80HMA 80 800 2 x LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
37 66 40 70 – – – – NS80HMA 80 640 3 x LC1 D40A (4) LRD 365 48…65
6 – – – – 75 125 72 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 80 47 (3) – – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 800 2 x LC1 D50A LRD 350 37…50
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
55 97 58 (3) – – – – NS100pMA (3) 100 1200 2 x LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (4)
75 132 78 (3) – – – – NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – 90 146 85 (3) NS160pMA (3) 150 1200 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
7 90 160 96 (3) 110 178 103 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
– – – – 132 215 125 (3) NS250pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
110 195 116 (3) – – – – NS250pMA (3) 220 1760 LC3 D115 LRD 4369 110…140
– – – – 160 256 148 (3) NS400pMA (3) 320 2240 LC3 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – – 200 321 186 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
132 230 139 (3) – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 2240 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
8 160 280 165 (3) – – – – NS400pMA (3) 320 2560 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
200 350 204 (3) 220 353 204 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3150 LC3 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
220 388 225 (3) 250 401 233 (3) NS630pMA (3) 500 3500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
280 480 278 (3) – – – – NS630pMA (3) 500 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 315 505 295 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 4000 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
315 540 322 (3) 355 518 300 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 4500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
9 – – – – 375 575 334 (3) C801p+STR35ME 800 5000 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500

(3) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA, NS250pMA NS400pMA, NS630pMA C801p+STR35ME
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130 70 150
10 440 V
Code
25
E
65
S
35
E
65
S
65
H
130
L
65
H
100
L
1/28
for customer assembly Star-delta starters with circuit-breaker and overload
(continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase motors Circuit-breaker Star-delta Thermal overload relay
50/60 Hz in category AC-3 contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Rating Irm (1) Reference Reference Setting
P Ie Iq P Ie Iq range
kW A kA kW A kA A A A
1.5 3.6 130 1.5 3.06 130 GV2 L08 4 51 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 08 2.5…4 2
2.2 4.9 130 2.2 4.42 130 GV2 L10 6.3 78 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 130 3 5.77 130
– – – 4 7.9 20 GV2 L14 10 138 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 14 7…10
4 8.5 130 – – – GV2 L14 10 138 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 16 9…13
5.5 11.5 50 5.5 10.4 20 GV2 L16 14 170 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 16 9…13 3
7.5 15.5 50 7.5 13.7 20 GV2 L20 18 223 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
– – – 9 16.9 20 GV2 L22 25 327 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 50 – – – GV2 L22 25 327 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24

11
15
22
29
50
50
11
15
20.1
26.5
20
50 GV3 L32 32 448 3 x LC1 D40A (2) LRD 332 23…32
4
18.5 35 50 – – – GV3 L40 40 560 2 x LC1 D50A LRD 340 30…40
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
– – – 18.5 32.8 50 GV3 L40 40 560 2 x LC1 D65A LRD 340 30…40
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
22 41 50 – – – GV3 L50 50 700 2 x LC1 D50A
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
LRD 350 37…50
5
– – – 22 39 50 GV3 L50 50 700 2 x LC1 D65A LRD 350 37…50
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
30 55 50 30 51.5 50 GV3 L65 65 910 2 x LC1 D65A LRD 365 48…65
+ 1 x LC1 D40A (2)
– – – 37 64 50 GV3 L65 65 910 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3359 48…65
37 66 70 45 76 65 NS80HMA 80 640 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80 6

45 80 (2) 55 90 (2) NS100pMA (2) 100 800 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
55 97 (2) – – – NS160pMA (2) 150 1200 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – 75 125 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 1200 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 132 (2) 90 146 (2) NS160pMA (2) 150 1200 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150 7
90 160 (2) 110 178 (2) NS250pMA (2) 220 1760 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 195 (2) – – – NS250pMA (2) 220 1760 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – 132 215 (2) NS250pMA (2) 220 1760 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F7375 200…330
132 230 (2) 160 256 (2) NS400pMA (2) 320 2240 3 x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
8
160 280 (2) – – – NS400pMA (2) 320 2560 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 200 321 (2) NS400pMA (2) 320 2880 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300…500
200 350 (2) 220 353 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 3150 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
9
220 388 (2) 250 401 (2) NS630pMA (2) 500 3500 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 430 (2) – – – NS630pMA (2) 500 4000 3 x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500

(2) Products marketed under the Merlin Gerin brand. Reference to be completed by replacing the p with the breaking performance code:
Breaking performance Iq (kA) NS100pMA NS160pMA, NS250pMA NS400pMA, NS630pMA 10
400/415 V 25 70 36 70 70 130
440 V 25 65 35 65 65 130
Code E S E S H L
1/29
for customer assembly Star-delta starters with fuse protection
(NF C or DIN fuses)

Maximum operating rate:/&.DQG/&)VWDUWVKRXU/&'VWDUWVKRXU
1 Maximum starting time:/&.DQG/&'VHFRQGV/&)VHFRQGV
Standard power ratings of 3-phase Fuse carrier aM fuses Star-delta Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 (basic block) contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
P Ie IrD (1) Iq P Ie IrD (1) Iq range
kW A A kA kW A A kA A A
2 1.5 3.5 2 50 1.5 3.06 2 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 4 LC3 K06 LR2 K0308 1.8…2.6
2.2 5 3 50 – – – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 6 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
– – – – 2.2 4.42 3 50
– – – – 3 5.77 3 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC3 K06 LR2 K0310 2.6…3.7
3 6.5 4 50 – – – – LS1 D32 10 x 38 8 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
3 4 8.4 5 50 4 7.9 5 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 12 LC3 K06 LR2 K0312 3.7…5.5
5.5 11 6 50 5.5 10.4 6 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC3 K06 LR2 K0314 5.5…8
7.5 14.8 9 50 7.5 13.7 8 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 16 LC3 K09 LR2 K0316 8…11.5
9 18.1 10 100 9 16.9 10 50 LS1 D32 10 x 38 20 LC3 D12A LRD 16 9…13

4 11 21 12 100 11 20.1 12 100 GK1 EK 14 x 51 25 LC3 D12A LRD 16 9…13
15 28.5 16 100 15 26.5 15 100 GK1 EK 14 x 51 32 LC3 D18A LRD 21 12…18
18.5 35 20 100 18.5 32.8 19 100 GK1 EK 14 x 51 40 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24
– – – – 22 39 23 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 50 LC3 D18A LRD 22 16…24

5 22 42 24 100 – – – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 50 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
– – – – 30 51.5 30 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 63 LC3 D32A LRD 32 23…32
30 57 33 100 37 64 37 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC3 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
6 37 69 40 100 – – – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC3 D40 LRD 3357 37…50
– – – – 45 76 44 100 GK1 FK 22 x 58 80 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
45 81 47 100 – – – – GK1 FK 22 x 58 100 LC3 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
– – – – 55 90 52 100 GSp K 22 x 58 100 LC3 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
7 55 100 58 100 – – – – GSp K 22 x 58 125 LC3 D50 LRD 3361 55…70
75 135 78 100 75 125 72 100 GSp L T0 160 LC3 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – – 90 146 84 100 GSp L T0 160 LC3 D115 LRD 4365 80…104
90 165 95 100 – – – – GSp N T1 200 LC3 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
8 110 200 115 100 110 178 103 100 GSp N T1 200 LC3 D115 LRD 4367 95…120
132 240 139 100 132 215 124 100 GSp QQ T2 250 LC3 D150 LRD 4369 110…140
160 285 165 100 160 256 148 100 GSp QQ T2 315 LC3 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
– – – – 200 321 185 100 GSp QQ T2 400 LC3 F225 LR9 F5369 132…220
9 220 388 225 100 – – – – GSp QQ T2 400 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 250 401 233 100 GS2 S T3 500 LC3 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
280 480 278 100 – – – – GS2 S T3 500 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
10 –
315
–
555
–
322
–
100
315
355
505
518
293
300
100
100 GS2 S T3 630 LC3 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 375 575 334 100 GS2 S T3 630 LC3 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
1/30
(NF C or DIN fuses)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- aM fuses Star-delta Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 disconnector-fuse contactors
400/415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
kW A kA kW A kA A A
1.5 3.5 50 1.5 3.06 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 4 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2
2.2 5 50 2.2 4.42 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 6 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 50 3 5.77 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 8 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 50 4 7.9 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 10 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
5.5 11 50 5.5 10.4 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 3 x LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13 3

7.5 14.8 50 7.5 13.7 50 GS1 DD 10 x 38 16 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 100 9 16.9 100

11 21 100 11 20.1 100 GSp F 14 x 51 25 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 100 15 26.5 100 GSp F 14 x 51 32 3 x LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
18.5 35 100 18.5 32.8 100 GSp F 14 x 51 40 3 x LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
4
22 42 100 22 39 100 GSp F 22 x 58 50 3 x LC1 D50 LRD 3357 37…50
30 57 100 30 51.5 100 GSp J 22 x 58 80 3 x LC1 D65 LRD 3361 55…70
37 69 100 37 64 100 GSp J 22 x 58 80 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
– – – 45 76 100 GSp J 22 x 58 80 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3365 80…93

5
45 81 100 – – – GSp J 22 x 58 100 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5367 60…100
– – – 55 90 100 GSp L T0 125 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
55 100 100 – – – GSp L T0 125 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150

6
– – – 75 125 100 GSp L T0 160 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
75 135 100 – – – GSp L T0 160 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 D5369 90…150
90 165 100 90 146 100 GSp N T1 200 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 200 100 110 178 100 GSp N T1 250 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220 7
132 240 100 132 215 100 GSp QQ T2 315 3 x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 100 160 256 100 GSp QQ T2 315 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – 200 321 100 GSp QQ T2 400 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7379 300…500
200 352 100 220 353 100 8

220 388 100 250 401 100 GS2 S T3 500 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
250 437 100 – – – GS2 S T3 500 3 x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
315 555 100 315 505 100 GS2 S T3 630 3 x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
– – – 355 549 100

–
355
–
605
–
100
400
–
611
–
100
–
GS2 V
GS2 V
T4
T4
800
800
3 x LC1 F630
3 x LC1 F780
LR9 F7381
LR9 F7381
380…630
380…630
9
10
1/31
for customer assembly D.O.L. starters with fuse protection (BS fuses)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
1 motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 disconnector-
fuse
415 V 440 V 500 V Reference Size Rating Reference (1) Reference Setting
kW A kW A A kA A A
0.06 0.22 0.06 0.19 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 02 0.16…0.25
– – 0.09 0.28 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 03 0.25…0.4
2 0.09
0.12
0.36
0.42
–
0.12
–
0.37
–
–
–
– GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 04 0.4…0.63
0.18 0.6 0.18 0.55 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 2 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
– – 0.25 0.76 – – GS1 DDB A1 NIT 4 LC1 D09 LRD 05 0.63…1
0.25 0.88 0.37 1 0.37 1
0.37 1 0.55 1.36 0.55 1.2
0.55 1.5 0.75 1.68 0.75 1.5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 6 LC1 D09 LRD 06 1…1.7
3 0.75
–
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
1.5
–
2.6
GS1 DDB
GS1 DDB
A1
A1
NIT 10
NIT 10
LC1 D09
LC1 D09
LRD 07
LRD 08
1.6…2.5
2.5…4
1.5 3.5 1.5 3.06 2.2 3.8 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 LC1 D09 LRD 08 2.5…4
2.2 5 2.2 4.42 3 5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 3 5.77 4 6.5 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 4 7.9 5.5 9 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10
4 5.5
7.5
11
14
5.5
7.5
10.4
13.7
7.5
9
12
13.9
GS1 DDB
GS1 DDB
A1
A1
NIT 20M25
NIT 20M32
LC1 D12
LC1 D18
LRD 16
LRD 21
9…13
12…18
9 18.1 9 16.9 – – GS2 GB A2 TIA 32M35 LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
11 21 11 20 11 18.4
– – – – 15 23 GS2 GB A2 TIA 32M50 LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24
15 28.5 15 26.5 – – GS2 GB A2 TIA 32M63 LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
– – – – 22 33 GS2 GB A3 TIS 63M80 LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
5 22
–
42
–
22
30
39
51.5
30
–
45
–
GS2 GB
GS2 GB
A3
A3
TIS 63M100
TIS 63M100
LC1 D50
LC1 D50
LRD 3357
LRD 3359
37…50
48…65
30 57 – – – – GS2 GB A3 TIS 63M100 LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65
– – 45 76 45 65 GS2 LLB A4 TCP 100M125 LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
45 81 – – 55 80 GS2 LLB A4 TCP 100M125 LC1 D95 LRD 3365 80…93
55 100 – – – – GS2 LLB A4 TCP 100M160 LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
6 –
–
–
–
55
–
90
–
–
80
–
116
GS2 LLB
GS2 LB
A4
B2
TCP 100M160 LC1 D115
TF 200 LC1 D150
LR9 D5367
LR9 D5369
60…100
90…150
80 138 80 132 – – GS2 LB B2 TF 200M250 LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150
– – – – 100 143
– – – – 110 156 GS2 LB B2 TF 200M250 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
100 182 100 162 – – GS2 MMB B2 TF 200M250 LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 196 110 178 – – GS2 MMB B2 TF 200M315 LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
7 –
140
–
250
–
140
–
226
140
160
200
220
GS2 NB
GS2 NB
B3
B3
TKF 315M355
TKF 315M355
LC1 F265
LC1 F265
LR9 F5371
LR9 F7375
132…220
200…330
160 285 160 256 – – GS2 QQB B4 TKF 315M355 LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
– – – – 220 310 GS2 QQB B4 TMF 400 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
220 388 220 353 257 362 GS2 QQB B4 TMF 400M450 LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
– – – – 270 380 GS2 SB C2 TTM 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
8 257
270
450
460
257
270
412
433
–
–
–
– GS2 SB C2 TTM 500 LC1 F500 LR9 F7381 380…630
375 610 375 577 375 508
– – – – 425 556 GS2 SB C2 TTM 630 LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630
10
1/32
(BS fuses)
(continued)

Standard power ratings of 3-phase Switch- BS fuses Contactor Thermal overload relay
motors 50/60 Hz in category AC-3 disconnector-
fuse
415 V 440 V Reference Size Rating Reference Reference Setting
kW
1.5
A
3.5
kA
50
kW
1.5
A
3.06
kA
50 GS1 DDB A1
A
NIT 16 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 08
A
2.5…4
2
2.2 5 50 2.2 4.42 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 16 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 10 4…6
3 6.5 50 3 5.77 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 12 5.5…8
4 8.4 50 4 7.9 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20 3 x LC1 D09 LRD 14 7…10

3
5.5 11 50 5.5 10.4 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20M25 3 x LC1 D12 LRD 16 9…13
7.5 14.8 50 7.5 13.7 50 GS1 DDB A1 NIT 20M32 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
9 18.1 50 9 16.9 50 GS2 GB A2 TIA 32M35 3 x LC1 D18 LRD 21 12…18
11 21 50 11 20.1 50 GS2 GB A2 TIA 32M50 3 x LC1 D25 LRD 22 16…24 4

15 28.5 50 15 26.5 50 GS2 GB A2 TIA 32M63 3 x LC1 D32 LRD 32 23…32
22 42 50 22 39 50 GS2 GB A3 TIS 63M80 3 x LC1 D40 LRD 3355 30…40
– – – 30 51.5 50 GS2 GB A3 TIS 63M100 3 x LC1 D50 LRD 3359 48…65
30 57 50 – – – GS2 GB A3 TIS 63M100 3 x LC1 D65 LRD 3359 48…65

5
45 81 50 45 76 50 GS2 LLB A4 TCP 100M125 3 x LC1 D80 LRD 3363 63…80
55 100 80 55 90 80 GS2 LLB A4 TCP 100M160 3 x LC1 D115 LR9 D5369 90…150
80 138 80 80 132 80 GS2 LB B2 TF 200M250 3 x LC1 D150 LR9 D5369 90…150 6

100 182 80 100 162 80 GS2 MMB B2 TF 200M250 3 x LC1 F185 LR9 F5371 132…220
110 196 80 110 178 80 GS2 MMB B2 TF 200M315 3 x LC1 F225 LR9 F5371 132…220
140 250 80 140 226 80 GS2 NB B3 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1 F265 LR9 F7375 200…330
160 285 80 160 256 80 GS2 QQB B3 TFK 315M355 3 x LC1 F330 LR9 F7375 200…330
7
220 388 80 220 353 80 GS2 QQB B4 TMF 400M450 3 x LC1 F400 LR9 F7379 300…500
257 450 80 257 412 80

270 460 80 270 433 80 GS2 SB C2 TTM 500 3 x LC1 F500 LR9 F7379 300…500
375 610 80 375 577 80 GS2 SB C2 TTM 630 3 x LC1 F630 LR9 F7381 380…630 8
10
1/33
References 1

4 to 37 kW, (1), with isolating device, pre-assembled
References
Utilisation category AC-3 Fuses to be Basic reference, Weight
1 Standard power ratings
of 3-phase motors
Opera-
tional
¿WWHGE\WKH
customer
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
50/60 Hz current
220 V 380 V 660 V 440 V up Size Type
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 690 V to aM
kW kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
2.2 4 4 4 5.5 – 9 10 x 38 12 LC4 D09App 0.870
526459
2 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 7.5 – 12 10 x 38 16 LC4 D12App 0.870
4 7.5 9 9 10 – 18 10 x 38 20 LC4 D18App 1.150
3 5.5 11 11 11 15 – 25 10 x 38 25 LC4 D25App 1.580
7.5 15 15 15 18.5 18.5 32 14 x 51 32 LC4 D32App 2.630
11 18.5 22 22 22 30 40 14 x 51 40 LC4 D40pp 2.930
4 LC4 D09App 15 22 25 30 30 33 50 22 x 58 63 LC4 D50pp 3.200
18.5 30 37 37 37 37 65 22 x 58 80 LC4 D65pp 3.340
22 37 45 45 55 45 80 22 x 58 80 LC4 D80pp 3.650

5
6SHFL¿FDWLRQV
Pre-wired power and control circuit connections.
3-pole isolating device
6 (1) Thermal overload relay to be ordered separately (see pages 6/20 to 6/23).
(2) Standard control circuit voltages.
Volts 24 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440

50/60 Hz B7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
)RURWKHUYROWDJHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2I¿FH
10
page 1/35 page 1/35
1/34
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open version 1
schemes 1
4 to 37 kW, with isolating device, pre-assembled
Dimensions
D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC4 D09A…D25A 1
98 LC4 D09A…D18A D25A
79 b 218 221
c1 without cover or add-on blocks 94 100
33
with cover, without add-on blocks 96 102
63
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 127 133
with LA6 DK10 139 145 2
110 with LAD T, R, S 147 153
50
173
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 151 157

b
3
c1 = 55 =
= 71 =
86
LC4 D32A
LC4 D32A
4
c1 without cover or add-on blocks 100
with cover, without add-on blocks 102
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 133
124
110
with LA6 DK10 145

with LAD T, R, S 153
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 157
5
36
c1 88
= 90 =
165
LC4 D40…D80
6
LC4 D40…D65 D80
a 281 311
=
b 143 143
=
b1 45 48
100/110
c 130 140
60
7
b
c1 without cover or add-on blocks 124 135

with cover, without add-on blocks 129 140
=
with LA1 DN (1 contact) 149 160

=
with LAD N or C (2 or 4 contacts) 157 168

b1
with LA6 DK 169 180

c = G = with LAD T, R, S 177 188
with LAD T, R, S and sealing cover 181 192
c1
c2
a
c2 100 178 8
G 263 293
Scheme
D.O.L. starters
LC4 D09A to D80
9
1/L1
5/L3
3/L2
- Q1
4
2
6
1
- KM1
10
2
References :
page 1/34
1/35
Presentation 1
Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
1 7 This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
6 are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
5 mains voltage.
1
4 Star-delta starting should be used for
2 3
motors starting on no-load or having a
low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
2
2 reduced to one third of the direct starting
1
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
torque.
0
- the starting current in star connection
3 0 0,25 0,50 0,75
Speed
1 is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.
1 Starting in direct delta connection
2 Starting in star connection The transition from star to delta
connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
Current
4 2,5
cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
2 starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
1
on the machine speed (a characteristic
1,5
of centrifugal machines, for example).
5 1
(1)
All star-delta starters are supplied with a
2 special LAD S2 or LA2 KT2p time delay
relay which imposes a delay on the
0,5
delta contactor during the transition
3 period in order to allow the star
0
FRQWDFWRUVXI¿FLHQWEUHDNLQJWLPH
6 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1

Speed For ratings D115 and D150, this
1 Starting in direct delta connection function is performed by a time delay
2 Starting in star connection auxiliary contact block LAD T2 and a
3 Resistive torque of the machine control relay.
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
7 proportion of the rated torque).
10
1/36
References 1
Star-delta starters for motor control

5.5 to 132 kW, (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Plate mounted starters

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds.
of squirrel cage motors
Auxiliary contacts available
on each contactor
Star delta
mechanical
Basic reference,
to be completed by
Weight 1
Mains voltage - interlock adding the voltage code (2)
delta connection line delta star
220/ 380/ KM2 KM3 KM1
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW kg
2
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D09App 1.530
DF526460
5.5 11 11 11 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D12App 1.530
11 18.5 22 22 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D18App 1.730
15 25 30 30 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D32App 2.030

3
18.5 37 37 37 – 1 1 – (3) – 1 Without LC3 D40pp 4.360
LC3 D32A pp
D32App
With LC3 D40ppA64 4.500
30 55 59 59 – 1 1 – (3) – – (3) Without LC3 D50pp 4.360

4
37 75 75 75 – 1 1 – (3) – – (3) Without LC3 D80pp 5.200
63 110 110 110 – 1 1 – (3) – – (3) Without LC3 D115pp (4) 11.800
With LC3 D115ppA64 (4) 12.100
75 132 132 147 – 1 1 – (3) – 1 (3) Without LC3 D150pp (4) 12.100 5
With LC3 D150ppA64 (4) 12.100
Rail mounted starters (35 mm 7 rail)

Standard power ratings Auxiliary contacts Star delta Basic reference, Weight
of squirrel cage motors available on each contactor mechanical to be completed by
Mains voltage - interlock adding the voltage code (2)
delta connection line delta star 6
220/ 380/ KM2 KM3 KM1
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW kg
3 5.5 5.5 5.5 – – – – – 1 With LC3 K06pp 0.740
7
4 7.5 7.5 7.5 – – – – – 1 With LC3 K09pp 0.740
Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds

4 7.5 7.5 7.5 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D090App 1.530
5.5 11 11 11 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D120App 1.530 8

11 18.5 22 22 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D180App 1.730
15 25 30 30 – – – – (3) – 1 With LC3 D320App 2.030
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately. Select appropriate overload
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current (see pages 6/20
(2) Standard control circuit voltages:
0 to 6/23). 9
Volts a 50/60 Hz 24 36 42 48 110 220 230 240 380 400 415 440
Star-delta starters LC3 K06 and K09
Code B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 – – – –
Star-delta starters LC3 D09A...D150, LC3 D090A…D320A
Code B7 – D7 E7 F7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7
(3) One auxiliary contact block type LAD N FDQ DOVR EH ¿WWHG VHH SDJH 5/79.
10
(4) These starters consist of contactors LC1 D115 5 or D150 without connectors.
pages 1/42 and 1/43 page 1/43
1/37
1
1
a
1
a
2
KM2
3
a
4 a
1b
1c
5
KM1
KM3
7 KM1
KM3
KM2
1b
10
a 2 1c 1a
1/38
References 1
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or on mounting rail) (2)
Starters for direct combination with a circuit-breaker

Maximum operating rate: 30 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 30 seconds
Standard power
ratings of squirrel
Thermal-magnetic
motor
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
1
cage motors (3) circuit-breaker by adding the voltage code) (4)
Mains voltage-
delta connection
400/
415 V 440 V line delta star
kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1
7.5 7.5 GV2 ME20 LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp LC1 D09pp 2
– 9 GV2 ME20 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
9 11 GV2 ME21 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
11 – GV2 ME22 LC1 D12pp LC1 D12pp LC1 D09pp
15 15 GV2 ME32 LC1 D18pp LC1 D18pp LC1 D09pp
Separate component
Description Illustration
item no.
Reference Weight
kg
3
Mounting kit comprising: a LAD 912GV 0.130
power circuit connections and
1 time delay contact block LAD S2
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection
of squirrel cage motors (3)
Contactors
(basic references, to be completed
Separate
components
4
Mains voltage - delta connection by adding the voltage code) (4) (see below)
220/ 380/
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V line delta star
kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 Component
types
4
5.5
7.5
11
7.5
11
7.5
11
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D18pp (6)
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D12pp
LC1 D09pp
LC1 D09pp
D09
D12
5
11 18.5 22 22 LC1 D25pp (7) LC1 D25pp (7) LC1 D09pp D18
15 25 30 30 LC1 D32pp LC1 D32pp LC1 D18pp D32
18.5 37 37 37 LC1 D40pp LC1 D40pp LC1 D40pp D40
63
75
110
132
110
132
110
147
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D150pp
LC1 D115pp
LC1 D150pp
LC1 D80pp
LC1 D115pp
D115 (5)
D150 (5)
6
Separate components
Description Illustration For components Reference Weight
item no. type (5) kg
Mounting kit comprising: D09 and D12 LAD 91217 0.180
- 1 time delay contact block LAD S2
(D09…D80) (3),
1a
D18 and D32 LAD 93217 0.310 7
- power circuit connections (D09…D80), 1b
- VFUHZVDQGFODPSVIRU¿[LQJFRQWDFWRUV
D40 and D50 LA9 D5017 0.380
to the plate (D40…D80). 1c
D80 LA9 D8017 0.680
Equipment mounting plates 2 D09, D12, D18 LA9 D12974 0.150

D32
D40 and D50
LA9 D32974
LA9 D40973
0.180
0.300
8
D80 LA9 D80973 0.300
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered separately.
Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/20 and 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the equipment.
(3) See comments on page 1/36.
(4) See page 5/62.
(5) For LC1 D115 and LC1 D150 components, see illustration and separate parts on pages 1/40 and 1/41.
9
(6) A LC1 D12 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D18 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
(7) A LC1 D18 component is adequate for the application, but use of a LC1 D25 is recommended.
(connection capacity, correct use of power connection kit and connections).
10
Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/38 pages 1/42 and 1/43 page 1/43
1/39
1
1
13 7 9 12 11 10 3
2
14
3 8
10 4 5 8
1/40
References (continued) 1
Star-delta starters, for motor control, 7.5 to 132 kW (1),

without mechanical interlock, for customer assembly
(on plate or mounting rail) (2)
Starters for mounting separately from upstream protection

Separate components (continued)
Description Illustration For
item no. use on
No. Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg
1
LC1
Instantaneous 1 D115 1 1 LAD N10 0.020
auxiliary contact (star)
blocks 1 N/O
Control relay 3 D115, D150 1 1 CAD 32pp (3) 0.320
Time delay 4 D115, D150 1 1 LAD T2 0.060 2

auxiliary
contact blocks
Lead sealing kit 5 D115, D150 1 1 LA9 D901 0.005
for time delay
auxiliary
contact blocks
Thermal magnetic
circuit-breaker for
6 D115, D150 2 6 GB2 CB05 0.060
3
control circuit
(200…415 V)
Set of 3 7 D115, D150 1 1 LA9 FG980 0.200
connectors for
wider terminations
(optional)
Set of power
connections with
8 D115 1 1 LA9 D11517 0.800
4
¿[LQJDFFHVVRULHV D150 1 1 LA9 D15017 1.050
Spare volt free 9 D115, D150 1 10 DZ3 HA3 0.007

terminals
2 10 DZ3 GA3 0.006
Lug-connector
terminal block
10 D115, D150 1 10 AB1 BC9535 0.236 5
End stop 11 D115, D150 3 100 AB1 AB8M35 0.005
Mounting rail 12 D115, D150 1 10 AM1 ED021 0.210

5 35 mm
Pre-slotted 13 D115, D150 1 1 AM3 PA65 1.950
mounting plate
Screw with 14 D115, D150 12 100 AF1 VA618 0.006 6
captive washer
2 100 AF1 VA410 0.002
(1) Protection must be provided by the addition of a thermal overload relay, to be ordered
separately. Select appropriate overload relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor
current, see pages 6/20 to 6/23.
(2) For mounting, assembly and cabling: please refer to installation instructions supplied with the
equipment. 7
(3) See page 7/21.
10
Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/40 pages 1/42 and 1/43 page 1/43
1/41
Dimensions 1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Star-delta starters
1 Plate mounted, pre-assembled
LC3 K
Pre-assembled:
LC3 D09A…D32A
For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 to D32
2
KM3 KM1
110
124
110
KM2
110
b
94 150 c 4 = 90 =
175 a
3 On starters LC3 D09A to D18A, a connection block is mounted on the upper

part of contactor KM2, increasing the overall height of the product by 6.5 mm. a
LC3 D09A
143
D12A
143
D18A
144
D32A
165
b 26.5 26.5 26.5 32.5
c with LAD S 139 139 139 145
with LAD S and sealing cover 143 143 143 149
Pre-assembled: LC3 D40, D50 Pre-assembled: LC3 D80

4 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D09 or D50 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D80
=
=
=
=
100/110
100/110
143
60
143
60
=
=
=
=
47
45
175 (1) = 263 = 183 (1) = 293 =

281 311
(1) + 4 mm with sealing cover (1) + 4 mm with sealing cover

Pre-assembled: LC3 D115, D150
6 For customer assembly: 3 x LC1 D with components D115 or D150
8
H
b
c G
a
10 a b c G H
LC3 D115 or 3 x LC1 D with components D115 450 555 205 425 525
LC3 D150 or 3 x LC1 D with components D150 450 555 205 425 525
References : Schemes :
pages 1/37 to 1/41 pages 1/43
1/42
Dimensions (continued), TeSys motor starters - open version 1
schemes 1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions (continued)
Star-delta starters (continued)
On mounting rail AM1 DP, pre-assembled
1
LC3 D090A à D320A
2xØ7
KM3 KM1
KM2
b
2
LC3 D090A à D180A D320A
c 160 b 153 137
c with LAD S 139 145
175
with LAD S and sealing cover 143 149
Schemes
LC3 K, LC3 D09A to D80
LC3 D090A to D320A
LC3 K LC3 D 3
L1
L2
L3
KM3/5 KM3/5
95
95
O
3
3
5
5
1
21 96
96
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1
14
O
4
6
6
2
13 22
I – KM2 (2)
13
13
– KM1
W1
U1
V1
(1) 54 53 l – KM2
1
14
13 14
6
2
22
21
– KM3 – KM1 – KM1

2
21
22
W1
5
U1
V1
55 14
W2
U2
V2
68
– KM2 – KM2
15
21 56
21 67
T
A1 16
W2
U2
V2
– KM3 – KM1
A1
A1
A1
A1 22
A1 22
T – KM1 – KM3 – KM2
A1
6
A2
A2
A2
A2
KM2/1 (N) N
Y – KM1 – KM2 – KM3
L
A2
A2
A2
KM3/1
Note: LC3 D09A to D18A: Mechanical interlock between KM3 and KM1.
LC3 D115 and D150

L1
L2
L3
6
2
– F1
7
95
W1
U1
V1
– F1
21 96
3
3
5
5
1
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1 O

22
(2)
W2
U2
V2
6
6
2
153
67
8
13
– KM1 – KM2
l
184 154
68
14
W1
172
U1
Recommended
V1
– KM1
cabling for reversal
1
55 183
– KM1
of motor rotation
171
(standard motor,
viewed from shaft – KM2
9
2
end).
161 56
W2
U2
V2
153
13
– KM3 – KM2 – KA1

A1 162
A1 14
A1154
A1
– F2 – KM1 – KM2 – KA1 – KM3

A2
A2
A2
A2
(1) Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation (standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
Y L 10
(2) Remote control.
References :
pages 1/37 to 1/41
1/43
Presentation 1
Start-delta starters for motor control
Star-delta starting
Current
1 7 This method of starting is applicable to

motors on which all 6 stator terminals
6 are accessible and whose delta
connection voltage corresponds to the
5 mains voltage.
1
4 Star-delta starting should be used for
2 3
motors starting on no-load or having a
low load torque and gradual build-up:
- the starting torque in star connection is
2
2 reduced to one third of the direct starting
torque, i.e. about 50% of the rated
1
torque.
- the starting current in star connection
0
3 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1
Speed
is about 1.8 to 2.6 times the rated
current.
The transition from star to delta
2 Starting in star connection
connection must occur when the
machine has run up to speed. A too
rapid build-up in load torque would
Current
4 2,5 cause the stabilised run-up speed to be
too low and would therefore eliminate
any advantage in this method of
2 starting: this is the case with certain
machines whose load torque depends
1
on the machine speed (a characteristic
1,5
of centrifugal machines, for example).
5 1
(1)
Switching from star to delta connection
2 must be completed within a minimum
time.
0,5
This function is performed by a control
3 relay and a time delay auxiliary contact
0
block.
6 0 0,25 0,50 0,75 1

Speed

2 Starting in star connection
3 Resistive torque of the machine
(1) Motor manufacturers generally specify machine load torques.

7 Example: maximum resistive torque on completion of star-delta start (expressed as a
proportion of the rated torque).
10
1/44
References 1
Star-delta starters for motor control,

90 to 375 kW (1), without isolating device,
pre-assembled
Pre-assembled starters
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour.
Maximum starting time:
LC3 Fppppp: 20 seconds,
1
LC3 FpppppA64: 30 seconds (3 identical contactors).
Composition of starters without mechanical interlock, see pages 1/47 and 1/49.
Star-delta starters
Standard power ratings Auxiliary contacts available Star delta Basic reference, Weight
Mains voltage -
on each contactor mechanical
interlock
to be completed by
adding the voltage code (2)
2
delta connection line delta star
220/ 380/ KM2 KM3 KM1
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
(3)
kW
90
kW
160
kW
160
kW
185 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F185pp
kg
16.500
3
511080
With LC3 F185ppA64 16.625
100 200 200 220 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F225pp 16.500

4
110 220 220 250 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F265pp 27.300
LC3 FpppppA64 160 280 280 315 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F330pp 37.000

5
185 315 355 375 1 2 2 1 1 1 Without LC3 F400pp 37.000
relay for setting at 0.58 of the full load rated motor current, see pages 6/34 and 6/35.
Volts a 50/60 Hz 48 110 115 220/230 230 240 380/400 400 415
6
Code E7 F7 FE7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
2QHDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWEORFNW\SH/$'1FDQEH¿WWHG
10
Presentation : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/44 page 1/50 page 1/51
1/45
1
1
* * * * 6 5 2
*
2
3
7
*
4 1
KM1
KM3
5
KM2 1
6
7
* * 1 3 4
8
*
*
9 1
10
See page 1/48
1/46
References 1

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Contactors
Maximum operating rate: 12 starts/hour. Maximum starting time: 20 seconds (3)
Contactors (2) Separate
components
1
220/ 380/ line delta star (see below)
230 V 400 V 415 V 440 V
kW kW kW kW KM2 KM3 KM1 Component types
90 160 160 185 LC1 F185pp LC1 F185pp LC1 D150pp F185
100 200 200 220 LC1 F225pp LC1 F225pp LC1 F185pp F225
2
Separate components (4) 3

Description Illustration For No. Sold in Unit Weight
item no. use on lots of reference kg
Instantaneous auxiliary 1 F185 to F400 3 1 LAD N22 0.050
contact blocks
2 N/O + 2 N/C
Control relay 2 F185 to F400 1 1 CAD 32 0.580
Time delay auxiliary 3 F185 to F400 1 1 LAD T2 0.060

4
contact blocks
Sealing cover 4 F185 to F400 1 1 LA9 D901 0.005
Thermal magnetic circuit- 5 F185 to F400 2 6 GB2 CB10 0.050

breaker for 5 A control circuit
Sets of 3 connectors 6 F185 1 1 LA9 FG980 0.200
for wider terminations
(optional) F225 to F400 1 1 LA9 FJ980 0.490
5
Sets of power connections 7 F185 1 1 LA9 F18517 0.800
F225 1 1 LA9 F22510 1.400
F265 1 1 LA9 FH610 1.400

6
F330 and F400 1 1 LA9 FJ610 1.500
Set of 3 busbars for 8 F185 to F400 1 1 LA7 Fppp (Selected according to size
thermal overload of thermal overload relay) see pages 6/34
connections and 6/35.
7
(2) Contactors supplied with coil. Complete the reference by adding the control circuit voltage code.
LC1 D150
Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
50/60 Hz E7 F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7
LC1 F185 and F225 8

Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
50 Hz (coil LX1) E5 F5 FE5 – M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5
60 Hz (coil LX1) E6 F6 – G6 M6 – U6 Q6 – –
LC1 F185 to F400

Volts 48 110 115 120 220 230 240 380 400 415
40… 400 Hz (5) E7 (6) F7 FE7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 9
Standard voltages, see page 5/114.
For other voltages between 24 and 660 V, see pages 5/130 to 5/139.
)RUORQJHUVWDUWLQJWLPHVSOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2I¿FH
(4) Other separate components, see page 1/49.
(5) Coil LX1: LC1 F265, F330 and F400. Coil LX9: LC1F185 and F225.
(6) Except for LC1 F400.
10
Presentation : Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/44 page 1/46 page 1/50 page 1/51
1/47
1
1
14 12 10 17 * * *
1
15
3
*
9
4 *
*
KM1
KM3
5
KM2 *
6
*
*
7
16 13
* * *
8 17
11
9 *
10
See page 1/46
1/48

90 to 375 kW, (1), for customer assembly
(on chassis)
Separate components (continued from page 1/47)

Description Illustration For No. Sold in Unit Weight
Spare volt free terminals

item no.
9
use on
F185 3
lots of
10
reference
DZ3 GA3
kg
0.006
1
F225…F400 3 10 DZ3 HA3 0.007
Neutral terminals 10 F185 1 10 AB1 BC9535 0.236

with stop and spare
volt free terminal 2 100 AB1 AB8P35 0.006
(for control circuit)
1 10 DZ3 HA3 0.007
2
F225 and F265 1 10 AB1 BC15035 0.277
2 100 AB1 AB8M35 0.007
1 10 DZ3 JA3 0.010

3
F330 and F400 1 10 AB1 BC24035 0.287
2 100 AB1 AB8M35 0.007
1 10 DZ3 JA3 0.010
Reducer bracket 11 F400 2 1 LA9 F100 0.100 4

Mounting rails (2) 12 F185…F400 1 10 AM1 DE200 0.900
13 F185…F400 1 4 AM1 EC200 2.980
Uprights (2) 14 F115…F400 2 4 AM1 EC200 2.980
1/4 turn sliding clip nuts 15 F185…F400 2 10 AF1 CD061 0.020 5

and corresponding bolts
for rails AM1 DE 100 AF1 VA618 0.006
1/4 turn sliding clip nuts 16 F185…F400 8 10 AF1 CD081 0.020

for rails AM1 DE 10 AF1 VC820 0.024
1/4 turn sliding clip nuts 17 F185…F330 15 10 AF1 CD061 0.020

6
IRUHTXLSPHQW¿[LQJ 100 AF1 VA618 0.006
F400 8 10 AF1 CD061 0.020
10 AF1 CD081 0.020

7
100 AF1 VA618 0.006
10 AF1 VC820 0.024
4 – 25 x H6 screws with washers
Enclosures:
metal, grey RAL 7032
– F185…F225 1 1 ACM GV763 19.090
8
F265 1 1 ACM GV973 33.310
F330 and F400 1 1 ACM GV1084 54.000
Fixing lugs – – 4 4 AE3 FX122 0.080

adjustable for enclosure ACM
9
(2) Supplied in 2 m lengths. See page 1/50 for cutting to length.
10
Presentation : Illustrations : Dimensions : Schemes :

page 1/44 page 1/48 page 1/50 page 1/51
1/49
Dimensions 1
Star-delta starters
Dimensions
Chassis mounted starters
1 Pre-assembled: LC3 F185 to LC3 F400
For customer assembly: 2 x LC1 Fppp and 1 x LC1 D150 or 3 x LC1 Fppp
F1 F2
K4
K3
KM2 KM3 KM1
3
H
b
K2
4
K1
K
c a
5 a b c G H K K1 K2 K3 K4
LC3 F185 or 2 x LC1 Fppp + 1 x LC1 D 565 675 235 525 625 160 110 80 110 80
with components F185
LC3 F225 or 3 x LC1 Fppp with components F225 565 675 235 525 625 160 110 80 110 80
6 LC3 F330 or 3 x LC1 Fppp with components F330 765 975 276 725 825 195 140 100 110 180
10
Presentation: References:
page 1/44 pages 1/47 and 1/49
1/50
Schemes 1
Star-delta starters
Schemes
Star-delta starters
LC3 F185 to F400 1
L1
L2
L3
6
2
4
Recommended cabling for reversal of motor rotation
(standard motor, viewed from shaft end).
W1
U1
V1
2
3
3
5
5
1
– KM2 – KM3 – KM1
W2
U2
V2
6
6
2
4
W1
U1
V1
3
1
5
2
6
W2
U2
V2
– F1
5
95
– F1
96
21
O
Remote
6
13 22
control
153
67
l
– KM1 – KM2
14
154
68
184
172
– KM1 – KM1
7
183
171
55
– KM2
13
53
56
– KM2 – KA1
61
14
54
– KM3
8
62
A1
A1
A1
A1
– KM1 – KM2 – KA1 – KM3

– F2
A2
A2
A2
A2
10
page 1/44 pages 1/45, 1/47 and 1/49
1/51
Presentation TeSys motor starters - open version
107983
Presentation
The TeSys U starter-controller is a D.O.L. starter (1) which performs the following
1 functions:
b Protection and control of single-phase or 3-phase motors:
v isolation and breaking function,
v overload and short-circuit protection,
v thermal overload protection,
v power switching.
b Control of the application:
2 v protection function alarms, application monitoring (running time, number of faults,
motor current values, ...),
v logs (last 5 faults saved, together with motor parameter values).
These functions can be added by selecting control units and function modules which
simply clip into the power base.
This late customisation is even possible after power and control circuit wiring has
3 been completed.
TeSys U starter-controller
7H6\V8LVDÀH[LEOHUDQJHWKDWPHHWVWKHFXUUHQWDQGIXWXUHQHHGVRIV\VWHP
builders, panel builders and machine manufacturers, as well as those of additional
systems.
)URPGHVLJQWKURXJKWRRSHUDWLRQ7H6\V8RIIHUVPDQ\DGYDQWDJHVDQGVLPSOL¿HV
4 the selection of components in comparison with a traditional solution.
- WKHEUHDNLQJLVRODWLRQDQGFRQWDFWRUIXQFWLRQVDUHLQFRUSRUDWHGLQDVLQJOHEORFN
this means fewer references to be ordered and easy selection without any risk of
error, because a single reference covers all needs up to 15 Kw.
- the control unit has a wide setting range. It can operate on a d.c. or a.c. supply.
The number of references required is divided by 10, compared with traditional
solutions.
5 The compact components in the TeSys U range are mounted on a single rail, so
optimising the amount of space required in enclosures. By eliminating power wiring
between the circuit-breaker and contactor, TeSys U reduces installation times in
enclosures.
538849
Setting-up accessories simplify or completely eliminate wiring between components

and eliminate the risk of errors.
6 1
Starter-controller
Consists of a power base and a control unit.
Power bases 1
The power base is independent of the control voltage.
It is available from 0 to 15 kW at 400 V.
7 2
It incorporates the breaking function with a breaking capacity of 50 kA at 400V, total
coordination (continuity of service) and the switching function.
b 2 ratings are available: 0…12 A and 0…32 A.
b Non-reversing (LUB) and reversing (LU2B).
Control units 2
These must be selected according to the control voltage, the power of the motor to
8 be protected and the type of protection required.
b Standard control unit (LUCA)VDWLV¿HVWKHEDVLFSURWHFWLRQUHTXLUHPHQWVIRU
motor starters: overload and short-circuit.
b Magnetic control unit (LUCL)ZKHQ¿WWHGXSVWUHDPRIDYDULDEOHVSHHGGULYHRU
soft start-soft stop unit and used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power
base, this unit provides isolation and short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
b Advanced control unit (LUCB, LUCC or LUCD): allows additional advanced
9 functions such as alarm, fault differentiation,...
b Multifunction control unit (LUCM): suitable for the most sophisticated control
and protection requirements.
The control units are interchangeable without rewiring and without using tools.
They have a wide range of adjustment (range of 4) and low heat dissipation, due to
the fact that bimetallic overload protection components are no longer used.
10 (1) For use with resistive and inductive loads. Control of d.c. or capacitive loads is not possible.
1/52
Presentation (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Control options
3 Function modules can be used to increase the functions of the starter-controller.
538852
Function modules 3
1
Must be used in conjunction with advanced control units.
4 types are available:
b Thermal overload alarm (LUF W10).
b Thermal fault and manual reset (LUF DH11).
3 b Thermal fault and automatic or remote reset (LUF DA01 and LUF DA10).
b Indication of motor load (LUF V2), which can also be used in conjunction with the 2
multifunction control unit.
All alarm and fault information processed by these modules is available on digital
contacts.
3
Communication modules 3
The information processed is exchanged: 3
b Via a parallel bus:
v parallel wiring module (LUF C00).
b Via a serial bus:

538850
v AS-Interface modules (ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51),

v 3UR¿EXV'3PRGXOH/8/&
v CANopen module (LUL C08), 4
v DeviceNet module (LUL C09),
v Advantys STB module (LUL C15).
v Modbus modules (LUL C031 and LUL C033).
They must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit and require a

c 24 V supply voltage.
Connection to other protocols, such as Fipio, is possible via gateway modules 5
(LUFP) or via the TeSysPort for Ethernet.
Auxiliary contact modules (LUFN) 3

SRVVLEOHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV12121&RU1&
4 Auxiliary contacts 4
They provide the following information: fault signalling and rotary knob in "ready"
6
position.
Power options
538851
Reverser block 5
Allows a non-reversing power base to be converted to reversing operation.
7
The reverser block (LU2M) is mounted directly beneath the power base without
modifying the width of the product (45 mm). The reverser block (LU6M) is mounted
separately from the power base when the height available is limited.
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB
This unit is mounted directly on the power base. It allows the breaking capacity to be
increased up to 130 kA at 400 V, with a visible break.
8
Setting-up accessories
Plug-in terminal blocks 6
The control terminal blocks are of the plug-in type, so allowing wiring to be prepared
7
away from the machine or the replacement of products without rewiring.
9
5 Control circuit pre-wiring system 7
Numerous pre-wired accessories provide simple, clip-in connections, e.g.
connection of reverser control terminals, ...
6
10
1/53
Structure of a motor starter

Mirror auxiliary contacts built-in
1 Coil cut-out contact built into

the handle as standard
as standard, mechanically
linked to the power poles
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Disconnection and breaking
Short-ciircuit protection
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
22/NC
Control unit
Overload protection
Power switching Low consumption
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
A2
technology coil
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
3
Control unit
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Pre-wiring
Motor starter structure Reverser
4 Reverser
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
81
84
82
5 Disconnection and breaking
Short-ciircuit protection
Power switching
Variable speed
Variable speed control controller
6 In
Understanding the commercial references through a comparison with a traditional motor starter
Non- 12 Amp Size of product 2 Rating

reversing category AC3 (45 mm wide)
8 Contactor
family
TeSys D Coil voltage :
110 V 50/60 Hz
Circuit-
breaker
TeSys D
family
Auxiliary contact (for cut-out of contactor coil) Power combination block
Power base Wide range Control voltage

control unit e.g.. : 110…240 V
Standard AC/DC
10 Starter-
controller
For ratings
up to 12 A
Starter-
controller
Rating
e.g.. : 3…12 A
family family
1/54
Selection
CONTROL UNIT POWER BASE

1
2
Maximum standard power ratings of 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz For D.O.L. starting
non-reversing
Setting range Instantaneous auxiliary contacts built-in as standard.
Reference to be completed by adding the voltage code For D.O.L. starting

reversing
Control circuit voltages (V) Reference to be completed by

3
adding the voltage code
or
Reference Rating
Auxiliary contacts
6
Auxiliary contacts
Number of contacts
Auxiliary contacts
Power pole status
7
References
Signalling contacts
Signalling contacts Number of contacts

8
Power base Fault signalling
Position of rotary knob

Removable terminal
block References
9
10
1/55
Standard control unit Magnetic control unit
1
LUCL
1 For use with a
variable speed
LUCA controller or a soft
2 Class 10 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
start-soft stop unit
(see page 1/134)
b Protection against overloads and short- b Short-circuit protection

circuits. b Manual Reset
b Protection against phase failure and Motor thermal overload protection must
3 phase imbalance.
b Earth fault protection (equipment
be provided by the variable speed
controller or soft starter.
protection only).
b Manual reset.
4
1
2
5 3
Power base Thermal overload signalling Thermal overload signalling Thermal overload alarm
LUB or LU2B module and manual reset modules and automatic or module
LUF DH11 remote reset LUF W10
2 (see page 1/71) LUF DA01 and LUF DA10 (see page 1/71)
(see page 1/71)
6
7
Motor load indication module Auxiliary contact modules Parallel wiring module
LUF V2 LUF Npp LUF C00
(see page 1/71) (see page 1/65) (see page 1/76)
3
9 Fault signalling contacts
LUA1pp 'HSHQGLQJRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
(see page 1/65)
10
Note: the colour indicates possible combinations with the selected control unit.
Example: function module LUF DH11 can only be used with an advanced control unit.
1/56
Advanced control unit Multifunction control unit
LUCB
1
Class 10 - 3-phase
1 LUCC
Class 10 - single-phase
LUCD LUCM
Class 20 - 3-phase
(see page 1/69)
Classes 5 to 30 - single-phase and 3-phase
(see page 1/70) 2
b Same functions as the standard control unit b Same functions as the standard control unit
b In addition, in conjunction with a function module: b In addition, reset parameters can be set to manual or automatic.
v fault differentiation with manual reset, b Protection function alarm.
v b Indication on front panel or on remote terminal via Modbus RS
v
fault differentiation with remote or automatic reset,
thermal overload alarm, 485 port. 3
v indication of motor load. b ³/RJÍXQFWLRQ
b ³0RQLWRULQJÍXQFWLRQLQGLFDWLRQRIPDLQPRWRUSDUDPHWHUVRQ
front panel of the control unit, or via a remote terminal
b Differentiation of thermal overload and magnetic fault.
b Overload, no-load running.
5
AS-Interface 3UR¿EXV'3 CANopen DeviceNet Advantys STB
communication modules (1) communication module (1) communication module (1) communication module (1) communication module (1)
ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 LUL C07 LUL C08 LUL C09 LUL C15
2 (see page 1/78) (see page 1/80) (see page 1/84) (see page 1/86) (see page 1/90)
7
Modbus
communication modules (1)
LUL C031 and LUL C033
(see page 1/92)
10
(1) Communication modules can only be combined with a c 24 V control unit (LUCp pp BL).
1/57
Application examples 1
525971
Application
Starting and protection of a pump.
1 Operating conditions
b Power: 4 kW at 400 V.
b In: 9 A.
b Maximum of 10 class 10 starts per hour.
b Duty class S3.
b 3-wire control:
2 v Start button (S2),
v Stop button (S1),
b Control circuit voltage: a 230 V.
Products used
Description Item Quantity Reference Page
3 Power base
12 A with screw clamp connections
1 1 LUB 12 1/62
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 12FU 1/69
Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.
510901
b Total coordination of protection devices conforming to EN 60947-6-2 (continuity of

4 service) in case of a short-circuit.
b Electronic protection against thermal overloads with an adjustment range of 4.
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
b Indication of motor status by N/C or N/O contact.
b ,QWHUORFNEHWZHHQWKHPRWRUVWDUWHUFRQWURODQGWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHURWDU\NQREQRW
possible to start the motor when the knob is in the OFF position.
1
5 Scheme
230 V
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
6
13
C.U.
14
7
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
–
W1
U1
V1
A2
8 3
10
1/58
510902
Application
Expansion of an existing installation for improved control of its operation.
Operating conditions
1
Monitor the status of the motor and obtain alarm signalling by a digital contact in
order to improve operation of the pump and anticipate a complete stoppage due to
thermal overload.
Additional products used

Description Item Quantity Reference Page 2
Replace the standard control unit with an advanced control unit and insert a thermal
2 overload alarm function module.
Advanced control unit 2 1 LUCB 12FU 1/69
Alarm function module 3 1 LUF W10 1/71
3 Functions performed
b Alarm information is generated by the advanced control unit and is processed by
3
the thermal overload alarm function module to make it usable.
b The advanced control unit includes a thermal trip Test button on its front panel.
Scheme
230 V 4
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
5
LUF W10 Alarms Module
C.U. 13
14
07 08
6
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
To
A1
application
–
W1
U1
V1
A2
M
3
7
Other versions The advanced control unit can provide other functions,
depending on the type of function modules used (instead of
the LUF W module described above):
- thermal fault signalling with function modules LUF DA01,
LUF DA10 or LUF DH11,
- indication of motor load with function module LUF V2. This
module delivers a 4-20 mA analogue signal, which is 8
proportional to the average 3-phase current drawn by the
motor. This allows the load current to be monitored and
provides access to other application functions using this
value, or to predictive or preventive maintenance
possibilities (replacement of the motor before it breaks
down).
9
10
1/59
520971
Application
Manual control of a 2-position turntable.
1 Operating conditions
b Power: 2.2 kW at 400 V.
b In: 6 A.
b 30 starts per hour
b Duty class S4.
b 3-wire control:
2 v Pushbutton for Position 1 (S1),
v Pushbutton for Position 2 (S2),
v Stop button (S5),
b Stopping at the positions is achieved by limit switches S3 and S4.
b Control circuit voltage: a 115 V.
Products used
3 Description Item Quantity Reference Page
523761
Power base, reversing, 1 1 LU2B 12FU 1/63

12 A with screw clamp connections
Standard control unit 2 1 LUCA 12FU 1/69
1
Functions performed
4 b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.
service) in case of a short-circuit.
2
b Load switching (2 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
5 Electrical interlocking is ensured by pre-wired connector LU9M R1C included on
base LU2B 12. The design of the reversing power block makes mechanical
interlocking unnecessary.
Scheme (manual control)
6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller

A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
7 C.U.
8
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W1
U1
V1
M
3
9 115 V
10
1/60
520969
Application
Monitoring operation of a surface pump in a water treatment plant to avoid dry
running, which could lead to destruction of the pump. 1
Operating conditions
b Power: 15 kW at 400 V.
b In: 28.5 A.
b Duty class S1.
b Control circuit voltage: c 24 V.
b Control-command by PLC and serial link using the Modbus protocol.
Products used
2
Description Item Quantity Reference Page
Power base 32 A without connections 1 1 LUB 320 1/62
Multifunction control unit 2 1 LUCM 32BL 1/70
Modbus communication module 3 1 LUL C033 1/93
Pre-wired coil connection 4 1 LU9B N11C 1/93
Connection of communication module
output terminals to the coil terminals
3
Connection cable for connecting the – 1 VW3 A8 306 Rpp 1/93
communication module to the serial bus
510903
T-junction – 1 VW3 A8 306 TF03 1/93

Functions performed
b Short-circuit protection with level of protection of 50 kA at 400V.
service) in case of a short-circuit.
4
b Load switching (1.5 million operating cycles in category AC-43 at In).
1 b Measurement of load current and detection of no-load running by the multifunction
control unit.
2
b No-load running or operation under load. To use this function, the following
5
parameters must be entered:
v trip: the answer yes/no enables or disables the function,
v time before tripping: the time period during which the value of the current must be
3 below the tripping threshold in order to cause tripping (adjustable from 1 to 200 s),
4 v tripping threshold: value as a % of the load current ratio in relation to the setting
FXUUHQW,IWKHUDWLRUHPDLQVEHORZWKLVWKUHVKROGIRUWKHWLPHVSHFL¿HGLQWKHSUHYLRXV
parameter, the product trips (adjustable from 30 to 100 %).
6
b Indication of the various motor starter statuses and currents.
Schemes
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LUCM Multifunction LUL C033 Modbus Module

Control Unit
24 V 24 V 7
D (B)
D (A)
D (B)
D (A)
Gnd
0RGEXVSUR¿OH,(&
Gnd
c Aux COM
LO1
24 V Aux LU9B N11C

LI1
LI2
Commands (Register 704) Status (Register 455) Pre wired coil

4 5 8 4 5 8
Forward running Bit 0 Ready (available)
Reverse running Bit 1 Poles closed
Reserved Bit 2 Fault
C.U.
Reset Bit 3 Alarms
Reserved
Connection test
Bit 4
Bit 5
Tripped
Reserved reset enabled
8
+
Reserved Bit 6 A1-A2 powered
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
24 V
Reserved Bit 7 Motor running
Reserved Bit 8 Motor current % (bit 0)
Reserved Bit 9 Motor current % (bit 1) Modbus
M
3
VW3 A8 306 TF03 9
Reserved 3-phase control Bit 12 Motor current % (bit 4)
Reserved Bit 13 Motor current % (bit 5) Other functions
Reserved Bit 14 Reserved
The multifunction control unit incorporates other control and protection functions,
Reserved Bit 15 Motor starting
such as: monitoring and control of phase current, alarm, …
0RGXOH/8/&DOVRSURYLGHVDSURJUDPPDEOHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQ¿JXUDEOH
discrete inputs.
10
1/61
References 1
Non-reversing power bases
7ZRYHUVLRQVRIFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQDUHDYDLODEOH
b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
520739
561330
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
1 is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of
control connection prewiring accessories) or when a reverser block is to be mounted
by the customer.
Power bases for non-reversing D.O.L. starting (1)

Connection Item Rating Reference Weight
2 Power Control (2) y 440 V 500 V
A A
690 V
A kg
These bases have 2 auxiliary contacts: 1 N/O (13-14) and 1 N/C (21-22) which
indicate the closed or open position of the power poles.
A low power internal contact allows power supply to the control unit to be switched off
LUB p2 LUB p20 when the rotary knob is no longer in the ON position.
3 The power bases must be used in conjunction with a control unit, see pages 1/68 to 1/70
Screw Screw 1+2+3 12 12 9 LUB 12 0.900

510904
clamp clamp +4
terminals terminals 32 23 21 LUB 32 0.900
4 Without 1+2 12 12 9 LUB 120 0.865
1 connections
2 32 23 21 LUB 320 0.865
Terminal block for power bases without connections

Connection For base Item Reference Weight
5 Screw clamp terminals LUB 120 or 320

(2)
3+4 LU9B N11
kg
0.045
(1) Rated breaking capacity for operation on short-circuit (Ics), see table below.
For higher values, use current limiters, see page 1/66
Volts 230 440 500 690 (3)
4
kA 50 50 10 4
3
(2) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
6 LUB p2 in the illustration.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
Other versions Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device
(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate
fuses).
10
Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 1/96 to 1/98 pages 1/110 and 1/111 pages 1/112 to 1/119
1/62
References 1
Reversing power bases
561270
7ZRYHUVLRQVRIFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQDUHDYDLODEOH
b connection by screw terminals, plug-in control terminal block,
b without connections. This version enables wiring to be prepared in advance and
is recommended when a communication module is required (allowing the use of 1
control connection prewiring accessories).
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting, pre-assembled
Connection Item Rating Reference, to Weight
Power Control (1) y 440 V 500 V 690 V be completed) (2)
A A A kg
These bases have two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate non-
reversing and reversing operating status.
2
Screw Screw 1 + 2 + 3 12 12 9 LU2B 12pp 1.270
clamp clamp +4+5 32 23 21 LU2B 32pp 1.270
terminals terminals
Without 1 + 2 + 3 12 12 9 LU2B A0pp 1.270
connections +5 32 23 21 LU2B B0pp 1.250
Power bases for reversing D.O.L. starting 3
for customer assembly
A reverser block should preferably be combined with a non-reversing power base
LU2B p2 without connections to create a reversing starter-controller.
The built-in N/O (13-14) and N/C (21-22) contacts are used for electrical interlocking
EHWZHHQWKHUHYHUVHUEORFNDQGWKHEDVHWKH\DUHWKHUHIRUHQRORQJHUDYDLODEOHDV
output contacts.
The reverser block has two N/O common point contacts (81-82-84) which indicate 4
non-reversing and reversing operating status.
510905
32 A reverser block Connection Item (1) Reference, to Weight

1 be completed) (2) kg
Power Control
For mounting directly Screw clamp Without 3 LU2M B0pp 0.400
beneath the power base terminals connections
2
For mounting separately Screw clamp
from the base
VFUHZRUUDLO¿[LQJ
terminals
Without
connections
6 LU6M B0pp 0.425
5
Accessories
Description Item Application Reference Weight
kg
Control 4 Reversing power base without LU9 M1 0.025
terminal
block
connections LU2B A0pp or B0pp
Reverser block LU2M B0pp LU9 M1 0.025
6
for direct mounting beneath power base
Reverser block LU6M B0pp LU9 M1 0.025
3 for mounting separately from power base
7 Reverser block LU6M B0pp LU9M R1 0.030
5 for mounting separately from power base
Control circuit pre-wiring components
Description Item Reference Weight
7
kg
Pre-wired connector (3) 5 LU9M R1C 0.035
4 (1) The various sub-assemblies are supplied assembled but they are easy to separate, as shown
in the illustration.
LU2B p2 (2) Select the same control voltage as that of the control unit.
Standard control circuit voltages:
Volts 24 48…72 110…240 8
c
510906
BL – –
a B – –
c or a – ES (4) FU (5)
6 (3) For control connection between a power base and a reverser block, for direct mounting.
(4) c : 48…72 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110…220 V, a : 110...240 V.
Other versions Power bases without built-in short-circuit protection device 9
(short-circuit protection by circuit-breaker or separate fuses).
7
LU6M + LU9 M1 + LU9M R1

10
Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes :

1/63
Presentation TeSys motor starters - open version
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
Contact states depending on the product status

Position Indication N/O pole N/C pole N/O N/C ontact
1 of rotary
knob
on front
panel
contact contact contact
any fault
any fault N/O contact
product
ready
References of add-on contact blocks – – – LUF N11 LUA1 C20 LUA1 C11 LUA1 C20
and auxiliary contact modules 31-32 97-98 95-96 17-18
Terminal referencing or – – – LUF N02 LUA1 C200 LUA1 C110 LUA1 C200
31-32 No terminal No terminal No terminal
41-42 block block block
2 or – – LUF N20
33-34
LUB9 N11
21-22
– – LUA1 C11
17-18
43-44
or – – LUF N11 – – – LUA1 C110
43-44 No terminal
block
or – – LUB9 N11 – – – –
3 Off 0
13-14
OFF
Ready to operate 0
Start 1
4
Tripped on short-circuit TRIP I>>
Tripped on Manual reset mode TRIP 0

thermal overload
5 Automatic reset on thermal 0

overload fault mode
Remote reset mode 0
N/O contact in closed position.

6 N/C contact in open position.
10
Characteristics: Schemes:
page 1/98 page 1/112
1/64
References TeSys motor starters - open version
Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules
568764
References
Auxiliary contacts
Signalling and composition Cabling Item Reference Weight
kg
1
1 N/C fault signalling Screw clamp 1+2 LUA1 C11 0.030
contact (95-96) and terminals
3 1 N/O contact (17-18)
indicating rotary knob Without 1 LUA1 C110 0.012
in “ready” position connections
4 1 N/O fault signalling

contact (97-98) and
Screw clamp
terminals
1+2 LUA1 C20 0.030 2
1 N/O contact (17-18)
6 indicating rotary knob Without 1 LUA1 C200 0.012
1 in “ready” position connections
2 N/O contacts Screw clamp 6 LUA8 E20 0.048

2 Contacts open, rotary knob terminals
5
in “OFF” position
Contacts closed, rotary knob
3
in “ready” position
LUB + LUA1 + LUF N + LUA 8E20
Auxiliary contact modules for connection by screw clamp terminals
Module with 2 contacts indicating the status of the starter-controller power poles
Operation: a or c 24…250 V, I th: 5 A
Composition Item Reference Weight

4
kg
2 N/O contacts (33-34 and 43-44) 3 LUF N20 0.050
1 N/C contact (31-32) and 1 N/O contact (43-44) 3 LUF N11 0.050
2 N/C contacts (31-32 and 41-42) 3 LUF N02 0.050
Accessories
5
Description For use on Item Reference Weight
kg
Screw clamp LUA1 C110 2 LU9B C11 0.022
terminal blocks
LUA1 C200 2 LU9B C20 0.022

6
Blanking Location for auxiliary contact, 4 LU9C 1 0.020
covers communication or
function module
Location for add-on 5 LU9C 2 0.010
contact blocks
7
10
page 1/98 page 1/112
1/65
Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and
accessories
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 63 A

Description Application Pitch Item Sold in Unit Weight
1 8 4 1 2
Sets of 3-pole 2 tap-offs
mm
45 2
lots of
1
reference
GV2 G245
kg
0.036
63 A busbars 54 – 1 GV2 G254 0.038
3
3 tap-offs 45 – 1 GV2 G345 0.058
54 – 1 GV2 G354 0.060
2 4 tap-offs 45
54
1
–
1
1
GV2 G445
GV2 G454
0.77
0.085
5 tap-offs 54 – 1 GV2 G554 0.100
Protective For unused – 4 5 GV1 G10 0.005

end cover busbar outlets
5 6
3 Terminal block for Connection
supply to one or from the top
– 3 1 GV1 G09 0.040
more busbar sets
Pre-wired system for power connections up to 160 A

The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support.
4 Set of 4-pole busbars: 3-phase + neutral or 3-phase + common

Number of Item Length For mounting in Reference Weight
tap-offs at enclosure width
18 mm intervals
mm mm kg
18 5 452 800 AK5 JB144 0.900
5
Removable 3-phase power sockets
Number of Thermal Item Cable Sold in Unit Weight
points used current lengths lots of reference
on the busbar
7 system kg
2 16 6 200 6 AK5 PC13 (1) 0.040
6 9 32 6 250 6 AK5 PC33 (1) 0.045
8 1000 6 AK5 PC33L (1) 0.060
Limiter blocks and accessories

Application Item Breaking Mounting Unit Weight
7 capacity Iq
y 440 V 690 V
reference
kA kA kg
Limiter- 7+9 130 70 Direct on LUA LB1 (2) 0.310
disconnector power base
(3) (5)
Current limiter 8 100 35 Separate LA9 LB920 0.320
8 (3)
Limiter cartridge 9 130 70 Limiter-disconnector LUA LF1 0.135
Clip-in – – – On power base, LAD 90 (4) 0.001
marker holder on reverser block,
on parallel link
splitter box
(1) The rated peak current for power sockets AK5 PCpp is 6 kA.
When used in association with power bases LUBpp, the prospective short-circuit current
9 (2)
must not exceed 7 kA.
Supplied with limiter cartridge.
(3) These devices make it possible to increase the breaking capacity of the power base.
(4) Sold in lots of 100.
(5) The limiter must be mounted on an LUB or LU2B power base. The limiter can therefore not
be common to several motor starters.
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
1/66
References (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Power connection pre-wired system, limiter blocks and
accessories
568768
1 Phase barrier
Phase barrier LU9 SP0 must be used:
b To build a UL 508 type E FHUWL¿HGVWDUWHU6HOI3URWHFWHG6WDUWHU
:LWKRXWWKHSKDVHEDUULHUWKHVWDUWHUFRQWUROOHULVFHUWL¿HG8/
1
b If the starter-controller is to be used on an operational voltage of 690 V.
Description Item Application Mounting Reference Weight
Phase barrier 1 LUB or LU2B 12 or 120 Direct on LU9 SP0

kg
0.030 2
LUB or LU2B 32 or 320 terminals
LUA LB1 L1, L2, L3
568769
Door interlock mechanisms

2
Fixing kit (1) (2) LU9 AP00
kg
0.490
3
2+3
3 4 Door-mounted black handle on blue front plate, IP54 4 LU9 AP11 0.150
4
Door-mounted red handle on yellow front plate, IP54 4 LU9 AP12 0.150
568771
5
Handle for mounting in the MCC drawer 5 LU9 AP20 0.096
(Motor Control Centre)
5
7KH¿[LQJNLWLQFOXGHVDEUDFNHWDQGDVKDIWH[WHQVLRQPD[LPXPGHSWKPP
7RXVHWKH¿[LQJNLWZLWKD'2/UHYHUVLQJSRZHUEDVHRQO\UHYHUVHUEORFN/80PXVWEH
6
used.
7
568770
8
TEST
RESET
0
5 9
10
Dimensions:
pages 1/110 and 1/111
1/67
Selection TeSys motor starters - open version
Control units
Operating characteristics
Control units Standard Advanced Multifunction
1 Thermal overload protection
LUCA LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCM
Overcurrent protection 14.2 x the setting current 3 to 17 x the setting current
Short-circuit protection 14.2 x the max. current

Protection against phase loss
2 Protection against phase imbalance

Earth fault protection
(equipment protection only)
Tripping class 10 10 20 5…30
Motor type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase Single-phase and 3-phase
Thermal overload test function
3 Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method Manual Parameters can be set

Automatic or remote With function module, or parameters Parameters can be set
can be set via the bus with a
4 communication module, see chart
below.
Parameters can be set via the bus with
a communication module (see below).
Alarm Thermal overload alarm only with Possible for each type of fault.
function module or communication Indication on front panel of the control
module, see below. unit, via remote terminal, via PC or via
PDA (1).
5 With communication modules to make

use of these alarms via a bus, see
below.
“Log” function Log of the last 5 trips.
Number of starts, number of trips,
number of operating hours.
6 “Monitoring” function Display of main motor parameters on

front panel of the control unit, via
remote terminal, via PC or via PDA (1).
With function modules (2)

Thermal overload alarm With module LUF W
7 Thermal overload signalling and manual reset With module LUF DH11
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset With modules LUF DA01 and
LUF DA10
Indication of motor load (analogue) With module LUF V
With communication module or via Modbus port on control unit LUCM (2)
8 Starter status (ready, running, fault)
Reset method
With any communication module
Parameters can be set via the bus
Alarm With modules LUL C031, LUL C033, With module LUL C031, LUL C033,
LUL C15, LUL C07, LUL C08 and LUL C15, LUL C07, LUL C08 and
Remote reset via the bus LUL C09 (thermal overload alarm only). LUL C09
and Modbus port on the control unit
Indication of motor load
(alarm possible for all types of fault).
9 Fault signalling and differentiation

Remote programming and monitoring of all functions With modules LUL C031, LUL C033,
“Log” function LUL C15, LUL C07, LUL C08 and
LUL C09
“Monitoring” function
and Modbus port on the control unit.
Built-in function Function provided with accessory
10 (1) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant.

(2) Mounting possibilities: 1 function module or 1 communication module.
1/68
Standard and advanced control units
510913
Description
1 Extraction and locking handle
1
2
3
Test button (on advanced control unit only)
Ir adjustment dial
1
5 4 Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
5 Sealing of locking handle
2
Standard control units
Maximum standard power Setting Clip-in Reference, to Weight
ratings of 3-phase motors range mounting on be completed
50/60 Hz
400/440 V 500 V 690 V
power base
Rating
by adding the
voltage code (1)
2
kW kW kW A A kg
Class 10 for 3-phase motors
4 3
LUCA pppp 0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCA X6pp 0.135
LUCB pppp 0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCA 1Xpp 0.135
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCA 05pp 0.135
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCA 12pp 0.135 3
520735
7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCA 18pp 0.135

15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCA 32pp 0.135
Advanced control units

Pressing the Test button on the front panel simulates tripping on thermal overload.
Class 10 for 3-phase motors 4
0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCB X6pp 0.140
0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCB 1Xpp 0.140
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCB 05pp 0.140
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCB 12pp 0.140
7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCB 18pp 0.140
15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCB 32pp 0.140
5
Class 10 for single-phase motors
– – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCC X6pp 0.140
0.09 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCC 1Xpp 0.140
0.55 – – 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCC 05pp 0.140
LUB p2 + LUCA pppp 2.2 – – 3…12 12 and 32 LUCC 12pp 0.140
4
7.5
–
–
–
–
4.5…18
8…32
32
32
LUCC 18pp
LUCC 32pp
0.140
0.140 6
520736
Class 20 for 3-phase motors

0.09 – – 0.15…0.6 12 and 32 LUCD X6pp 0.140
0.25 – – 0.35…1.4 12 and 32 LUCD 1Xpp 0.140
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCD 05pp 0.140
5.5
7.5
5.5
9
9
15
3…12
4.5…18
12 and 32
32
LUCD 12pp
LUCD 18pp
0.140
0.140
7
15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCD 32pp 0.140

Volts 24 48…72 110…240
c BL (2), (3) – –
a
c or a
B
–
–
ES (4)
–
FU (5)
8
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(3) d.c. voltage with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
(4) c : 48…72 V, a : 48 V.
(5) c : 110…220 V, a : 110...240 V.
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp

9
10
pages 1/96 and 1/99 page 1/113
1/69
Multifunction control units
510914
Description
6 1 Extraction and locking handle
1 1
2
3
Built-in display window (2 lines, 12 characters)
4-button keypad
4 c 24 V auxiliary power supply
2 5 Modbus RS485 communication port. Connection by RJ45 connector.
6 Sealing of locking handle
3
The display window 2 and keypad 3 allow:
2 5
b LQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQPRGHORFDOFRQ¿JXUDWLRQRISURWHFWLRQIXQFWLRQVDQGDODUPV
b in run mode: display of parameter values and events.
The Modbus communication port 5 is used to connect:
b an operator terminal,
b a PC,
4
LUCMppBL b a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA).
Multifunction control units
3 Parameter entry, monitoring of parameter values and consultation of logs are carried
out:
520737
b either on the front panel, using the built-in display window/keypad,

b or via an operator terminal,
b or via a PC or a PDA with PowerSuite software,
b or remotely, via a Modbus communication bus.
Programming of the product via the keypad requires a c 24 V auxiliary power
4 supply.
Maximum standard power Setting Clip-in Reference Weight
ratings of 3-phase motors range mounting on (1)
50/60 Hz power base
400/415 V 500 V 690 V Rating
kW kW kW A A kg
5 0.09
0.25
–
–
–
–
0.15…0.6
0.35…1.4
12 and 32
12 and 32
LUCM X6BL
LUCM 1XBL
0.175
0.175
1.5 2.2 3 1.25…5 12 and 32 LUCM 05BL 0.175
5.5 5.5 9 3…12 12 and 32 LUCM 12BL 0.175

7.5 9 15 4.5…18 32 LUCM 18BL 0.175
15 15 18.5 8…32 32 LUCM 32BL 0.175
6 LUB p2 + LUCM ppBL

TeSys U user’s manual (2)
Application Language Reference Weight
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language (3) LU9 CD1 0.022
HMI terminal
7 This compact Magelis terminal enables the parameters of multifunction control unit
521335
/8&0WREHUHDGDQGPRGL¿HG
,WLVVXSSOLHGSUHFRQ¿JXUHGWRSURYLGHGLDORJXHZLWK7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUV
(Modbus protocol, application pages and alarm pages loaded).
Starter-controller alarm and fault management takes priority.
Language Display window Supply voltage Reference Weight
kg
8 XBT NU400
Multi-language (3) 4 lines of
20 characters
c 24 V XBT NU400 0.150
Connecting cable (4)

Function Length Type Reference Weight
kg
Connects terminal XBT NU400 2.5 m SUB-D 25-way XBT Z938 0.200
to a multifunction control unit. female - RJ45
9 (1) Input voltage c 24 V with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
(2) The CD-Rom contains user’s manuals for the AS-Interface and Modbus communication
modules, multifunction control units and gateway modules, as well as the gateway
programming software.
(3) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
(4) If a terminal is used with several control units, this cable can be connected to a Modbus hub
or to T-junctions (see page 1/93).
10
pages 1/96 and 1/99 pages 1/112 to 1/115
1/70
Function modules
Function modules
Output Item Application Reference Weight
Thermal overload signalling and manual reset

kg
1
Module LUF DH11 makes it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-
circuit faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1 C). The module includes two contacts for thermal overload signalling, as well
as an LED on the front panel.
To reset the motor starter, the operator must use the rotary knob on the power base.
The module can only be used with an advanced control unit and requires an a/c
24…240 V external power supply.
2
510915
4 1 N/O + 1 N/C 3 a or c 24…250 V LUF DH11 0.060
Thermal overload signalling and automatic or remote reset

These modules make it possible to differentiate thermal overload and short-circuit
faults. (The short-circuit fault can then be signalled via add-on contact blocks
LUA1 C).
3
3 The modules include one contact for thermal overload signalling, as well as an LED
on the front panel. A second contact (terminals Z1-Z2) must be wired in series with
terminal A1 of the motor starter. In the event of a thermal overload fault, this wiring
allows motor control to be switched off. The rotary knob on the power base will then
VWD\LQWKH³UHDG\SRVLWLRQ´ .
2
Resetting of the motor starter is automatic after the required motor cooling time if
terminals X1-X2 are linked by a strap, or remote by pulsed closing of a volt-free
4
contact connected to terminals X1-X2.
These modules can only be used with an advanced control unit and require an a/c
24…240 V external power supply.
LUB p2 + LUCB pppp

+
1 Note: Terminals X1-X2 are not isolated from the signalling module power supply.
)RUUHPRWHUHVHWWLQJXVHDYROWIUHHFRQWDFWVSHFL¿FWRHDFKPRGXOHWREHUHVHW
5
LUFW 10 or LUF Vp
1 N/C 4 a or c 24…250 V LUF DA01 0.055
1 N/O 4 a or c 24…250 V LUF DA10 0.055
Thermal overload alarm

Through load shedding, this module makes it possible to avoid stoppages in
510445
%
200 operation due to overload tripping.
Imminent thermal overload tripping is displayed as soon as the thermal state
6
exceeds the threshold of 105 % (hysteresis = 5 %).
Signalling is possible via an LED on the front panel of the module and externally by
an N/O relay output.
100
It can only be used with an advanced control unit, from which it takes its power.
1
2 1 N/O 1 a or c 24…250 V LUF W10 0.055 7
3 1 2.2 kW Indication of motor load
2 4 kW
3 7.5 kW This module provides a signal which is representative of the motor load status
4 12 mA 20 mA (I average/Ir).
b I average = average value of the rms currents in the 3 phases,
b Ir = value of the setting current.
The value of the signal (4-20 mA) corresponds to a load status of 0 to 200 % (0 to
300 % for a single-phase load).
8
It can be used with an advanced or multifunction control unit.
Module LUF V2 requires a c 24 V external power supply.
4 - 20 mA 2 – LUF V2 0.050
10
pages 1/96 and 1/101 page 1/114
1/71
Presentation, PowerSuite software workshop
functions
Presentation
The PowerSuite software workshop for PC is a user-friendly tool designed for setting
534513
1 up the Schneider Electric control device motors:

b TeSys U starter-controllers
b TeSys T motor management systems
b Altistart soft start/soft stop units
b Altivar variable speed drives
b Lexium 05 servo drives
2 It includes various functions designed for setup phases such as:

b 3UHSDULQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV
b Start-up
b Maintenance
To facilitate start-up and maintenance, the PowerSuite software workshop is
compatible with the Bluetooth® wireless link.
3 PowerSuite screen on PC Functions (1)

3UHSDULQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used on its own to generate the device
FRQ¿JXUDWLRQZKLFKFDQEHVDYHGSULQWHGDQGH[SRUWHGWRRI¿FHDXWRPDWLRQ
software.
4 The PowerSuite software workshop can also be used to convert an Altivar 58 or

$OWLYDU)GULYHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLQWRRQHWKDWLVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKDQ$OWLYDU
Start-up
When the PC is connected to the device, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
533181
used to:
5 b 7UDQVIHUWKHJHQHUDWHGFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
b Adjust
b Monitor. This option has been enhanced with new functions such as:
v The oscilloscope
v The high-speed oscilloscope (minimum time base: 2 ms)
v The FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) oscilloscope
v Display of communication parameters
b Control
6 b 6DYHWKH¿QDOFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
PowerSuite screen on PC
View of PI regulator function parameters Maintenance
To facilitate maintenance operations, the PowerSuite software workshop can be
used to:
b &RPSDUHWKHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQRIDGHYLFHFXUUHQWO\EHLQJXVHGZLWKDVDYHG
7 FRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
b Manage the user’s installed equipment base, in particular:
v Organize the installed base into folders (electrical equipment, machinery,
workshops, etc.)
v Store maintenance messages
v Facilitate Modbus TCP connection by storing the IP address
8 User interface
572706
The PowerSuite software workshop can be used to:

b Present the device parameters (arranged by function) in the form of illustrated
views of diagrams or simple tables
b Customize the parameter names
b Create:
v A user menu (choice of particular parameters)
9 v Monitoring control panels with graphic elements (cursors, gauges, bar charts)
b Perform sort operations on the parameters
b 'LVSOD\WH[WLQ¿YHODQJXDJHV(QJOLVK)UHQFK*HUPDQ,WDOLDQDQG6SDQLVK7KH
language changes immediately and there is no need to restart the program.
It also features online contextual help:

b On the PowerSuite tool
10 b On the device functions by direct access to the user manuals
(1) Certain functions are not available for all devices. See the table of available functions,
page 1/73.
View of the FTT oscilloscope
References:
page 1/74
1/72
Functions (continued) PowerSuite software workshop
Functions available for the PowerSuite software workshop

Functions not listed in the table are available for all devices.
Function available with devices Controller Starter-
controller
Soft start/
soft stop
Drives Servo
drive
1
unit
TeSys T TeSys U ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71 LXM 05
Monitoring
Oscilloscope
High-speed oscilloscope
FFT oscilloscope
Display of communication parameters
2
Control
Customization of parameter names
Creation of a user menu
Creation of monitoring control panels
Sort operation on parameters
Custom logic editor
3
Functions available
Functions not available
Connections (1)
Modbus serial link
4
536845
The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected directly to the device terminal
PowerSuite port or Modbus network port via the serial port on the PC.
Two types of connection are possible:

b With a single device (point-to-point connection), use a VW3 A8 106 PC serial port
RS 232 connection kit.
XGS Z24
RS 485
Modbus serial link b With a number of devices (multidrop connection), use the XGS Z24 interface. 5
Modbus TCP communication network
The PowerSuite software workshop can be connected to a Modbus TCP network.
In this case, the devices can be accessed:
ATV 31 or ATV 61 ATV 71 TeSys U ATS 48 b Using a VW3 A3 310 communication card for the Altivar 61and 71 drives
Lexium 05
Modbus multidrop connection
b Using a TSX ETG 100 Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway 6
Bluetooth® wireless link
PLC (2) The PowerSuite software workshop can communicate via a Bluetooth® radio link if
536846
the device is equipped with a Bluetooth® Modbus VW3 A8 114. The adapter plugs
PowerSuite into the device connector terminal port or Modbus network port and has a range of
10 m (class 2). 7
If the PC does not feature Bluetooth® technology, use the VW3 A8 115 USB -
Modbus TCP network Bluetooth® adapter.
Bridge
Modbus
Remote maintenance
A simple Modbus TCP connection is all that is required for the PowerSuite software
8
serial link workshop to support remote monitoring and diagnostics.
When devices are not connected to the Modbus TCP network, or it is not directly
accessible, various remote transmission solutions may be used instead (modem,
WHOHSURFHVVLQJJDWHZD\HWF3OHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2I¿FH
ATV 31 or
Lexium 05
ATS 48 ATV 61 ATV 71
(1) Please refer to the compatibility table on page 1/75.
(2) Please refer to our specialist "Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7
9
software" and "Automation platform Modicon M340" catalogues.
Modbus TCP connection
10
page 1/72 page 1/74
1/73
References PowerSuite software workshop
PowerSuite software workshop

Description Composition Reference Weight
1 b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian VW3 A8 104
kg
0.100
536848
PowerSuite CD-ROM
and Spanish
b Variable speed drive, starter and servo drive technical manuals
PowerSuite update b 1 program for PC in English, French, German, Italian VW3 A8 105 0.100
CD-ROM (1) and Spanish
b Variable speed drive and starter technical manuals
2 PC serial port connection kit b 1 x 3 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector on starter-controller or VW3 A8 106 0.350
VW3 A8 104 for point-to-point Modbus drive side and 1 RS 232/RS 485 converter with 1 9-way female
connection SUB-D connector on PC side
b For the ATV 11 drive: 1 converter with one 4-way male SUB-D
connector and 1 RJ45 connector
b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter
3 RS 232/RS 485 interface

for multidrop Modbus
b 1 Modbus multidrop converter for connection to screw
terminals. Requires a 24 V c (20...30 V), 20 mA power supply (2)
XGS Z24 0.105
connection
Modbus-Bluetooth® adapter b 1 Bluetooth® adapter (10 m range, class 2) VW3 A8 114 0.155
536847
(3) with 1 RJ45 connector

b For PowerSuite: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
b For TwidoSoft: 1 x 0.1 m cable with 1 RJ45 connector and
1 mini DIN connector
4 b For ATV 38/58/58F drives: 1 RJ45/9-way male SUB-D adapter
VW3 A8 114
USB - Bluetooth® adapter for This adapter is required in the case of a PC that does not feature VW3 A8 115 0.290
PC Bluetooth® technology. It is connected to a USB port on the PC.
10 m range (class 2)
(1) Updates a version u V1.40 with the latest available version. For versions < V1.40, you should order the PowerSuite CD-Rom,
VW3 A8 104.
5 (2) Please refer to the "Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies" catalogue.
(3) Can also be used to communicate between a Twido PLC and the TwidoSoft software workshop.
10
Presentation: Functions:
page 1/72 page 1/72
1/74
Compatibility PowerSuite software workshop
Compatibility of PowerSuite software workshop with the following devices (1)

Connexion Controller Starter- Soft start/ Drives Servo drives
controller soft stop
unit 1
TeSys T TeSys U (2) ATS 48 ATV 11 ATV 31 ATV 61 ATV 71 LXM 05A LXM 05B LXM 05C
Modbus V2.5 V1.40 V1.30 V1.40 V2.0 V2.3 V2.2 V2.2 V2.4 V2.5
Modbus TCP (device equipped V2.3 V2.2
with Modbus TCP card)
Modbus TCP via V1.50 V2.0 V2.3 V2.2 V2.2 V2.4 V2.5
Modbus TCP/Modbus gateway
Bluetooth® V2.2 V2.2 V2.3 V2.2 V2.2 V2.4 V2.5
2
Compatible software versions
Incompatible software versions
Hardware and software environments

7KH3RZHU6XLWHVRIWZDUHZRUNVKRSFDQRSHUDWHLQWKHIROORZLQJ3&HQYLURQPHQWVDQGFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV
b Microsoft Windows® XP SP1, SP2,
b Pentium III, 800 MHz, hard disk with 300 MB available, 128 MB RAM
3
b 69*$RUKLJKHUGH¿QLWLRQPRQLWRU
(1) Minimum software version.

(2) TeSys U starter-controller without communication module or with Modbus LUL C031 or LUL C033 communication module.
10
Presentation: Functions: References:

1/75
Presentation, TeSys motor starters - open version 1
references 1
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
Presentation
The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect starter-controllers to the PLC
1
510916
I/O modules quickly and without any need for tools. It replaces traditional screw
terminal and single wire connections. It is used with the Telefast pre-wired system
(1).
The parallel wiring module provides the status and command information for each
starter-controller. It must be used with an LUB 12 or LU2B A0BL power base and a
c 24 V control unit LUCp ppBL.
Splitter boxes LU9 G02 and LU9 G03 distribute information from the PLC I/O
2 1 2 modules to each of the starter-controllers connected to it.
Splitter box LU9 G02 (maximum of 4 reversing starters) is optimised for use with
card TSX DMZ28DTK and splitter box LU9 G03 (maximum of 8 reversing starters)
1 Outputs for starter commands
for use with cards TSX DMZ64DTK and BMX DDM3202K.
2 RJ45 connector for connecting to splitter box
When used in conjunction with the Advantys STB distributed I/O solution, the
TeSys U starter-controller is ideal in decentralised automation architectures (2).
3 The use of dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 allows remote
511528
511529
connection of 4 starter-controllers.
Parallel wiring module LUF C00 has:

b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running,
b 3 inputs: position of the rotary knob, fault indication and position of the poles.
4 Each of the channels of LU9 G0p splitter boxes has:

b 2 outputs: control of starter forward and reverse running, in the case of a
reversing starter.
b 2 inputs: fault indication and position of poles.
Connection to the dedicated module is by means of the following cables:

LU9 G02 LU9 G03
b RJ45 LU9Rpp, for lengths less than 3 metres,
b 490 NTW 000pp, for lengths greater than 3 metres.
5
Parallel type connection
Architecture
3 Parallel wiring module

LUF C00
510917
8
6 6 4 Pre-wired coil connection
LU9B N11C
5 Connection cable LU9 Rp with
one RJ45 connector at each
end
4 4 6 Splitter box LU9 G02 or
10 LU9 G03 for 8 motor starters
7 9 3 3 with channel connections on
the PLC side by two HE 10
To connectors and on the starter-
PLC 7 5 controller side by 8 RJ45
11 connectors.
7 Connection cable
12 TSX CDPppp with one HE 10
8 12
connector at each end.
References
kg
Parallel wiring module 3 LUF C00 0.045
9
(1) Please consult our "Power Control and connection components catalogue”.
(2) Please consult our "IP20 distributed inputs/outputs Advantys STB" catalogue
8 Dedicated parallel interface module
(STB EPI 2145)
9 Power base
10 10 c 24 V control unit (LUC B/D/C/M pp BL)
11 Parallel wiring module (LUF C00)
12 Options: add-on contact blocks, reverser blocks
1/76
Parallel wiring module and pre-wired coil connection
components
Pre-wired components simplify wiring and reduce wiring errors.

566964
Connection of communication module output terminals

to the coil terminals 1
By pre-wired connector or wire link.
b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection

The use of a power base without pre-wired connections is recommended.
Description For use with

power base
Item Reference Weight
kg
2
Pre-wired coil LUB pp 4 LU9B N11C 0.045
connection
LU2B pp 13 LU9M RC 0.030
3 b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency Stop control or a voltage interface.
This type of connection must be used for a reversing starter-controller assembled
using an LU6M reverser block for separate mounting. When reverser block LU6M
3
4 and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may by used.
LUB + LUF C00 + LU9B
Connection of parallel wiring module to the PLC

No tools are required to connect the parallel wiring module to the PLC. Connection
LVYLDDVSOLWWHUER[ZKLFKDOORZVXSWRVWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUVWREHFRQQHFWHGD 4
510918
maximum of 4 reversing starters per splitter box is allowed.

The splitter box requires a c 24 V power supply.
Splitter boxes
Connectors For use with Reference Weight
PLC side Starter-controller
side kg 5
2 x HE 10 8 x RJ45 4 reversing starters LU9 G02 (1) 0.260
20-way maximum
8 reversing starters LU9 G03 (1) 0.260
maximum
Connection cables to the splitter box
Connectors Item Length
m
Reference Weight
kg 6
2 x RJ45 connectors 5 0.3 LU9 R03 0.045
3 1 LU9 R10 0.065
3 LU9 R30 0.125
13
Connection cables from splitter box to PLC
Type of connection Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight
PLC side Splitter box 7
side
AWG mm2 m kg
HE 10 HE 10 22 0.324 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
20-way 20-way 1 TSX CDP 103 0.150
2 TSX CDP 203 0.280
LU2B + LUF C00 + LU9M 3 TSX CDP 303 0.410
5 TSX CDP 503 0.670 8
28 0.080 1 ABF H20 H100 0.080
2 ABF H20 H200 0.140
3 ABF H20 H300 0.210
HE 10 2 x HE 10 – 0.324 0.5 BMX FCC 053 0.210
40-way 20-way 1 BMX FCC 103 0.350
2 BMX FCC 203 0.630 9
3 BMX FCC 303 0.940
5 BMX FCC 503 1.530
10 BMX FCC 1003 3.000
Bare wires HE 10 22 0.324 3 TSX CDP 301 0.400
20-way 5 TSX CDP 501 0.660
(1) Allows "run" and "fault" status of each starter-controller to be fed back to the PLC and
transmits commands.
10
1/77
references 1
AS-Interface communication modules
Presentation
1 2
1 AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51 make it easy to
connect starter-controllers to the AS-Interface cabling system, and therefore allow
remote control and command of these starter-controllers.
510919
Module ASILUF C51 features extended addresing.
The various operating states of the modules (AS-Interface voltage present,

2 communication fault, addressing fault,…) are indicated on the front panel by a green
LED 1 and a red LED 2.
Operation of the modules is continuously monitored by auto-testing, in a way that is

totally transparent to the user.
The incorporation of AS-Interface V.2.1 functions allows diagnostics to be performed

3 4 5
3 on the modules, either remotely via the line or locally via the ASI TERV2 addressing
terminal.
1 Green LED: AS-Interface voltage present
2 Red LED: AS-Interface or module fault The communication modules must be connected to a c 24 V auxiliary supply and
3 Outputs for starter commands must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V control unit, LUCp ppBL.
4 Black connector for connection to c 24 V auxiliary The product is supplied with a yellow connector 4 for connection to the AS-Interface
power supply system, a black connector 5 for connection to the c 24 V auxiliary supply and a black
connector 3 for connection of the outputs.
4 5 Yellow connector for connection to the AS-Interface
system
Series type connection
Architecture
6 Communication modules ASILUF C5 or

ASILUF C51
5 7 Tap-off TCS ATV01N2
8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
8 6
6
7
24 V
7 AS-Interface
Information transmitted by the AS-Interface system

$6,QWHUIDFHSUR¿OHV ')SUR¿OHDQG$(SUR¿OH
Data bits (command) Bit value =0 =1
Command D0 (O) Stop forward Forward running
8 Command D1 (O)
Command D2 (O)
Stop reverse
Not used
Reverse running
Not used
Command D3 (O) Not used Not used
Data bits Bit value =0 =1

(status) Status D0 (I) Not ready or fault Ready
Status D1 (I) Stopped Running
9 Status D2 (I)
Status D3 (I)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
References
Description Addressing Item Reference Weight
kg
Communication Single 6 ASI LUF C5 0.065
10 modules 31 slaves
Extended 6 ASI LUF C51 0.065
62 slaves
1/78
AS-Interface communication modules

510920
Connection of communication module output terminals to the

coil terminals
1

The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is
recommended.
1 Description For use with Item Reference Weight

2
power base kg
Pre-wired LUB pp 3 LU9B N11C 0.045
coil connection
3
LUB + ASILUF C5 + LU9B b Wire link 3

531122

and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may be used.
Connection of the communication module (1) 4

This is achieved by using a tap-off for connection to 2 ribbon cables:
b 1 for AS-Interface (yellow).
b 1 for separate c 24 V supply (black).
Description Length Reference Weight

1
5 Tap-off
m
2 XZ CG0142
kg
0.265
5
Consoles and cable adapter
Description Reference Weight
kg
LU2B + ASILUF C5 + LU9M

Addressing terminal
Battery operated. Battery charger supplied
XZ MC11 0.550
6
AS-Interface V.1 and V.2.1 compatible
Adjustment and diagnostics console ASI TERV2 0.500
Runs on LR6 batteries
Allows addressing of AS-Interface V.2.1 slaves
and diagnostics
520899
520898
Cable adapter XZ MG12 0.070

For console XZ MC11
7
Software set-up
$6,QWHUIDFHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLVFDUULHGRXWXVLQJ3/0LFUR-XQLRU3URVRIWZDUH)URP
WKHPRGXOHGHFODUDWLRQVFUHHQLWLVSRVVLEOHWRFRQ¿JXUHDOOWKHVODYHGHYLFHV
corresponding to all the AS-Interface I/O.
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQLVFDUULHGRXWE\IROORZLQJWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVRQWKHVFUHHQ
8
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language LU9 CD1 0.022
(3)
(1) Degree of protection IP 54. Connection by 4 x 0.34 mm2 wires.
Black wire: + 24 V. 9
White wire: 0 V.
Blue wire: AS-Interface (–).
Brown wire: AS-Interface (+).
10
1/79
Presentation 1
3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHDQGSUHZLUHGFRLO
connection components
1 2 3 Presentation
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
1 PRGXOH/8/&DOORZV7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUVWREHFRQWUROOHGYLD3UR¿EXV'3
567139
10 (Deported Periphery).
Communication module LULC07 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U system’s
LQWHUQDOUHJLVWHUVZKLFKFDQEHDFFHVVHGYLDWKH3UR¿EXV'3EXVLQF\FOLFRUDF\FOLF
PRGH7KLVPRGXOHKDVD9$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQ¿JXUDEOHGLVFUHWH
inputs.
2 9 4 Connections
Serial bus topology
11
8 7 6 5
3 15 15
1 LED indicating module status
2 Fault signalling LED 13
13
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, 14 16
OA3 and LO1
4 SUB-D connector for bus link 18 18 18 18
4 5 c 24 V supply connection
6 Discrete input
17 17
7 Discrete input 12 12
24 V 24 V
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (non- 11 3URJUDPPDEOHFRQWUROOHUZLWK3UR¿EXV'3PDVWHUFDUG
reversing and reversing) 12 Other slave (not powered via the bus)
5 10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or

multifunction)
13
14
3UR¿EXV'3ZLUHFDEOH76;3%6&$ P76;3%6&$ P
6WDQGDUG3UR¿EXV'3FRQQHFWRU1$'RU1$'
15 3UR¿EXV'3SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOHIRUc 24 V-Aux supply to LUL C07 modules (LU9 GC7)
16 3UR¿EXV'3FRQQHFWRU7H6\V8GHGLFDWHG/8$'
17 3UR¿EXV'3ZLUHFDEOH/853%ppp)
18 3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
6 3UR¿EXV'3JHQHUDOLQIRUPDWLRQ
7KH7H6\V8FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHVXSSRUWV3UR¿EXVDSSOLFDWLRQSUR¿OHVEDVHG
on DP V0 and DP V1 services: motor starter (MS), motor management starter
(MMS).
Cyclic / Acyclic services

7 In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services.
7KHDSSOLFDWLRQSUR¿OHVGH¿QHIRUWKHF\FOLFGDWD
b manufacturer independent data,
b PDQXIDFWXUHUVSHFL¿FGDWD
DP V1 Read / Write services

DP V1 read and write services allow access to all data that cannot be accessed by
8 cyclic data exchange.
PKW feature
In order to make data which is not cyclically exchanged accessible for DP V0
masters, a function called PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words) is implemented.
The cyclic data carries a dedicated zone of 4 input words and 4 output words, called
3.:ZKLFKPDNHVLWSRVVLEOHWRDFFHVVDOOWKHUHJLVWHUV³HQEORF´
9
Electronic device description
7KH7H6\V8V\VWHPLVGHVFULEHGE\D*6 ¿OH(1)7KLV¿OHZLOOEHXVHGE\DQ\
3UR¿EXVFRQ¿JXUDWLRQWRROWRJHWLQIRUPDWLRQDERXWWKHGHYLFH
7KH*6 ¿OHVDQGDVVRFLDWHGLFRQGHGLFDWHGWRWKH7H6\V8V\VWHPFDQEH
GRZQORDGHGIURPWKH³ZZZVFKQHLGHUHOHFWULFFRP´ZHEVLWH/LEUDU\6RIWZDUH
Tools).
10 (1) Replace the asterisk with the letter corresponding to the required language.
1/80
Presentation (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version 1
references 1
Information carried by the bus

Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C07.
1
106949
&RPSDWLELOLW\RI3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/&
with c 24 V control units
Information accessible LUL C07 in conjunction with:
YLD3UR¿EXV'3 LUCA ppBL LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
Standard Advanced Multifunction
control unit control unit control unit
Starter status (ready, running, fault)

2
Start and Stop commands
Remote reset via the bus
Fault signalling and differentiation
LUL C07
Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
3
“Log” function
Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
References
4
kg
3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH 18 LUL C07 0.108

coil terminals
By pre-wired connector or wire link. 5
510951

recommended.
OA3 OA1 COM Description For use with Item Reference Weight
power base kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp 4 LU9B N11L 0.050 6
LU2B pp 6 LU9M RL 0.450
b Wire link:
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
7
c 24 V
c 24 V
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.

COM
LO1
LI1
LI2
Components for connection to the bus and to the installation

The c9$X[VXSSO\WR3UR¿EXV'3PRGXOHV/8/&PXVWSDVVWKURXJKSRZHU
supply module LU9 GC7.
LUL C07 modules must be connected to the LU9 GC7 splitter box in order to be
powered.
8
The number of TeSys U starter-controllers that can be powered by an LU9 GC7
module is limited by the maximum current (1.5 A) which it can deliver.
The c 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately.
Description Length Item Reference Weight
3UR¿EXV'3
m
–
(1)
15 LU9 GC7
kg
– 9
power supply module
3UR¿EXV'3FRQQHFWRU – 16 LU9 AD7 –
3UR¿EXV'3FDEOHV 100 13 TSX PBSCA100 –

2-wire 400 13 TSX PBSCA400 –
c 24 V
3UR¿EXV'3FDEOHV
A1 On
L1
4-wire
10
100
17
17
LU9 RPB010
LU9 RPB100
–
– 10
power 0V
A2 base 400 17 LU9 RPB400 –
(1) See connection diagram on page 1/80.
Connection of power supplies
1/81
Compatibility 1
with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
1 1 Maximum 1
power Power
2
Standard
or
Advanced
or
Multifunction
3
3UR¿EXV
4
Pre-wired
ratings
567122
base control control control DP coil

50/60 Hz unit unit unit module connection,
400/415 V non-
reversing
Non- Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
reversing 5…30
2 2 kW
0.09 LUB 12 LUC A6XBL LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL LUC M6XBL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
or LUB 32
3 or LUB 32
3 1.5 LUB 12 LUC A05BL LUC B05BL LUC D05BL LUC M05BL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
or LUB 32
4
LUB + LUC pppBL 5.5 LUB 12 LUC A12BL LUC B12BL LUC D12BL LUC M12BL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
+ LUL C07 + LU9B N11L or LUB 32
15 LUB 32 LUC A32BL LUC B32BL LUC D32BL LUC M32BL LUL C07 LU9 BN11L
5 Note: 3UR¿EXV'3PRGXOH/8/&LVQRWFRPSDWLEOHZLWK/870FRQWUROOHUV
10
1/82
Compatibility (continued) 1
5 with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum 5 2 or or 3 6
1
567123
power Power Standard Advanced Multifunction 3UR¿EXV Pre-wired

ratings base control control control DP coil
50/60 Hz unit unit unit module connection,
400/415 V reversing
Reversing Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
2 5…30
kW
0.09 LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A6XBL LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL LUC M6XBL LUL C07 LU9 MRL 2
0.25 or LU2B 12BL LUC A1XBL LUC B1XBL LUC D1XBL LUC M1XBL LUL C07 LU9 MRL
3 LU2B 32BL
1.5 LU2B 12BL

or LU2B 32BL
LUC A05BL LUC B05BL LUC D05BL LUC M05BL LUL C07 LU9 MRL 3
6 5.5 LU2B 12BL LUC A12BL LUC B12BL LUC D12BL LUC M12BL LUL C07 LU9 MRL
or LU2B 32BL
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C07 + LU9M RL
7.5 LU2B 32BL LUC A18BL LUC B18BL LUC D18BL LUC M18BL LUL C07 LU9 MRL 4
15 LU2B 32BL LUC A32BL LUC B32BL LUC D32BL LUC M32BL LUL C07 LU9 MRL
Note: 3UR¿EXV'3PRGXOH/8/&LVQRWFRPSDWLEOHZLWK/870FRQWUROOHUV 5
10
1/83
Presentation 1
CANopen communication module and
pre-wired coil connection components
1 2 3 Presentation
Communication module LUL C08 allows direct connection of TeSys U starter-
1 controllers and controllers on a CANopen bus.
Module LUL C08 is of the slave type.
When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module
LUL C08 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
)RUORFDOFRQWUROUHTXLUHPHQWVWKHPRGXOHLVHTXLSSHGZLWKDFRQ¿JXUDEOHc 24 V.
4
2 9 9GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQ¿JXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
LUL C08 communication modules can be connected to Advantys STB module :

XBE 2100K.
8 7 6 5 Connections
3 Star topology Bus topology
1 LED indicating module status 10 12 12

2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1, OA3
and LO1
4 SUB-D connector for bus link 16 16
11 13 11
6 Discrete input
7 Discrete input 17 c 24 V 17
c 24 V 15
8 Discrete output
or
9 Outputs for starter commands 14
16 16
19
5 10 CANopen master module TSX CPP110 (PMCIA card with
junction box). 11 14 17 17
11 Cable TSX CANCpp equipped with a TSX CANKCDF90T 15
connector (to be assembled)
18
12 Terminal block TSX CANTDM4 with 4 SUB D type
connectors for connection of slaves and screw terminal
Connection of power supplies
blocks (connection of bus and dedicated 24 V supply to
modules LUL C08). The c 24 V power supply for modules LUL C08 is distributed via the bus and must
6 13 Connection between junction boxes TSX CANTDM4 by EHFRQQHFWHGWRWKH¿UVW76;&$17'0MXQFWLRQER[7KHFDEOHFVDDOORZV
cable TSX CANCADDpp or cable TSX CANCpp¿WWHGZLWK connection of up to 25 LUL C08 modules .
TSX CANKCDF90T connectors. Above this number, another power supply must be connected to the next junction
14 The slaves are connected by means of cables box.
TSX CANCADDpp
15 Connections are made by means of cables TSX CANCpp A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C08 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
¿WWHGZLWK76;&$1.&')7FRQQHFWRUVIRUWKHVODYHV
LO1.
7 and with TSX CANKCDF90T connectors for the junction
boxes. Information carried by the bus
16 Starter-controller Depends on the type of control unit used.
17 CANopen communication module LUL C08
Control unit Standard Advanced Multifunction
18 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Modules Starter status (ready, running, fault)
+ I/O modules)
19 CANopen extension module STB XBE 2100K
8 Thermal overload alarm
Remote programming and monitoring of all
functions
"Log" function
9 "Monitoring" function
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.
Compatibility of CANopen communication module with
control units
LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
10 LUCM ppBL All versions u V3.2
LUCM T1BL All versions u V3.2
(1) This “date code” is made up as follows: 2T or 2C factory code.
04,05,06 and so on: year of manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
1/84
References 1
CANopen communication module and
Communication services
Communication module LUL C08 uses PDO, SDO and PKW type objects for data
exchange (Process Data Objects, Service Data Objects, Periodically Kept in Acyclic
Words).
1
Transmit and Receive PDO
PDO 1 Real time command-control 3UHFRQ¿JXUHGDQGHQDEOHG
PDO 2, PDO 3 Unused 7REHGH¿QHGE\FRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
PDO 4 Adjustment, diagnostics and acyclic exchanges 3UHFRQ¿JXUHGDQGHQDEOHG

2
References
510922

kg
CANopen communication module 16 LUL C08 0.108
Note: The Electronic Data Sheets (EDS), and user’s manuals are available on the website
“www.schneider-electric.com”.
3

to the coil terminals
16
4
recommended.
17 Description For use with Item Reference Weight

power base kg
LUB + LUL C08 + LU9B N11L Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp
LU2B pp
17
18
LU9B N11L
LU9M RL
0.050
0.450
5
566988
b Wire link:
Allows insertion, for example, of an emergency stop control or a voltage interface.
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.
6
Cables for connection to the bus
m kg
Standard
16 Cables equipped with
SUB-D connectors
0.3 14 TSX CANCADD03 0.045 7
1.0 14 TSX CANCADD1 0.065
3 14 TSX CANCADD3 0.125
5 14 TSX CANCADD5 1.500
Reel of cable 50 11 TSX CANCA50 –
18 100 11 TSX CANCA100 –
LU2B + LUL C08 + LU9M RL UL approved

8
Cables equipped with 0.3 14 TSX CANCBDD03 0.045
SUB-D connectors 1 14 TSX CANCBDD1 0.065
3 14 TSX CANCBDD3 0.125
5 14 TSX CANCBDD5 1.500
Reel of cable 50
100
11
11
TSX CANCB50
TSX CANCB100
–
–
9
Separate components
Description Reference Weight
kg
Elbowed connector TSX CANKCDF90T –
Straight connector
Junction box
TSX CANKCDF180T
TSX CANTD M4
–
–
10
1/85
Presentation 1
DeviceNet communication module and pre-wired coil
1 2 3 Presentation
When used in conjunction with the power base and control unit, communication
1 module LUL C09 allows TeSys U starter-controllers and controllers to be controlled
567225
10 via DeviceNet.
Communication module LUL C09 is of the slave type and uses the TeSys U system’s
internal registers which can be accessed via DeviceNet.
0RGXOH/8/&KDVDFRQ¿JXUDEOH9$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZR
FRQ¿JXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
2 9 4
Connections
Serial bus topology
8 7 6 5 11
3 63 starter-controllers max.
with modules LUL C09
1 LED indicating module status
2 Fault signalling LED
3 LED indicating c 24 V supply ON for outputs OA1,
OA3 and LO1 and 24 V bus
13 13 13
4 DeviceNet connector for bus link 24 V
6 Discrete input
12 14 14 14
7 Discrete input
8 Discrete output
9 Outputs for starter-controller commands (non-
reversing and reversing)
5 10 Pin for connection to control unit (advanced or

multifunction)
11
12
Industrial PLC: Industrial Programmable Controller equipped with a DeviceNet Master.
Connection and power distribution box for supply to DeviceNet communication modules.
13 Starter-controller.
14 DeviceNet communication module LUL C09.
10
1/86
Presentation (continued), TeSys motor starters - open version 1
references 1

Depends on the type of control unit used with module LUL C09.
1
567228
Compatibility of DeviceNet LUL C09 communication module with

c 24 V control units
Information accessible LUL C09 in conjunction with:
via DeviceNet LUCA ppBL LUCB/C/D ppBL LUCM ppBL
Standard Advanced Multifunction
control unit control unit control unit
2
LUL C09 Remote programming and
monitoring of all functions
“Log” function
3
567226
Functions performed
OA3 OA1 COM
References
Can_L Can_H
kg
4
V S V+
DeviceNet communication module 14 LUL C09 0.108

By pre-wired connector or wire link. 5
24 V
24 V
24 V

LO1

LI1
LI2
+
+
recommended.
Description For use with Reference Weight
Pre-wired coil connection

power base
LUB pp LU9B N11L
kg
0.050 6
LU2B pppp LU9M RL 0.450
b Wire link:
using an LU6M reverser block.
When this reverser block and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired
7
coil connection LU9M RL may be used.
Supply
The 24 V supply to DeviceNet LUL C09 modules is provided via the (V+ , V-)
Connection of power supplies terminals.
The 24 V supply for the inputs/outputs must be provided separately from the supply 8
to the LUL C09 modules.
The 24 V Aux terminal is for supply to the LUCM control unit or the LUTM controller.
10
1/87
Compatibility 1
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

with starter-controller LUB 12 / LUB 32
1 1 Maximum 1
power Power
2
Standard
or
Advanced
or
Multifunction
3
DeviceNet
4
Pre-wired
ratings
567122
base control unit control unit control unit module coil

50/60 Hz connection,
400/415 V non-
reversing
Non- Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
reversing 5…30
2 2 kW
or LUB 32
3 or LUB 32
or LUB 32
4
LUB + LUC pppBL 5.5 LUB 12 LUC A12BL LUC B12BL LUC D12BL LUC M12BL LUL C09 LU9 BN11L
+ LUL C09 + LU9B N11L or LUB 32
15 LUB 32 LUC A32BL LUC B32BL LUC D32BL LUC M32BL LUL C09 LU9 BN11L
5 Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers.
10
1/88
Compatibility (continued) 1
Compatibility of DeviceNet communication module LUL C09

5 with starter-controller LU2B 12 / LU2B 32
Maximum 5 2 or or 3 6
1
567123
power Power Standard Advanced Multifunction DeviceNet Pre-wired

ratings base control unit control unit control unit module coil
50/60 Hz connection,
400/415 V reversing
Reversing Class 10 Class 10 Class 20 Classes
5…30
2
kW
0.09 LU2B 12BL
or LU2B 32BL
LUC A6XBL LUC B6XBL LUC D6XBL LUC M6XBL LUL C09 LU9 MRL 2
0.25 or LU2B 12BL LUC A1XBL LUC B1XBL LUC D1XBL LUC M1XBL LUL C09 LU9 MRL
3 LU2B 32BL
1.5 LU2B 12BL

or LU2B 32BL
LUC A05BL LUC B05BL LUC D05BL LUC M05BL LUL C09 LU9 MRL 3
6 5.5 LU2B 12BL LUC A12BL LUC B12BL LUC D12BL LUC M12BL LUL C09 LU9 MRL
or LU2B 32BL
LU2B + LUC pppBL
+ LUL C09 + LU9M RL
7.5 LU2B 32BL LUC A18BL LUC B18BL LUC D18BL LUC M18BL LUL C09 LU9 MRL 4
15 LU2B 32BL LUC A32BL LUC B32BL LUC D32BL LUC M32BL LUL C09 LU9 MRL
Note: DeviceNet communication module LUL C09 is compatible with LUT M controllers. 5
10
1/89
Presentation 1
Advantys STB communication module and
1 2 3 Presentation
Communication module LUL C15 allows direct connection of TeSys U starter-
1 controllers and controllers on an Advantys STB island, between two segments or at
the end of a segment. In the latter case, the segment must be equipped with an EOS
(End of segment) extension module STB XBE1100.
The starter-controller will then be able to make use of the services provided by
Advantys STB: self-addressing, autobaud, fallback positions.
When used in conjunction with an LUC pppBL or LUC pT1BL control unit, module
LUL C15 provides control and command of the starter-controller and of the controller.
2 9
4
)RUORFDOFRQWUROUHTXLUHPHQWVWKHPRGXOHLVHTXLSSHGZLWKDFRQ¿JXUDEOHc 24 V,
$GLVFUHWHRXWSXWDQGWZRFRQ¿JXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
Connections
10 11
13 14
8 7 6 5
3 1 Two-colour LED indicating module status
15
2 Fault signalling LED 12 16
3 LED indicating that c 24 V supply is ON
4 Bus connectors 13 13
5 c 24 V supply connection
4 6
7
Discrete input
Discrete input 12
14 14 + 16
17
8 Discrete output 18
9 Outputs for starter commands 13 13
14 14
5 12 17 12
10 Advantys STB island (NIM: Network Interface Module + I/O modules).

11 Extension module (EOS/End of segment) STB XBE1100.
12 Bus connecting cable LU9 RCDppHOERZHGVWUDLJKWIRUFRQQHFWLRQRIWKH¿UVW7H6\V8
communication module.
13 Starter-controller.
6 14 Communication module LUL C15.
15 Connector for connection of product either by wire link or using coil connection modules
LU9 BN11L or LU9 MRL.
16 Line end adapter LU9 RFL15.
17 Bus connection cable LU9 RDDpp, straight/straight, for connections between LUL C15 modules.
18 Beginning of segment (BOS).
Connection of power supply for the outputs

A c 24 V supply must be connected to module LUL C15 for outputs OA1, OA3 and
7 LO1.

Depends on the type of control unit used.
8 Start and Stop commands
functions
9 "Log" function
"Monitoring" function
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User's Manual.
Compatibility of Advantys STB communication module
with control units
10 LUCA ppBL / B ppBL / C ppBL / D ppBL All versions marketed after 2T04081 (1)
LUCM ppBL All versions u V3.2
LUCM T1BL All versions u V3.2
(1) This “date code” is made up as follows: 2T or 2C: factory code. 04,05,06 and so on: year of
manufacture. 08: week. 1: 1st day of the week.
1/90
References 1
Advantys STB communication module and
Possible architectures
The maximum number of starter-controllers and controllers that can be connected to
an Advantys STB island depends on the Network Interface Module (NIM) used and
the associated control units.
1
NIM Number of starter-controllers Number of controllers
(Network Interface LUCA ppBL LUCB ppBL LUCM ppBL LUCB pp
Module) LUCC ppBL LUCD pp
LUCD ppBL LUCM pp
CANopen Standard 17 17 15 15
DeviceNet
Basic
Standard
12
18
12
18
12
16
12
16
2
Basic 12 12 12 12
3UR¿EXV'3 Standard 9 8 8 8
Basic 9 8 8 8
Interbus Standard 2 2 1 1
Basic 2 2 1 1
Fipio Standard 4 4 4 4 3
Modbus plus Standard 17 17 15 15
Ethernet Standard 32 32 32 32
References
kg
Advantys STB communication module 14 LUL C15 0.108 4
Line end adapter 16 LU9 RFL15 0.012
End of segment (EOS) 11 STB XBE1100 –
Beginning of segment (BOS) 18 STB XBE1300 –

5
14
b Pre-wired connector: pre-wired coil connection.
recommended.
19 6
Description For use with Item Reference Weight
power base kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp 19 LU9B N11L 0.050
LU2B pp 20 LU9M RL 0.450
b Wire link:
7
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
may be used.
Cables
Description Length Item Reference Weight 8
m kg
14 &DEOHV¿WWHGZLWK 0.3 12 LU9 RCD03 0.045
connectors, 1 12 LU9 RCD10 0.065
one straight
and one elbowed 3 12 LU9 RCD30 0.125
5 12 LU9 RCD50 1.500
20
&DEOHV¿WWHGZLWK
two straight connectors
0.3
1
17
17
LU9 RDD03
LU9 RDD10
0.045
0.065
9
3 LU9 RDD30 0.125
Note: User manuals are available on the website “www.schneider-electric.com”.
10
1/91
Presentation 1
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
Presentation
LUL C031 LUL C033 Communication modules LUL C031 and LUL C033 enable the TeSys U starter-
1 1 1 controller to be connected to the Modbus network.
They must have a c 24 V supply and must be used in conjunction with a c 24 V
control unit, LUCp ppBL.
566970
510624
They incorporate a 0.5 A, c 24 V discrete output for local command requirements.

7KHPRGXOH/8/&DOVRKDVWZRFRQ¿JXUDEOHGLVFUHWHLQSXWV
Series type connection

2 Architecture
Star topology Bus topology
6 3 5 2 6 35 4 2
10
3 1
2
Module status signalling LED
24 V supply connection
12
3 RJ45 connector for RS485 Modbus link

4 2 discrete inputs 8 8 8 8
5 1 discrete output
7 7 7 7
6 Outputs for starter commands
4 9 9
To PLC
11 11 12
7 Communication module LUL C031 or LUL C033
8 Pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
5 9
10
Connection cable VW3 A8 306 Rpp with one RJ45 connector at each end
Modbus hub LU9 GC3 with channel connections to PLC and to starter-controller
with RJ45 connectors
11 T-junction VW3 A8 306 TFpp
12 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R

6 Depends on the type of control unit used.

Starter status
(ready, running, fault)
7 Remote reset via the bus
functions
“Log” function
8 Alarms (overcurrent, ...)
Functions performed
For more detailed information, please refer to User’s Manual LU9 CD1, see page
opposite.
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules

9 With starter-controllers and controllers
Starter-controllers and controllers LUL C031 LUL C033
LUB pp / LU2Bp2
LUT M ppBL
Possible combinations.
10
1/92
References 1
Modbus communication modules and pre-wired coil
Compatibility of Modbus communication modules (continued)

With power bases
Control unit software versions LUL C031
V2.3 (1)
LUL C033
V2.2 (1)
1
LUCA ppBL – Yes Yes
LUCB ppBL, LUCC ppBL and LUCD ppBL – Yes Yes
LUCM ppBL V1.04 Yes No
V1.05 Yes Yes
V1.06 Yes No
V1.10 (1) Yes Yes 2
With base controllers, version 1.200 (1)
Control unit software versions LUL C031 LUL C033
V2.3 (1) V2.1 (1)
LUCB TppBL and LUCD TppBL – No Yes
LUCM TppBL V2.11 (1) No Yes
(1) And higher versions
Combinations not permitted. 3
511527
References
kg
Modbus communication modules 7 LUL C031 0.080
7 LUL C033
0.080
4
coil terminals
7
The use of a power base without pre-wired control circuit connections is 5
recommended.
8
Description For use with Item Reference Weight
LUB + LUL C03p + LU9B power base kg
Pre-wired coil connection LUB pp 8 LU9B N11C 0.045
6
566967
b Wire link:
and the power base are mounted side-by-side, a pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
may be used.
Connection of communication modules on the serial bus

7
Achieved either by means of a Modbus hub or using T-junctions.
7 m kg
Modbus hub – 10 LU9 GC3 0.260
8 slaves
&DEOHV¿WWHGZLWK
2 x RJ45 connectors
0.3 9 VW3 A8 306 R03 0.045 8
1 9 VW3 A8 306 R10 0.065
3 9 VW3 A8 306 R30 0.125
13 T-junctions (1) 0.3 11 VW3 A8 306 TF03 0.032
1 11 VW3 A8 306 TF10 0.032
LU2B + LUL C03p + LU9M
RS 485 line terminator – 12 VW3 A8 306 R 0.012
9
kg
On CD-Rom Multi-language (3) LU9 CD1 0.022
(1) Fitted with 2 x RJ45 female connectors (bus side) and a 0.3 m or 1 m length cable supplied
with an RJ45 male connector (station side).
10
1/93
description, Communication gateways LUF P

setting-up 0
Presentation
Communication gateways LUF P allow connection between the Modbus serial link
1 DQG)LSLR3UR¿EXV'3RU'HYLFH1HW¿HOGEXVHV
$IWHUFRQ¿JXUDWLRQWKHVHJDWHZD\VPDQDJHLQIRUPDWLRQZKLFKFDQEHDFFHVVHGE\
the Modbus serial link and make this information available for read/write functions
FRPPDQGPRQLWRULQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQDQGDGMXVWPHQWRQWKH¿HOGEXVHV
An LUF P communication gateway consists of a box which can be clipped onto a

2 35 mm omega rail, allowing connection of up to 8 Slaves connected on the Modbus
serial link.
Example of architecture
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ
of gateway TeSys U starter-controllers
3 LUF P
by PC
4 Fipio
3UR¿EXV'3
DeviceNet
(1)
Modbus
524177
5 1 ATS 48 ATV 312
Description
Front panel of the product
6 1 LED indicating :
- communication status of the Modbus serial links,
- gateway status,
FRPPXQLFDWLRQVWDWXVRIWKH)LSLR3UR¿EXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWEXV
2 &RQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR)LSLR3UR¿EXV'3RU'HYLFH1HWEXVHV
2
Underside of product
8
561512
3 RJ45 connector for connection of the Modbus serial link

4 RJ45 connector for link to a PC
5 c 24 V power supply
3
Software set-up
9 4
For the Fipio bus, software set-up of the gateway is performed using either PL7
0LFUR-XQLRU3URVRIWZDUHRU$%&&RQ¿JXUDWRUVRIWZDUH
)RUWKH3UR¿EXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWEXVHVVRIWZDUHVHWXSLVSHUIRUPHGXVLQJ
$%&&RQ¿JXUDWRU
5 This software is included in the TeSys U user’s manual.
(1) Connection kit for PowerSuite software workshop (see page 1/74).
10
Characteristics, references: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/94
Characteristics, TeSys motor starters - open version 0
references, Communication gateways LUF P

dimensions 0
Characteristics
Bus type Fipio 3UR¿EXV'3 DeviceNet
Environment
Ambient air temperature
Conforming to IEC 60664
Around the device °C
Degree of pollution: 2
+ 5…+ 50
1
Degree of protection IP 20
Electromagnetic Emission Conforming to IEC 50081-2: 1993
compatibility Immunity Conforming to IEC 61000-6-2: 1999
Number of Modbus slaves which can be connected y8
Connection Modbus By RJ45 connector conforming to Schneider Electric RS485 standard
To a PC
Field bus
By RJ45 connector, with PowerSuite connection kit
By SUB D9 female By SUB D9 female By 5-way removable
2
connector connector screw connector
Supply V External supply, c 24 ± 10 %
Consumption Max. mA 280
Typical mA 100
Indication/diagnostics By LED on front panel
Services 3UR¿OH
Command
FED C32 or FED C32P
FRQ¿JXUDEOHZRUGV(1)
–
FRQ¿JXUDEOHZRUGV
–
FRQ¿JXUDEOHZRUGV
3
Monitoring FRQ¿JXUDEOHZRUGV(1) FRQ¿JXUDEOHZRUGV FRQ¿JXUDEOHZRUGV
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQDQGDGMXVWPHQW By gateway mini messaging facility (PKW)
References
Description For use with With bus/ Reference Weight
serial link kg 4
Communication TeSys U starter-controllers, Fipio/Modbus LUF P1 0.245
gateways Altistart 48, 3UR¿EXV'30RGEXV LUF P7 0.245
Altivar 31,
DeviceNet/Modbus LUF P9 0.245
Altivar 312
Connection accessories
Description For use with Length Connectors Reference Weight
5
822631
m kg
Connection cables Modbus 3 1 RJ45 type connector and VW3 A8 306 D30 0.150
one end with stripped wires
TSX FP ACC 12 0.3 2 RJ45 type connectors VW3 A8 306 R03 0.050
1 2 RJ45 type connectors VW3 A8 306 R10 0.050
822713
3 2 RJ45 type connectors VW3 A8 306 R30 0.150

Connectors Fipio – 1 SUB-D 9 male connector TSX FP ACC12 0.040
3UR¿EXVPLGOLQH – 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 490 NAD 911 04 –

6
490 NAD 911 03 3UR¿EXVOLQHHQG – 1 SUB-D 9 male connector 490 NAD 911 03 –
Documentation
Description Medium Language Reference Weight
kg
User’s manual for
TeSys U range (2)
CD-Rom Multilingual: English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish
LU9 CD1 0.022
7
Dimensions
8
=
120
9
=
75 27
,IWKHJDWHZD\LVFRQ¿JXUHGXVLQJ3/DQGQRW$%&&RQ¿JXUDWRUWKH,2FDSDFLW\LVOLPLWHG
to a total of 26 words.
(2) This CD-Rom contains user’s manuals for AS-Interface and Modbus communication modules,
multifunction control units and gateways, as well as for the gateway programming software,
10
$%&&RQ¿JXUDWRU
Presentation, description: Setting-up: Schemes:

1/95
Characteristics 1
Environment
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV UL, CSA, CCC, GOST, ASEFA.
1 ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LROS.
ATEX.
Conforming to standards IEC/EN 60947-6-2, CSA C22-2 N°14, Type E
UL 508 type E: with phase barrier LU9 SP0
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V 690
overvoltage category III,
degree of pollution: 3
Conforming to UL508, V 600
2 Rated impulse
CSA C22-2 n°14
Conforming to kV 6
withstand voltage (Uimp) IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Safety separation of circuits Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
SELV appendix N Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 400
Degree of protection Front panel outside connection IP 40

3 Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against Front panel and wired terminals IP 20
GLUHFW¿QJHUFRQWDFW
Other faces IP 20
Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 ³7+´

Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Cycles 12
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h 48
4 Ambient air temperature

around the device
Storage
Operation
°C
°C
- 40…+ 85
Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25… + 70.
(At temperatures above 60°C and up to 70°C, for starter-controller LUB32, leave a
minimum gap of 9 mm between products).
Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25…+ 60.
(At temperatures above 45 °C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 °C and up to 60 °C, leave a gap of 20 mm between
products.)
5 Maximum operating altitude m 2000
Operating positions In relation to normal vertical 30˚

mounting plane
90˚ 90˚
6
30˚
Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 V2
Conforming to °C 960 (parts supporting live components)
IEC/EN 60695-2-12 °C 650
7 Environmental restrictions Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 Power poles open: 10 gn
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms (1) Power poles closed: 15 gn
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Power poles open: 2 gn

5…300 Hz (1) Power poles closed: 4 gn (2)
8 Resistance to
electrostatic discharge
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV
kV
In open air: 8 - Level 3
On contact: 8 - Level 4
Immunity to radiated high- Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m 10 - Level 3
frequency disturbance
Immunity to fast Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4
transient currents kV Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to dissipated Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-6-2 Common mode Serial mode
9 shock waves Uc a 24…240 V,
Uc c 48…220 V
kV 2 1
Uc = 24 V c Not applicable
Immunity to conducted Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V 10
high-frequency disturbance
Radiated emission Conforming to CISPR 11 and Class A
and conducted EN 55011
10 (1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
References : Dimensions : Schemes :

1/96
Characteristics 1
Power bases and control units
Power base, control unit or reverser block type LUB 12 + LUCA LUB 32 + LUCA LUB 12 + LUB 32 + LU2M
or LUCB or LUCC or LUCB or LUCC LUCM LUCM LU6M
or LUCD or LUCD
Power circuit connection characteristics 1
Connection to Ø 4 mm screw clamp terminals
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10 2.5…10
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…6 1.5…6
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6
with cable end 2 conductors mm2 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6 1…6
Solid cable
without cable end
1 conductor
2 conductors
mm2
mm2
1…10
1…6
1…10
1…6
1…10
1…6
1…10
1…6
1…10
1…6
2
Screwdriver 3KLOLSVQRUÀDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
Tightening torque N.m 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5
Control circuit connection characteristics
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 3
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5
with cable end 2 conductors mm2 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
Tightening torque
Control circuit characteristics
N.m 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2
4
Rated voltage a 50/60 Hz V 24…240 24…240 – – –
of control circuit c V 24…220 24…220 24 24 –
Voltage limits c 24 V (1) V 20…27 20…27 20…28 20…28 –
Operation a 24 V V 20…26.5 20…26.5 – – –
a or c 48…72 V V a 38.5…72. c 38.5…93 – – –
a 110…240 V
c 110…220 V
V
V
a 88…264
c 88…242
a 88…264
c 88…242
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
Drop-out c 24 V V 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 –
a 24 V V 14.5 14.5 – – –
a or c 48…72 V V 29 29 – – –
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V V 55 55 – – –
Typical consumption c 24 V mA 130 220 150 200 120
I max while closing a 24 V mA 140 220 – – 2360 6
a or c 48…72 V mA 280 280 – – 2300
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V mA 280 280 – – 1000
I rms sealed c 24 V mA 60 80 70 75 120
a 24 V mA 70 90 – – (2)
a or c 48…72 V mA 35 45 – – (2)
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V
Heat dissipation
mA
W
35
2
25
3
–
1.7
–
1.8
(2)
– 7
Operating time Closing ms 99u 72 V: 50 75 65 –
Opening ms 35 35 35 35 –
Resistance to micro-breaks ms 3 3 3 3 –
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms –
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 15 15 15 15 –
Maximum operating rate
Main pole characteristics
In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600 3600 3600 –
8
Number of poles 3 3 3 3 –
Isolation Possible Yes Yes Yes Yes –
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN –
Rated thermal current A 12 32 12 32 –
Rated operational current To IEC/ Category AC-41 T y 70°C: 12A T y 70°C: 32A T y 55°C: 12A T y 55°C: 32A –
(Ue y 440V) EN 60947-6-2 Category AC-43 T y 70°C: 12A T y 70°C: 32A T y 55°C: 12A T y 55°C: 32A – 9
Rated operational voltage V 690 (3) 690 (3) 690 (3) 690 (3) –
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 40…60 40…60 40…60 40…60 –
Power dissipated Operational current A 3 6 9 12 18 25 32 –
in the power circuits Power dissipated in all three poles W 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5 –
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit V 230 440 500 690 –

kA 50 50 10 4 – 10
Total breaking time ms 2 2 2 –
Thermal limit With Isc max on 440 V kA²s 90 120 90 120 –
(1) Voltage with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
(2) No consumption sealed. (3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9 SP0.
1/97
Characteristics 1
Reversing power bases and auxiliary contacts
6SHFL¿FFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRISRZHUEDVHV/8%DQGUHYHUVHUEORFNV/80RU/80
Duration of inrush phase a 50/60 Hz ms 25
1 Maximum Without change of direction
c ms
ms
15
75
operating time With change of direction ms 150
General characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Conventional For ambient temperatureT< 70 °C A 5
thermal current (Ith)
Frequency of the operational current Hz Up to 400
2 Minimum switching capacityO = 10-8 U min V 17
I min mA 5
Short-circuit Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 A gG fuse: 4
protection
Short-time rating Permissible for 1s A 30
500 ms A 40
100 ms A 50
3 Insulation resistance m: 10
Non-overlap time Guaranteed between ms 2 (on energisation and on de-energisation)
N/C and N/O contacts
6SHFL¿FFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWVEXLOWLQWRWKHSRZHUEDVH
Linked contacts Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Each power base has 1 N/O contact and 1 N/C contact which are mechanically linked
Mirror contact Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 7KH1&FRQWDFW¿WWHGLQHDFKSRZHUEDVHUHOLDEO\UHSUHVHQWVWKHVWDWHRIWKHSRZHU
contacts (safety scheme)
4 Rated operational voltage (Ue) V Up to ac 250
Rated insulation Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 V 690
voltage (Ui) Conforming to UL, CSA V 600
6SHFL¿FFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWVLQPRGXOHV/8)1RIDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWV/8$
and of reverser blocks LU2M and LU6M
Rated operational voltage (Ue) V Up to ac 250
5 Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)
Conforming to IEC/EN60947-5-1
Conforming to UL, CSA
V
V
250
250
Rated operational power of contacts

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
a.c. supply, categories AC-14 and AC-15 d.c. supply, category DC-13
6 Electrical durability (valid for up to 3600 operating cycles/hour) on an

inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos M 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos M= 0.4)
Electrical durability (valid for up to 1200 operating cycles/hour) on an inductive load
such as the coil of an electromagnet, without economy resistor, the time constant
increasing with the load.
V 24 48 115 230 400 440 600 V 24 48 125 250

1 million VA 60 120 280 560 960 1050 1440 W 120 90 75 68
operating cycles
3 million VA 16 32 80 160 280 300 420 W 70 50 38 33
7 operating cycles
10 million VA 4 8 20 40 70 80 100 W 25 18 14 12
operating cycles
10 10
8 8
7 7 24 V
Millions of operating cycles
6 6
5 5 48 V
8 4
3
4
3
125 V
2 2 250 V
1 1
0,8 0,8
0,7 0,7
0,6 0,6
9 0,5
0,4
0,3
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10
0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9 0,5 0,7 0,9 5 7 9
10 Current broken in A Current broken in A

pages 1/63 and 1/64 pages 1/110 and 1/111 pages 1/112 to 1/119
1/98
Characteristics 1
Control units
Characteristics of standard control units LUCA

Protection Motor type 3-phase
Overload
Conforming to standard
Tripping class conforming to
IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14
10
1
protection UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz 40…60
Temperature compensation °C - 25…+ 70
Protection against phase imbalance Yes
Short-circuit Tripping threshold 14.2 x Ir (setting current)
protection Tripping tolerance ± 20 % 2
Characteristics of advanced control units LUCB, LUCC and LUCD
Control unit type LUCB LUCC LUCD
Protection Motor type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase
Conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508,
CSA C22-2 n°14 CSA C22-2 n°14 CSA C22-2 n°14
Overload
protection
Tripping class conforming to
UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
10 10 20 3
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz 40…60 40…60 40…60
Temperature compensation °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 55 - 25…+ 70
Protection against phase imbalance Yes – Yes
Short-circuit Tripping threshold 14.2 x Ir max. 14.2 x Ir max. 14.2 x Ir max.
protection Tripping tolerance ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 %
Characteristics of multifunction control units LUCM

4
Protection Motor type Parameters can be set: single-phase or 3-phase
Conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-6-2, UL 508
Overload Tripping class conforming to 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 (selectable)
protection UL 508, IEC/EN 60947-6-2
Frequency limits of the operational current Hz 50…60
Communication
Temperature compensation
Physical interface
°C - 25…+ 55
RS 485 multi-drop
5
interface for Connections RJ45 on front panel
terminal on
Protocol Modbus RTU
enclosure door
Maximum transmission speed bit/s VHOIFRQ¿JXUDWLRQXSWRWKLVYDOXH
Maximum return time ms 200
Display Type LCD, 2 lines of 12 characters
Language version Multilanguage (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish) 6
Precision ±5%
Resolution 1 % of Ir
Auxiliary supply External type V c 24, with maximum ripple of ± 10 %.
Heat dissipation W 0.8
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQWDEOHIRUSURWHFWLRQGHYLFHVDQGDODUPVRQPXOWLIXQFWLRQFRQWUROXQLWV/8&0
Tripping Alarm Adjustment of tripping Adjustment of time before Adjustment of alarm
7
threshold tripping threshold
Factory setting Factory setting Range Default value Range Default value Range Default value
Overcurrent Activated (1) – 3…17 Ir 14.2 – – – –

Overload Activated (1) Activated 0.5…32 A (2) Ir min Class: 5…30 5 10…100 % of 85 %
the thermal state
Earth fault Activated Activated 0.2…5 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 0.1…1.2 s 0.1 s 0.2…5 Ir min 0.3 Ir min 8
Phase imbalance Activated Activated 10…30 % 10 % 0.2…20 s 5s 10…30 % 10 %
Torque limitation Deactivated Deactivated 1…8 Ir 2 Ir 1…30 s 5s 1…8 Ir 2 Ir
No-load running Deactivated Deactivated 0.3…1 Ir 0.5 Ir 1…200 s 10 s 0.3…1 Ir 0.5 Ir
Long starting time Deactivated Deactivated 1…8 Ir Ir 1…200 s 10 s 1…8 Ir Ir
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQRIDGGLWLRQDOIXQFWLRQVRQPXOWLIXQFWLRQFRQWUROXQLWV/8&0
Reset
Factory setting
Manual
Setting range
Manual, automatic or remote
9
Time before reset 120 s 1…1000 s
Type of load 3-phase motor 3-phase motor, single-phase motor
Self-cooled Self-cooled, force cooled
Language English English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
Display Average current Average current, thermal state of motor, current in phase 1 / 2 / 3, earth leakage current, phase imbalance, cause of
last 5 faults
(1) This function cannot be deactivated.
10
(2) The setting range depends on the rating of the control unit used.

1/99
Characteristics 1
Limiter-disconnector, current limiter, thermal overload
alarm function module and thermal overload fault
signalling modules
Characteristics of limiter-disconnector LUA LB1

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 690
1 conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Conventional thermal current (Ith) A 32
conforming to standard IEC/EN 60947-1
Operating threshold I rms kA 50
Breaking capacity V 440 690
kA 130 70
Mounting Directly on the upstream terminals of the starter-controller
2 Cabling
Solid cable 1 conductor mm2 1.5…10
2 conductors mm2 1.5...6
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm2 1…10
2 conductors mm2 1…6
Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor mm2 1...6
3 Screwdriver
2 conductors mm2 1...6
3KLOOLSVQRUÀDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
Tightening torque N.m 1.9…2.5
Characteristics of current limiter LA9 LB920

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 690
4 Conventional thermal current (Ith)

A 63
Operating threshold I rms A 1000

Breaking capacity V 440 690
kA 100 35
Mounting Separate
Cabling
5 Solid cable 1 conductor

2 conductors
mm2
mm2
1.5…25
1.5...10
Flexible cable without cable end 1 conductor mm2 1.5…25
2 conductors mm2 2.5…10
Flexible cable with cable end 1 conductor mm2 1.5…16
2 conductors mm2 1.5…4
Screwdriver 3KLOOLSVQRUÀDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
6 Tightening torque N.m 2.2
Characteristics of thermal overload alarm function modules LUF W10

Activation threshold Fixed at 88% of the thermal tripping state
Hysteresis between activation and switching off 5%
Display By LED on front panel
Supply Powered by the control unit
7 Discrete output characteristics Type N/O contact
AC-15 9PD[9$RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
DC-13 9:RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient A 2
temperatureT< 70 °C
Short-circuit protection Conforming to A gG fuse: 2
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
8 Characteristics of thermal overload fault signalling and reset modules
Module type LUF DH11 LUF DA01 LUF DA10
Fault signalling By LED on front panel
External power supply V a/c 24… 240
Module consumption mA 7 at c 24
1.1 at a 240
Discrete outputs Type 1 N/C+ 1 N/O 1 N/C 1 N/O
9 AC-15 9PD[9$RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
DC-13 9:RSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
Conventional thermal current (Ith) For ambient A 2

temperatureT< 70 °C
Short-circuit protection Conforming to A gG fuse: 2
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
10 Reset input Conductor c.s.a.
Length
mm2
m
0.2 min
500 (R = 50 : , L = 52.8 mH, Cp = 93 pF)

1/100
Characteristics 1
Function modules and communication modules
Characteristics of motor load indication function module LUF V2

Analogue output 4 - 20 mA
Signal delivered Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 2 for LUCB and LUCD
Value of I average/Ir ratio within the range of 0 to 3 for LUCC
1
Load impedance Minimum k: –
Maximum : 500
Typical : 100
Signal characteristics Precision ±6%
with advanced control unit
Signal characteristics
with multifunction control unit
Precision
Resolution
± 10 %
1 % of Ir
2
Supply External c 24 V
Characteristics of AS-Interface communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51

Module type ASILUF C5 ASILUF C51
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQ AS-Interface V2.1 n° 52901 AS-Interface V2.1 n° 52303
$6,QWHUIDFHSUR¿OH 7.D.F.0 7.A.7.E 3
Ambient air temperature °C Operation - 25…+ 70
Cycle time ms 5 10
Addressing 31 slaves 62 slaves
AS-Interface supply V 29.5...31.5
Current consumption On the mA Normal operation: 25
AS-Interface bus mA Fault condition: 30
On 24 V supply mA 200 4
for the outputs
Auxiliary supply V c 24 ± 30 %
Number of outputs 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation
Switching capacity of the solid state outputs 0.5 A/24 V (outputs protected against short-circuits)
Indication/diagnostics By 2 LEDs on front panel
Characteristics of Modbus communication module LUL C03p 5

Module type LUL C031 LUL C033
Physical interface RS 485 multi-drop
Connections RJ45 on front panel
Protocol Modbus RTU
Maximum transmission speed bit/s VHOIFRQ¿JXUDWLRQXSWRWKLVYDOXH
Maximum return time
Addressing
ms 30
By switches: from 0...31
6
Discrete inputs Number – WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
Supply V – c 24
Input current mA – 7
Nominal input values Voltage V c 24 (positive logic)
Response time
Current
Change to state 1
mA
ms
7
10 (± 30 %)
7
Change to state 0 ms 10 (± 30 %)
Input type Resistive
Solid state Number 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation

outputs Supply V c 24
Protection
Max. current
gI fuse
mA
A
500
1
8
Switching capacity 0.5 A/24 V
Indication/diagnostics By 3 LEDs on front panel
10
1/101
Characteristics (continued) 0
&KDUDFWHULVWLFVRI&$1RSHQ3UR¿EXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV
Communication module 3UR¿EXV'3 CANopen DeviceNet
1 Services Conformity class
LUL C07
NA
LUL C08
S 20 (Schneider Electric)
LUL C09
NA
Standard 3UR¿EXV'3 CIADS-301 V4.02 IEC 62026-1,
DR 303-2 overvoltage category III,
3UR¿OH LVSG V1.0 – ODVA (Open DeviceNet
MS (Motor Starter) and Vendor Association)
MMS (Motor Management MS (Motor Starter)
2 Protocol
Starter)
3UR¿EXV'3 CAN 2.0A (2B passive) CAN 2.0A (2B passive)
Address 1…125 0…127 (by switches) 0…63
Structure Physical interface 9-way SUB-D male 9-way SUB-D female ³2SHQ6W\OH´FRQQHFWRU
Binary rate 9600 Kbits/s…12 Mbits/s 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500 125…500 kbaud
and 1000 Kbits/s
3 Cables 2 shielded twisted pairs

(by switches)
Supply for the c 24 V V 20…28

discrete outputs Current consumption A 1.5 (max)
and control
Protection by gl fuse A 2
Ambient air temperature °C Operation -25…+55

4 Logic inputs Number WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
Supply V c 24
Input current mA 7
Current mA 7
Response time Change to state 1 ms 10 (± 30%)
5 Change to state 0 ms 10 (± 30%)
Input type Resistive
Discrete outputs Number 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation

Max. current mA 500
Short-circuit protection Yes
Switching capacity 0.5 A / c 24 V
6 Indication/diagnostics By 3 LEDs on front panel
Characteristics of Advantys STB communication module LUL C15

Physical interface CAN
Connections Fire Wire
Protocol CAN 2.0 and CAN 2.B (passive mode)
7 Transmission speed kbit/s 800
Addressing Self-addressing
Supply for the c 24 V V 20…28
discrete outputs Current consumption A 1.5 (max)
and control
Protection by gl fuse A 2
8 Discrete inputs Number WREHDVVLJQHGDFFRUGLQJWRFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ

Supply V c 24
Input current mA 7
Current mA 7
Response time Change to state 1 ms 10 (± 30 %)
9 Input type
Change to state 0 ms 10 (± 30 %)
Resistive
Discrete outputs Number 3, of which 2 dedicated to starter-controller coil operation

Max. current mA 500
Short-circuit protection Yes
Switching capacity 0.5 A / c 24 V
10 Indication/diagnostics By 3 LEDs on front panel
1/102
Characteristics(continued) 0
Connection characteristics
Module type LUF W10, LUF V2 ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
LUF DH11,
LUF DA01 and Inputs and 24 V Outputs
1
LUF DA10 auxiliary supply
Connectors Pitch 5.08 3.81 5.08 3.81
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm² 0.2…1.5 0.14…1 0.2…1.5 0.14…1

without cable end
2 identical conductors mm² 0.2…1 0.14…0.75 0.2…1 0.14…0.75
Flexible cable Without 1 conductor mm² 0.25…1.5 0.25…1 0.25…1.5 0.25…1

2
with cable end insulated
ferrule 2 identical conductors mm² 0.25…1 0.25…0.34 0.25…1 0.25…0.34
With 1 conductor mm² 0.25…1.5 0.25…0.5 0.25…1.5 0.25…0.5

insulated
ferrule 2 identical conductors
(Use a double cable end)
mm² 0.5…1 0.5 0.5…1 0.5
3
Solid cable 1 conductor mm² 0.2…1.5 0.14…1 0.2…1.5 0.14…1
without cable end
2 identical conductors mm² 0.2…1 0.14…0.5 0.2…1 0.14…0.5
Conductor size 1 conductor AWG 24… AWG 16 AWG 26… AWG 16 AWG 24… AWG 16 AWG 26… AWG 16
Tightening torque N.m 0.5…0.6 0.20…0.25 0.5…0.6 0.20…0.25

4
Flat screwdriver mm 3.5 2.5 3.5 2.5
Module type LUL C031, LUFC 00 LUL C09

LUL C033,
LUL C08 and
LUL C15
Inputs and 24 V
auxiliary supply
Connection
on the bus 5
Connectors Pitch 3.81 3.81 3.81 5 (Open Style)
DeviceNet
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm² 0.14…1 0.14…1 0.14…1 0.2…2.5
without cable end
2 identical conductors mm² 0.14…0.75 0.14…0.75 0.14…0.75 0.5…1.5
Flexible cable Without

with cable end insulated
1 conductor mm² 0.25…1 0.25…1 0.25…1 0.25…2.5 6
ferrule 2 identical conductors mm² 0.25…0.34 0.25…0.34 0.25…0.34 0.25…1
With 1 conductor mm² 0.25…0.5 0.25…0.5 0.25…0.5 0.25…2.5

insulated
ferrule 2 identical conductors mm² 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.5…1.5
(Use a double cable end)
7
Solid cable 1 conductor mm² 0.14…1 0.14…1 0.14…1 0.2…2.5
without cable end
2 identical conductors mm² 0.14…0.5 0.14…0.5 0.14…0.5 0.14…0.5
Conductor size 1 conductor AWG 26… AWG 16 AWG 26… AWG 16 AWG 26… AWG 16 AWG 24… AWG 16
Tightening torque N.m 0.20…0.25 0.20…0.25 0.20…0.25 0.5…0.6

8
Flat screwdriver mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.5
10
1/103
Curves TeSys motor starters - open version 0
Tripping curves for control units LUCA, LUCB, LUCD

Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %.
1
Time (s)
1000
1
100
2 2
3
10
3
1
4
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30
x the setting current (Ir)
1 LUCD, 3 poles from cold state, class 20.

2 LUCA, LUCB, 3 poles from cold state, class 10.
3 LUCA, LUCB, LUCD, 3 poles from hot state.
5
Tripping curves for control units LUCC
Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %.
Time (s)
1000
6
1
100
7 2
10
8 1
0,1
9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 20 30
1 LUCC, single-phase, cold state.

2 LUCC, single-phase, hot state.
10
References :
page 1/69
1/104
Curves (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version 0
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Cold state curves
Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %. 1
10000
Time (s)
1000
2
100
3
10
Class 30
Class 25
4
Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
1 Class 5
5
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 30
11 13 15 17 19
10
References :
page 1/70
1/105
Tripping curves for control units LUCM

Hot state curves
1 Average operating times at 20 °C according to multiples of the setting current, tolerance : ± 20 %
10000
Time (s)
2 1000
100
3
10
4
Class 30
Class 25
1 Class 20
Class 15
Class 10
Class 5
5
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 30
11 13 15 17 19
10
References :
page 1/70
1/106
Current limitation on short-circuit

Ue = 460 V
100
1
peak current (kA)
10 2
2
3
1
3
4
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA)
1 Maximum peak current

2 32 A power base
3 12 A power base
5
Thermal limit on short-circuit
Ue = 460 V
Sum of I²dt (A²s) 103
1000
1
100
2 7
10
1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100
Prospective Isc (kA) 9
1 32 A power base
2 12 A power base
10
References :
page 1/62
1/107
Selection 1
Use in category AC-41
1 LUB 12
LUB 32
10
8
6
5
4
2 3
1
0,8
3 0,6
0,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40
Current broken in A

Ue y 440 V Ue = 690 V
4
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 12
LUB 32
10
10
8 8
6 6
5 5
4
5
4
3 3
2 2
6 1
0,8
1
0,8
0,6 0,6
0,5 0,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 32 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 21 32 40
Current broken in A Current broken in A
7
0,75
0,55
2,2
5,5
7,5
1,5
kW
230 V
0,55
0,75
7,5
1,5
2,2
5,5
15
11
4
kW
400 V
0,75
0,55
2,2
5,5
7,5
1,5
11
15
4
8 440 V
kW
10
References:
page 1/62
1/108
Selection 1

Ue y 440 V Ue = 690 V
1
LUB 12
LUB 32
LUB 12
LUB 32
1 1

0,8 0,8
0,6 0,6
0,5 0,5
0,4 0,4
0,3 0,3
2
0,2 0,2
0,1 0,1
0,08 0,08
0,06 0,06
0,05 0,05
0,04
0,03
0,04
0,03
3
0,02 0,02
0,01 0,01
1 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 66 100 200 1 2 3 5 10 20 30 50 60 100 200
40 60 80 170 40 54 80 126
Current broken in A Current broken in A
4
10
References:
page 1/62
1/109
Dimensions TeSys motor starters - open version
Dimensions
Starter-controllers
1 LUB: non-reversing LU2B: reversing
Rail mounting 6FUHZ¿[LQJ Rail mounting 6FUHZ¿[LQJ
126 126 30 (2) 29 (2)
X1
X2
73
163…167
2
154
233…237
120/125
224
X1
a (1) 45 X2 135 (1)
a
3 With Modbus module 135
45
:LWK$GYDQW\V67%&$1RSHQ3UR¿EXV'3 147
or DeviceNet modules
Minimum electrical clearance:
X1 = 50 mm for Ue = 440 V and 70 mm for Ue = 500 and 690 V, X2 = 0
Reverser block for mounting separately from power base
4 Rail mounting 6FUHZ¿[LQJ

104
115
113 45 113 36 Ø4
5 Sets of busbars and plug-in power sockets
GV2 G445 and GV2 G454 GV2 Gppp with terminal block GV1 G09 GV2 G245 and G254
a
l p l
18
GV1 G09
6
38
95
I
GV2 G245 (2 x 45) 89
GV2 G254 (2 x 54) 98
7 GV2 G445 (2 x 45)

I
179
P
45
GV2 G554
260
GV2 G345 et G354
l
GV2 G454 (2 x 54) 206 54
a
Number of tap-offs 5 6 7 8 I
8 GV2 G445 (2 x 45)

GV2 G454 (2 x 54)
224
260
269
314
314
368
359
422
GV2 G345 (2 x 45)
GV2 G354 (2 x 54)
134
152
AK5 JB144 AK5 PC13, PC33, PC33L

45,5
82
9 38 35,5
30
79
81
45
10
438
452
(1) Depth with communication module.

(2) 5HWUDFWDEOH¿[LQJOXJV.
1/110
Dimensions (continued), TeSys motor starters - open version
mounting TeSys U starter-controllers
Dimensions, mounting
Limiter-disconnector LUA LB1 Current limiter LA9 LB920
Disconnector LUA LB10 1
93
0
146
103
115
154
6 51
a (1) 45
53,5
a 3
With Modbus module 135
With Advantys STB, 147
&$1RSHQ3UR¿EXV'3RU
DeviceNet modules
Door interlock mechanisms

LU9 AP20 LU9 AP00 4
Door cut-out
45 55
= =
54
230
230
= =
162
162
54
171…230 11,5 8 508 11,5 8

6
Addressing consoles
XZ MC11 ASI TERV2
7
209
195
80 30 84 35
8
Splitter boxes
LU9 GC3 (Modbus) LU9 G02 and LU9 G03 /8*&3UR¿EXV'3
Rail mounting 6FUHZ¿[LQJ Rail mounting 6FUHZ¿[LQJ
Ø4 (2) Ø4 (2)
9
163…167
163…167
154
170
128 45 128 30
65 45 65 30
10
(1) Depth with communication module.
(2) 5HWUDFWDEOH¿[LQJOXJV.
1/111
Schemes TeSys motor starters - open version
Starter-controllers, 12 or 32 A
With standard, advanced or multifunction control unit
1 Non-reversing Non-reversing
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
Control Unit 22/NC Control Unit

2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A1
A2
Pre-wired
With control unit LUCC or LUCM

3 Connection of a single-phase motor
1 L1
5 L2
Reverser
3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
81
84
82
4 Control terminal block
13/NO
14/NO
21/NC
22/NC
Control Unit
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller

U 2
V 6
A1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
5 M
Reverser blocks
LU2M LU6M
Control terminal blocks
S1
6
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
LU6M Reverser Block

A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Reverser
With pre-wired connector LU9 MRC
S1
S2
S3
7 LU6M Reverser Block

2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LU9M RC
81
84
82
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Pre-wired coil
Control terminal block Basic scheme

A2
21
13
8
A1
Reverser Motor Controller

22
LU2M
14
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
LU6M
S2
S1
S3
(1) S1 Start next stage

S2 Electrical interlocking
B3 Reverse
A3 Reverse
B1 Forward
A1 Forward
S3 Maintaining contact
B1 Maintain forward running
9 B3 Maintain reverse running
A1 Pulse forward running
A2
A2 Common
A3 Pulse reverse running
(1) Electronically operated
bistable electromagnet.
Add-on contact blocks Add-on contact modules

10 LUA1 C11
17/NO 18/NO
LUA1 C20
17/NO 18/NO
LUA8 E20 LUFN 20
33/NO 34/NO
LUFN 11
43/NO 44/NO
LUFN 02
31/NC 32/NC
57
67
I O
95/NC 96/NC 97/NO 98/NO 43/NO 44/NO 31/NC 32/NC 41/NC 42/NC
58
68
1/112
Schemes (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Control units
Standard control units LUCA Advanced control units LUCB, LUCC, LUCD
Basic scheme Basic schemehd 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
LUCA LUCp
Power Base Power Base
Sensor Interface Sensor Interface
L1 L1
Sensor
L2
Control
A.S.I.C. tr
Sensor
L2
Control
A.S.I.C. tr
2
Sensor Sensor
L3 L3
Supply and Supply and Therm. overload
Thermal memory
Detection of Detection of
overload
start start
sequence
memory
sequence Test
3
Interface module
A1
A2
A1
A2
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips 1 and 2 Trips

3 and 4 Electromagnet
5 Power base rating
5 Power base rating 4
6 N/C 6 N/C
7 Earth
8 Thermal status/Set
9 Reset mode/Reset
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Vc2
12 Vc1
Multifunction control units LUCM 5
Control terminal block
LUCM Multifunction Control Unit
6
+5V
D(A)
D(B)
0V
24 V Aux
4 5 7
6 8
Basic scheme
1 2 3 4 5 6
Sensor
Power Base
Interface Display and
LUCM
7
L1 Parameter Entry
Sensor ESC ENT

Control
L2 A.S.I.C.
D(B)
Sensor 4
L3
Supply and
RS485
D(A)
+5V
0V
5
7
RJ45 8
Thermal 8
detection of overload
start memory
sequence
Supply
24 V Aux
Interface module
9
A1
A2
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 and 2 Trips
5 Power base rating
6 N/C
7 Earth
8 N/C 10
9 Earth
10 (lm/Ir)
11 Rx/Tx
12 Vc1
1/113
Function modules
Alarm Indication of motor load
1 LUF W10 LUF V2
4-20 mA output
LUFW 10 Alarms Module LUFV 2 Analogue output Module
4...20 mA 24 V Aux 24 V Aux

2
07
08
NC
Basic scheme Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit
3 LUFW 10 LUFV 2
Input interface LED Supply Input interface Supply
μP - Analogue/Digital
converter
Isolation
4 Relais bistable
Digital/Analogue
converter
07
08
Voltage/Current converter
4...20 mA
5
100 : < load < 500 : c 30 V max and 40 mA min
Communication modules
Communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
6
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module
AS-i AS-i
Com
OA1
OA3
LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil
7 With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module
AS-i
8 LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil
Basic scheme
ASILUF C5
or
ASILUF C51
9 DEL
Ready-Fault-Pole
10 Output interface
A2SI
Com
AS-i
OA1
OA3
1/114
Communication modules (continued)

Modbus communication module LUL C031 Modbus communication module LUL C033
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection 1
LUL C031 Modbus Module LUL C033 Modbus Module
24 V 24 V
D(A)
D(B)
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux
0V
c
0V
Com
Aux COM
OA1
OA3
LO1
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
LO1
LI1
LI2
4 5 8
6
4 5 8
6
2
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C
LUL C031 Modbus Module LUL C033 Modbus Module 3

24 V 24 V
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux c
0V
0V
Aux COM
Com
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LU9B N11C LU9B N11C
Pre-wired coil 4 5 8
6 Pre-wired coil 4 5 8
6
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC 4

24 V 24 V
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux
c
0V
0V
Aux COM
Com
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LU9M RC
LU9M RC
5
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller
x6
Input interface
LUL C031
Control unit interface Controller
LUL C033 6
interface
LED Address Ready-Fault-Pole LED Address Ready-Fault-Pole
D(B) D(B)
4 4
D(A) D(A)
RS485 5 Modbus RS485 5 Modbus
0V
8
RJ45 0V
8
RJ45
7
AL1 AL1
Supply Supply
Output interface AL2 Output interface I/O interface AL2
24 V 24 V
c
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
24 V 24 V Aux Aux COM

LI1
LI2
10
1/115

3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH/8/& CANopen communication module LUL C08
1 Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
LUL C07 3UR¿EXV'30RGXOH LUL C08 Canopen Module
Bus Bus
Com
Com
OA3
OA1
OA3
OA1
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
2
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
LUL C07 3UR¿EXV'30RGXOH LUL C08 Canopen Module
3 Bus Bus
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
LU9B N11L LU9B N11L
Pre-wired coil Pre-wired coil
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
4 LUL C07 3UR¿EXV'30RGXOH
Bus
LUL C08 Canopen Module
Bus
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
LU9M RL LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil Pre-wired coil

Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller
5 x6 x6
LUL C07 LUL C08
Control unit interface Controller Control unit interface Controller
interface interface
LED Address Ready-Fault-Pole LED Address Ready-Fault-Pole
6
AL1 AL1
Supply Supply
I/O interface AL2 I/O interface AL2
Com
Com
OA3
OA1
OA3
OA1
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
7
DeviceNet communication module LUL C09
Without pre-wired coil connection Basic scheme
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller

x6
LUL C09 DeviceNet Module
8 Bus
Control unit interface Controller
LUL C09
Com
OA3
OA1
LO1
LI1
LI2
interface
LED Address Ready-Fault-Pole
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
9 LUL C09 DeviceNet Module

Bus AL1
Supply
LO1
LI1
LI2
LU9B N11L I/O interface AL2

Pre-wired coil
24 V c
Com
OA3
OA1
LO1
LI1
LI2
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RL
10 DeviceNet Module
LUL C09
Bus
LO1
LI1
LI2
LU9M RL
Pre-wired coil
1/116

Advantys STB communication module LUL C15 Parallel wiring modules
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection 1
LUL C15 Advantys STB Module LUF C00 Parallel bus Module
Bus
Com
OA1
OA3
Com
OA3
OA1
LO1
LI1
LI2
Link // RJ45
In Out 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11LC
LUL C15 Advantys STB Module LUF C00 Parallel bus Module
Bus
3
LO1
Link // RJ45
LI1
LI2
LU9B N11L LU9B N11C

Pre-wired coil In Out Pre-wired coil 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
LUL C15 Advantys STB Module

Bus
LUF C00 Parallel bus Module
4
LO1
Link // RJ45
LI1
LI2
LU9M RL LU9M RC
Pre-wired coil In Out Pre-wired coil 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Advanced Control Unit or Multifunction Control Unit Controller LUF C00
x6 Ready
5
LUL C15 Fault
Control unit interface Pole
Controller
interface
Com
OA3
OA1
Ready-Fault-Pole RJ45
LED Address
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUT
1 Forward running 6
IN 2 Reverse running
3 Output common
AL1 4 Selector in position
Supply 5 Pole state
I/O interface AL2
6 Reserved
7 Fault
Com
OA3
OA1
LO1
LI1
LI2
8 Input common
7
3UR¿EXV'3SRZHUVXSSO\PRGXOH/8*&
LU9 GC7
IN OUT
8
Filter
9
24 V Aux.
10
1/117

Wiring hub and splitter boxes
1 Modbus hub LU9GC3 Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G02 Parallel wiring splitter box LU9 G03
X1 LU9 GC3 X1 LU9 G02 X1 LU9 G03

N/C Forward running Forward running
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C Reverse running Reverse running

N/C Output common Output common
D (B) – N/C N/C
D (A) + RJ45 Pole state RJ45 Pole state RJ45
2 N/C
N/C
N/C
Fault
X9
Fault X1
+ 24 V
Fault
X9
Fault X1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0V +24 V Aux Fault X2 + 24 V Aux Fault X2
X2 Fault X3 Fault X3
X2 X2
Fault X4 Fault X4
Fault X5 Fault X5
X9
Fault X6 Fault X6
RJ45 N/C RJ45 RJ45
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fault X7 Fault X7
N/C
Fault X8 Fault X8
N/C
Pole state X1 Pole state X1
3 X3 D (B) –
RJ45 D (A) +
N/C
X3
(2) Pole state X2
Pole state X3
X3
(2) Pole state X2
Pole state X3
24 V RJ45 RJ45
RJ45 Pole state X5 Pole state X5
(1)
0V
X4 X4 Pole state X8 X4 Pole state X8
+ 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux
Com Com
+ 24 V Aux + 24 V Aux
4 RJ45 RJ45
Com
RJ45
Com
X5 X5 X5
Forward running
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C X10 X10
RJ45 X10 Commun des sorties Forward running X1 Forward running X1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C Forward running X2 Forward running X2
Pole state RJ45 Forward running X3
RJ45
Forward running X3
X6 N/C
5 RJ45
Fault
+ 24 V Aux
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
Forward running X4
Forward running X5
Forward running X6
RJ45 X6 Forward running X7 Colours of X6 Forward running X7
Forward running X8 TSX CDPppp Forward running X8
Reverse running X1 connection Reverse running X1
X7 RJ45 (3) Reverse running X2 cable wires RJ45 (3) Reverse running X2
Reverse running X3 (4) Reverse running X3
Reverse running X4 Reverse running X4
1 White
RJ45 X7 N/C X7 Reverse running X5
2 Brown
6 N/C
N/C
3 Green
4 Yellow
Reverse running X6
Reverse running X7
Shielding
X8 RJ45 N/C RJ45 Reverse running X8

5 Grey
+ c 24 V 6 Pink + c 24 V
Com Com
7 Blue
RJ45 + c 24 V 8 Red + c 24 V
X8 Com X8 Com
9 Black
10 Violet
RJ45 11 Grey-pink RJ45
7 12 Red-blue
13 White-green
14 Brown-green
24 V Aux 24 V Aux
15 White-yellow
Shielding
Shielding
16 Yellow-brown
D (A) +
D (B) –
Outputs
Outputs
Inputs
Inputs
17 White-grey
Com
Com
Com
Com
0V
0V
18 Grey-brown
19 White-pink
20 Pink-brown
8 (1) Not connected on connectors X1 to X8. Only present on RJ45 IN and OUT connectors.
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.
(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.
(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Gateways
LUF P1 LUF P7 LUF P9
9
LUF P1 Fip I/O - Modbus Gateway LUF P7 3UR¿EXV0RGEXV*DWHZD\ LUF P9 DeviceNet - Modbus Gateway
24 V Aux
D(A)
24 V Aux
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux
D(A)
D(B)
0V
0v
0V
X2 Fip I/O X1 X2 Profibus X1 X2 DeviceNet X1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 8
10
1/118
'DWDSUR¿OHXQGHU$6,QWHUIDFH
Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction
LUCA LUCB,
CC, CD
LUCM
1
Status D0 Ready (available)
D1 Poles closed (running)
Commands D0 Start - forward running
D1 Start - reverse running
Main registers DFFHVVLEOHZLWK0RGEXV&$1RSHQ$GYDQW\V67%3UR¿EXV'3DQG'HYLFH1HWFRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHV

For other registers and for further information, please consult the User's Manual Communication variables on the website www.schneider-electric.com
2
Control unit present in the product Standard Advanced Multifunction
Marking Register 0…Register 99 Words…Bits Commercial reference, serial number, software version
Log Register 100…Register 450 Words…Bits Fault log, Operating log, Log of last 5 trips
Status Register 451…Register 464 Words…Bits Alarm signalling (bits), Fault signalling (bits)
Values Register 465…Register 473 Words Irms phase 1, phase 2, phase 3. Motor load, thermal status
Earth leakage current.
Phase imbalance and phase failure
3
Register 474…Register 599 Words…Bits Reserved
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ Register 600…Register 699 Words…Bits Protection and alarm thresholds, fallback mode and reset
mode
Commands Register 700…Register 714 Words…Bits Commands
Status and
values
Register 452 Bit 0 Short-circuit fault 4
Bit 1 Overcurrent fault
Bit 2 Thermal overload fault
Register 455 Bit 0 Ready (available)
Bit 1 Poles closed
Bit 2 Fault
Bit 3
Bit 4
Alarms
Tripped ("TRIP" position)
5
Bit 5 Fault acknowledgement allowed
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Motor running
Bit 8 Motor current % (bit 0)
Bit 10 Motor current % (bit 2) 6
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Motor starting
Register 461
Register 465
Bit 3
Word
Thermal status value
7
Register 466 Word Motor load value (Im/Ir)
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ Register 602 Bit 0 Manual reset on thermal overload fault

Bit 1 Remote reset on thermal overload fault
Bit 2 Automatic reset on thermal overload fault
Register 682 Value 0 Fallback mode validation 8
Value 1 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged
Value 2 Outputs OA1 and OA3 forced to 0
Value 3 Outputs OA1 and OA3 unchanged,
signalling existence of communication failure
Value 4 Outputs OA1 forced to 1 and OA3 unchanged
Value 5 Outputs OA3 forced to 1 and OA1 unchanged
9
Commands Register 700 Bit 0 LO1 output command
Register 704 Bit 0 OA1 output command
Bit 1 OA3 output command
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Fault acknowledgement
Bit 4
Bit 5
Reserved
Trip test
10
Bit 6…15 Reserved
Data accessible
1/119
Basic schemes 1
Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter-controllers LUB
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2 Control Unit
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
3
M
3
2-wire control via 2-position switch 3-wire control, pulsed start with Connection of a motor load indicator
maintaining contact module LUFV 2
4
A1 A2 A1 A2 Analogue output Module
LUFV 2
Start
Stop 4...20 mA 24 V Aux 24 V Aux
13 14
NC
Connection of thermal overload fault signalling modules LUF DA10

Automatic reset Remote reset
6 – V1 – V1
07
08
07
08
LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset LUF DA10 Automatic or remote reset
24…230 V 24…230 V
X1
X2
7
Z1
Z2
X1
X2
Z1
Z2
A2 A1 A2 A1
– QF1 – QF1 – S2
– S1 – S1
8 Control via Modbus communication module Control via Modbus communication module LUL C033
LUL C031
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
9 24 V Aux 24 V 24 V
GND
GND
D(A)
D(B)
D(A)
D(B)
c Aux
Com
Com
Com
COM
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
4 5 8
6 4 5 8
6
– S1 – S2
Modbus Modbus
A2 A1 A2 A1
10
1/120
Basic schemes (continued) 1
Non-reversing
Non-reversing starter controllers LUB (continued)

Control by communication modules ASILUF C5 and ASILUF C51
Without pre-wired coil connection Without pre-wired coil connection
With local control
1
AS-Interface AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
Com
OA1
OA3
AS-Interface line AS-Interface line
Adjustment
A2 A1
Normal
3
A2 A1
With pre-wired coil connection LU9B N11C Without pre-wired coil connection
With local control
4
AS-Interface AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
LU9B N11C
Pre wired coil 5
AS-Interface line AS-Interface line
A2 A1
Adjustment
6
Normal
Without pre-wired coil connection

7
With multifunction control unit LUCM
ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module

AS-Interface
8
Com
OA1
OA3
A2 A1 AS-Interface line
9
LUCM Multifunction Control Unit
RJ45
GND
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux
4 5 8
6
Bus Modbus
RS 485
10
1/121
Reversing
Reversing starter-controllers LUB

2-wire control 3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact
1 via 3-position switch
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
LU2B Reverser Motor Controller LU2B Reverser Motor Controller
A3
A1
A2
B3
B1
A3
A1
A2
B3
B1
2 Start
forward running
Control Unit
Stop Stop
forward running forward running forward running Start
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
and reverse reverse running

Stop running
reverse running
3 Stop
reverse running
U1 2/T1
V1 4/T2
W1 6/T3
M
3
4 Control by communication modules ASILUF C5 3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact and limit switches
and ASILUF C51
With pre-wired coil connection LU9M RC
With multifunction control unit LUCM
5 ASILUF C5 or ASILUF C51 AS-Interface Module LU2B Reverser Motor Controller
AS-Interface
LU9M RC
A3
A1
A2
B3
B1
Pre wired coil
Limit switch Stop Start

AS-Interface line
forward running forward running forward running
6
Stop forward
running
LUCM Multifunction Control Unit and reverse
running Limit switch Stop Start
GND
D(A)
D(B)
24 V Aux reverse running reverse running reverse running
4 5 8
6
7 Bus Modbus
RS 485
Control by communication modules ASILUF C5

and ASILUF C51
8 Without pre-wired coil connection
With running direction pilot lights and limit switches
LU2B Reverser ASILUF C5/C51 AS-Interface Module

Motor
Controller AS-Interface
Com
OA1
OA3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
9
AS-Interface line
10 53 54 81 84
82
1/122
Reversing
Reversing starter controllers LU2B (continued)

Control via Modbus communication module LUL C031 Control via Modbus communication module LUL C033
Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control Without pre-wired coil connection. With local control 1
LU2B Reverser LUL C031 Modbus Module LU2B Reverser LULC 033 Modbus Module
Motor Motor
24 V 24 V
GND
GND
Controller Controller
D(A)
D(A)
D(B)
D(B)
24 V Aux c Aux COM
Com
Com
Com
OA1
OA3
OA1
OA3
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
4 5 8
6 4 5 8
6
2
Modbus Modbus
Start forward
Start
Adjustment
Adjustment
running
forward running
Normal
Normal
Start reverse
running Start
reverse running
Reversing starter-controllers LUB + LU6M

4
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
5
Control Unit
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
6
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
W1
U1
V1
3
M
7
3-wire control, pulsed start with maintaining contact 2-wire control via 3-position switch
A1 A2
13 14
A1 A2 8
21 22
21 22
S1
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
Stop
LU6M Reverser Block LU6M Reverser Block
9
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
A1
A2
B3
B1
forward running
and reverse Stop Start
running forward running forward running
S5 S6 S8
Stop Start
reverse running reverse running forward running 10
S7 S9 Stop
reverse running
1/123
Presentation 1
Soft starters
for asynchronous motors
Altistart U01 and TeSys U
Presentation
536566
The Altistart U01 is a soft start/soft stop unit for asynchronous motors. It is designed
1 1 primarily for combinations with TeSys U starter-controllers.
When combined with a TeSys U 1 controller by means of a connector 2, the

Altistart U01 3LVDSRZHURSWLRQZKLFKSURYLGHVWKH³6RIWVWDUWVRIWVWRSÍXQFWLRQ
The result is a unique, innovative motor starter.
Using the Altistart U01 starter enhances the starting performance of asynchronous
2 motors by allowing them to start gradually, smoothly and in a controlled manner. It
prevents mechanical shocks, which lead to wear and tear, and limits the amount of
maintenance work and production downtime.
The Altistart U01 limits the starting torque and current peaks on starting, on machines
which do not require a high starting torque.
The Altistart U01 is designed for the following simple applications:

3 b Conveyors
b Conveyor belts
b Pumps
b Fans
2 b Compressors
b Automatic doors and gates
b Small cranes
4 b Belt-driven machines, etc.
The Altistart U01 is compact and easy to install. It complies with standards IEC/EN
FDUULHV8/&6$&7LFN&&&FHUWL¿FDWLRQVDQGe marking.
b ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

v Control two phases of the motor power supply to limit the starting current and for
5 4
deceleration
v Internal bypass relay
5 v Motor power ratings ranging from 0.75 kW to 15 kW
6
v Motor supply voltages ranging from 200 V to 480 V, 50/60 Hz.
7 An external power supply is required for controlling the starter.
8
3
Description
6 b Altistart U01 soft start/soft stop units are equipped with:
v A potentiometer for setting the starting time 6
9
v A potentiometer for setting the deceleration time 8
v A potentiometer for adjusting the start voltage threshold according to the motor
load 7
v 1 green LED 4 to indicate that the unit is switched on
7 v 1 yellow LED 5 to indicate that the motor is powered at nominal voltage, if it
is connected to the starter
v A connector 9:
- 2 logic inputs for Run/Stop commands
- 1 logic input for the BOOST function
- 1 logic output to indicate the end of starting
- 1 relay output to indicate the starter has a power supply fault or the motor has
8 reached a standstill at the end of the deceleration stage
10
Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 1/126 and 1/127 page 1/128 page 1/129 pages 1/130 to 1/133
1/124
Presentation (continued) 1
Soft starters
Description of a TeSys U starter-controller

3OHDVHFRQVXOWWKH³7H6\V8VWDUWHUVRSHQYHUVLRQ´FDWDORJXH 1
ATSU 01N2pppLT soft start unit functions
b 2-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by a single logic input. State 1 of logic
input LI2 controls starting and state 0 controls stopping. 2
Altistart U01 control terminals
+ 24 V LI1 LI2
Wiring diagram for 2-wire control

3
b 3-wire control
The run and stop commands are controlled by 2 different logic inputs.
Stopping is achieved when logic input LI1 opens (state 0).
The pulse on input LI2 is stored until input LI1 opens.
Altistart U01 control terminals
+ 24 V LI1 LI2
4
Wiring diagram for 3-wire control
b Starting time
Controlling the starting time means that the time of the voltage ramp applied to the
motor can be adjusted to obtain a gradual starting time, dependent on the motor load.
5
b Voltage boost function via logic input
Activating the BOOST logic input enables the function for supplying a starting
overtorque capable of overcoming any mechanical friction.
When the input is at state 1, the function is active (input connected to the + 24 V) and
WKHVWDUWHUDSSOLHVD¿[HGYROWDJHWRWKHPRWRUIRUDOLPLWHGWLPHEHIRUHVWDUWLQJ 6
U
100%
Un
Voltage ramp
50%
Un
7
Initial voltage
t
200 ms
Application of a voltage boost equal to 100% of the nominal
motor voltage
b End of starting
8
v Application function for logic output LO1
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units are equipped with an open collector logic
output LO, which indicates the end of starting when the motor has reached nominal
speed.
10
Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/125
Characteristics 1
Soft starters
Environmental characteristics
Type of starter ATSU 01N2ppLT
1 Conformity to standards Altistart U01 electronic starters have been developed to conform to the strictest
international standards and the recommendations relating to electrical industrial
control devices (IEC, EN), in particular standard IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
Electromagnetic compatibility EMC
Conducted and radiated CISPR 11 level B, IEC 60947-4-2, level B
emissions
Harmonics IEC 1000-3-2, IEC 1000-3-4
2 EMC immunity
Electrostatic discharge
EN 50082-2, EN 50082-1
IEC 61000-4-2 level 3
Immunity to radiated radio- IEC 61000-4-3 level 3
electrical interference
Immunity to electrical transients IEC 61000-4-4 level 4
Voltage/current impulse IEC 61000-4-5 level 3
Conducted and radiated IEC 61000-4-6 level 3
emissions
3 Immunity to conducted
interference caused by radio-
IEC 61000-4-11
HOHFWULFDO¿HOGV
Damped oscillating waves IEC 61000-4-12 level 3
e marking The starters carry e marking in accordance with the European low voltage directives
IEC/EN 60947-4-2.
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV UL, CSA, C-Tick and CCC
4 Degree of protection
Degree of pollution
IP 20
2 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2
Vibration resistance 1.5 mm peak to peak from 3 to 13 Hz, 1 gn from 13 to 150 Hz, conforming to IEC/EN
60068-2-6
Shock resistance 15 gn for 11 ms conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
Relative humidity 5…95% without condensation or dripping water conforming to IEC 60068-2-3
Ambient temperature around Storage °C - 25…+ 70 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-4-2
5 the unit
Maximum operating altitude
Operation °C
m
- 10…+ 40 without derating, up to 50°C with current derating of 2% per °C above 40°C
1000 without derating (above this, derate the current by 2.2% per additional 100 m)
Operating position 10° 10°
Maximum permanent angle in relation to the normal vertical
mounting position
6 Electrical characteristics
Type of starter ATSU 01N2ppLT
Category of use Conforming to IEC 60947-4-2 Ac-53b
Rated operating voltage 3-phase a voltage V 200 - 10% to 480 + 10%
Frequency Hz 50 - 5% to 60 + 5%
Output voltage Maximum 3-phase voltage equal to line supply voltage
7 Control supply voltage

Rated operating current A
24 V c, 100 mA ± 10%
6...32
Adjustable starting time s 1...10
Adjustable deceleration time s 1...10
Starting torque % 30.... 80% of DOL motor starting torque
Type of starter ATSU 01N206LT 01N209LT 01N212LT 01N222LT 01N232LT
Control power supply consumption 24 V c, 65 mA 24 V c, 100 mA
8 Power dissipated At full load at end of starting
In transient state at 5 times the
W
W
1.5
61.5
1.5
91.5
1.5
121.5
2.5
222.5
2.5
322.5
rated operating current
Type of starter ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N222LT ATSU 01N232LT
Use
I Starting time Starting time s 1 5 10 1 5 10
Maximum number of cycles per 100 20 10 50 10 5
9 Full voltage state or
starter at standstill
hour
t
Operating cycle
10
Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/126
Characteristics (continued) 1
Soft starters
Electrical characteristics (continued)

Logic input power supply (electrically isolated between power 24 V ± 10%
and control)
+ 24 V, COM
Isolated
Max. current 100 mA 1
Logic inputs Logic inputs with impedance 27 k:9SRZHUVXSSO\8PD[9
LI1, LI2, BOOST Max. current 8 mA
Stop, run and boost on start-up functions State 0 if U < 5 V and I < 0.2 mA
State 1 if U > 13 V and I > 0.5 mA
Logic output LO1 Open collector logic output:
End of starting signal External 24 V power supply (minimum 6 V, maximum 30 V)
Relay output
Max. current 200 mA
Normally open (N/O) contact
2
R1A R1C Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V c
Maximum switching capacity on inductive load (cos M = 0.5 and L/R = 20 ms): 2 A for
250 V a or 30 V c (AC-15)
Maximum operating voltage 440 V
LED signalling Green LED Starter powered up
Yellow LED Nominal voltage reached
3
Connections (maximum connection capacity and tightening torque)
Power circuit &RQQHFWLRQWRPPVFUHZFODPSV
Flexible wire without cable 1 conductor mm2 1.5…10 8 AWG
end 2 conductors mm2 1.5…6 10 AWG
Flexible wire with cable end 1 conductor mm2 1…6 10 AWG
Rigid wire
2 conductors
1 conductor
mm2
mm2
1…6
1…10
10 AWG
8 AWG 4
2 conductors mm2 1…6 10 AWG
Tightening torque N.m 1.9…2.5
Control circuit Screw connector

Flexible wire without cable 1 conductor mm2 0.5…2.5 14 AWG
end
Flexible wire with cable end
2 conductors
1 conductor
mm2
mm2
0.5…1.5
0.5…1.5
16 AWG
16 AWG
5
2 conductors mm2 0.5…1.5 16 AWG
Rigid wire 1 conductor mm2 0.5…2.5 14 AWG
2 conductors mm2 0.5…1 17 AWG
Tightening torque N.m 0.5
Torque characteristics (typical curves)

T
6
The diagram opposite shows the torque/speed characteristic of a cage motor in relation to the
U
3 Tn supply voltage.
7KHWRUTXHYDULHVLQOLQHZLWKWKHVTXDUHRIWKHYROWDJHDWD¿[HGIUHTXHQF\7KHJUDGXDOLQFUHDVH
0,85 U in the voltage prevents the instantaneous current peak on power-up.
2 Tn
Tn
0,6 U Tr
7
0 N/Ns
0 0,25 0,5 0,75 1
10
Presentation: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/127
References 1
Soft starters
Soft start/soft stop units for 0.75 to 15 kW motors

(can be combined with the TeSys U starter-controller)
1
DF531714
Motor Starter
Motor power (1) Nominal Reference Weight
230 V 230 V 400 V 460 V current
kW HP kW HP A kg
3-phase supply voltage: 200…480 V 50/60 Hz
0.75 1 1.5 2 6 ATSU 01N206LT 0.340
1.1 1.5 2.2 3
2 1.5 2
3
– 5 9 ATSU 01N209LT 0.340
– – 4 –
2.2 3 5.5 7.5 12 ATSU 01N212LT 0.340

3 – – –
4 5 7.5 10 22 0.490
3 5.5 7.5 11 15
ATSU 01N222LT
7.5 10 15 20 32 ATSU 01N232LT 0.490

ATSU 01N222LT
Accessorie
4 1
LUBp2BL
Description Used for starter Reference Weight
kg
DF510362
Power connector between ATSU 01N2ppLT VW3 G4104 0.020

ATSU 01N2ppLT and
TeSys U
5 TeSys U starter and soft start unit combinations

Numerous possibilities for combinations and options are offered.
3OHDVHFRQVXOWWKH³7H6\V86WDUWHUVRSHQYHUVLRQ´VSHFLDOLVWFDWDORJXH
Motor power Soft starter TeSys U

Voltage Power base Control unit (2)
2 230 V 400 V 460 V
6 kW/HP
0.75/1
kW
1.5
HP
2 ATSU 01N206LT LUB 12 LUCp 05BL
1.1/1.5 2.2/3 3 ATSU 01N206LT LUB 12 LUCp 12BL
3
LUCM ppBL 1.5/2 – – ATSU 01N209LT LUB 12 LUCp 12BL
– 4 5 ATSU 01N209LT LUB 12 LUCp 12BL
2.2/3 – – ATSU 01N212LT LUB 12 LUCp 12BL
3/– 5.5 7.5 ATSU 01N212LT LUB 32 LUCp 18BL
7 4/5 7.5 10 ATSU 01N222LT LUB 32 LUCp 18BL
5.5/7.5 11 15 ATSU 01N222LT LUB 32 LUCp 32BL
7.5/10 15 20 ATSU 01N232LT LUB 32 LUCp 32BL
Example of a starter-motor combination with:

1 non-reversing power base for DOL starting (LUBp2BL)
4 2 control unit (LUCM ppBL)
8 3 power connector (VW3 G4104)

4 Altistart U01soft start/soft stop unit (ATSU 01N2ppLT)
(1) Standard motor power ratings, HP power ratings indicated according to standard UL 508.
ATSU 01N2ppLT 'HSHQGLQJRQWKHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQRIWKHFKRVHQ7H6\V8VWDUWHUFRQWUROOHUUHSODFHWKHp with
A for standard, B for expandable, and M for multifunction.
10
Presentation: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 1/124 and 1/125 pages 1/126 and 1/127 page 1/129 pages 1/130 to 1/133
1/128
Dimensions 1
Soft starters
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)
ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N212LT and ATSU 01N206LT to ATSU 01N212LT
Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G4104 connector Side by side mounting
1
45 135
99
72,2
2
154
124
284
150
9 3
9 4
TeSys U combination (non-reversing power base) and TeSys U combination (non-reversing or reversing power base)
ATSU 01N222LT to ATSU 01N232LT and ATSU 01N222LT to ATSU 01N232LT
Mounting on 5 (35 mm) rail with VW3 G4104 connector Side by side mounting
45 135 99 5
72,2
154
6
170
314
9 8
VW3 G4104 connector
9
46,6
20 44,8
10
28
6
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Schemes:

pages 1/124 and 1/125 pages 1/126 and 1/127 page 1/128 pages 1/130 to 1/133
1/129
Schemes 1
Soft starters
For 0.75 to 15 kW motors
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units

Power wiring Power wiring with reversing unit
1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
– QF1 – QF1
2 TeSys U
TeSys U
CU CU with
reversing
Tesys U Tesys U unit
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
A1
2/T1
4/T2
ATSU 01N2ppLT 6/T3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
4 A1
M1 ATSU 01N2ppLT
3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
5 3
M1
Compatible components)RUIXOOUHIHUHQFHV3OHDVHFRQVXOWRXUFDWDORJXH«DQG3OHDVHFRQVXOWRXUFDWDORJXH«RUUHIHUWRRXUFDWDORJXH³0RWRUVWDUWHU

VROXWLRQV&RQWURODQGSURWHFWLRQFRPSRQHQWV´
Code Description
6 A1
QF1
Soft start/soft stop unit
TeSys U controller-starter
CU TeSys U control unit
10
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions:

pages 1/124 and 1/125 pages 1/126 and 1/127 page 1/128 page 1/129
1/130
Soft starters
ATSU 01N2ppLT soft start/soft stop units (continued)

Automatic 2-wire control
Without deceleration With and without deceleration 1
c 24 V A1 c 24 V A1
+ +
ATSU 01N2ppLT ATSU 01N2ppLT
17
17
LUA1 C20 LUA1 C20
BOOST
BOOST
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
18
18
COM
COM
R1C
R1A
R1C
R1A
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
Stop
Run
– S1 – S1
2
Stop
Run
A1
– QF1 – S2
A2
A1
–
– QF1
3
A2
–
Functional diagrams
Power supply
Power supply
voltage voltage
Green LED
Green LED
Logic input LI2
Logic input LI2
Pushbutton S1
Pushbutton S2
Pushbutton S1
4
Logic output LO1
Logic output LO1
Yellow LED Yellow LED

10 s 10 s
U1
U1
Motor voltage Motor voltage

t1 t t1 t2 t 5
Automatic 3-wire control
Without deceleration With deceleration
c 24 V A1 c 24 V A1
+ +
ATSU 01N2ppLT ATSU 01N2ppLT
6
17
17
LUA1 C20 LUA1 C20

BOOST
BOOST
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
18
18
COM
COM
R1C
R1A
R1C
R1A
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
– S1
– S2 – S2
13
14 13
– QF1
A1
– QF1
7
14
– QF1
A1
A2
– – S1
– QF1
A2
–
Functional diagrams
Power supply Power supply
voltage
Green LED
500 ms
voltage
Green LED 8
Pushbutton S1 Logic input LI2
Pushbutton S2
Pushbutton S2 Logic input LI1
Pushbutton S1
Logic input LI2
Logic output LO1 Logic output LO1
Yellow LED
10 s
Yellow LED
10 s 9
U1
Motor voltage Motor voltage

t1 t t1 t
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit

S1, S2: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter
t1: Acceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
t2: Deceleration time can be controlled by a potentiometer
10
U1: Starting time can be controlled by a potentiometer

1/131
Soft starters

Automatic 3-wire control, with reversing unit
1 Without deceleration With deceleration
QF1 A1 QF1 A1
LU2B p2BL ATSU 01N2ppLT LU2B p2BL ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST
BOOST
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
COM
COM
R1C
R1C
R1A
R1A
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
2
Run
Run direction 1
direction 1
Run – S1
Run – S1 direction 2
direction 2 – S2
– S2
3 Stop
Stop
– S3
– S3
17
17
LUA1 C20 LUA1 C20

18
18
+ +
4 c 24 V
–
c 24 V
–
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit
A1: Soft start/soft stop unit A1: Soft start/soft stop unit
S1, S2, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons S1, S2, S3: XB4 B or XB5 B pushbuttons
5 S3: minimum depression time 500 ms
Boost on starting and end of starting signal
A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT
BOOST
+ 24 V
COM
6
R1C
R1A
LO1
LI1
LI2
To PLC
7
10

1/132
Soft starters

Automatic control with Modbus communication module, with and without deceleration
Without reversing unit With reversing unit 1
A1 A1 A1 A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT LUL C031 Modbus Module ATSU 01N2ppLT LUL C031 Modbus Module
BOOST
BOOST
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
D(B)
D(A)
D(B)
D(A)
Gnd
Gnd
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
c 24 V 24 V Aux. c 24 V 24 V Aux.
R1C
OA1
OA3
R1A
R1C
R1A
LO1
LO1
LO1
LO1
LU9B N11C
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
+ – + – + – + –
Pre-wired coil 4 5 8 4 5 8
+
2
13
c 24 V
+
14
c 24 V QF1
LU2B p2BL
3
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Function Register Bit Value Function Register Bit Value 4
Powering down TeSys U and ATSU Powering up TeSys U and ATSU
– 704 0 0 Forward 704 0 1
Reverse 704 1 1
Automatic control without deceleration Powering down TeSys U and ATSU
Run 700 0 1 Forward 704 0 0
Stop 704
Automatic control with deceleration
0 0 Reverse 704
Automatic control without deceleration
1 0
5
Run 700 0 1 Run 700 0 1
Soft stop 700 0 0 Stop forward 704 0 0
Stop reverse 704 1 0
Automatic control with deceleration (forward or reverse)
Run 700 0 1

Soft stop 700
0 0
6
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit
Automatic control with AS-Interface communication module, without deceleration
Without reversing unit With reversing unit
A1 A1
ATSU 01N2ppLT ATSU 01N2ppLT 7

BOOST
BOOST
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
COM
COM
R1C
R1C
R1A
R1A
LO1
LO1
LI1
LI2
LI1
LI2
13
QF1
ASI LUFC5
LU2B p2BL ASI LUFC5 8
14
c 24 V AS-Interface
COM
c 24 V AS-Interface
OA1
OA3
LU9B N11C
A3
B3
A1
B1
A2
Pre-wired coil + + + +
+ +
c 24 V c 24 V
9
Function Bit Value Function Bit Value
Power-up and automatic control without deceleration Power-up and automatic control without deceleration
Run D0 1 Run forward D0 1
Stop D0 0 Stop D0 0
Run reverse D1 1

Stop
D1 0
10
QF1: TeSys U controller-starter with reversing unit

1/133
Presentation, TeSys motor starters - open version
description, Magnetic control unit for the protection of
references variable speed controllers and soft start units
S1 (mm2 / AWG) Presentation

When installed upstream of a variable speed controller or soft start unit,
1 control unit LUCLpp, used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base,
provides:
v isolation,
v short-circuit protection of the motor starter.
(variable speed controller-based or soft start unit-based motor starters).
2
Note: control unit LUCL, when used in conjunction with power base LUB 12 or
LUB 32, conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
S2 (mm2 / AWG) LUB pp LUCLpp
Installation regulations
When the length of the cable between the TeSys U starter and the variable speed
3 controller is more than 1.5 m, the c.s.a. of the cable between the variable speed
controller and the TeSys U starter (S2) must be equal to the c.s.a. of the cable
upstream of TeSys U (S1).
Altivar or Altistart
4
568027
Description
1 Extraction and locking handle
5 1
2
3
Sealing of locking handle
Dial for magnetic adjustment of motor In
2 4 Locking of settings by sealing the transparent cover
3
References
6 4 Description Line current of the
variable speed controller
Reference
(1)
Weight
or soft start unit

A kg
Magnetic control unit 0.15…0.6 LUCLX6pp 0.135
0.35…1.4 LUCL1Xpp 0.135
1.25…5 LUCL05pp 0.135
7 3…12 LUCL12pp 0.135
4.5…18 LUCL18pp 0.135
8…32 LUCL32pp 0.135
(1) Standard control circuit voltage:
Volts 24 48…72 110…240
c BL (2), (3) – –
8 a
c or a
B
–
–
ES (4)
–
FU (5)
(2) Voltage code to be used for a starter-controller with communication module.
(4) c: 48…72 V, a: 48 V.
(5) c: 110…220 V, a: 110…240 V.
10
1/134
Selection TeSys motor starters - open version
Magnetic control unit for the protection of
variable speed controllers and soft start stop units
Control unit and associated power base selection

Functions provided Maximum motor Power base Control unit Line current
power ratings 50/60 Hz
< 400/415 V 500 V 690 V
reference reference
1
KW KW KW A
b Short-circuit protection 0.09 – – LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCLX6pp 0.15…0.6
b Manual reset 0.25 – – LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCL1Xpp 0.35…1.4
1.5 2.2 3 LUB 12 or LUB 32 LUCL05pp 1.25…5
5.5
7.5
5.5
9
9
15
LUB 12 or LUB 32
LUB 32
LUCL12pp
LUCL18pp
3…12
4.5…18 2
15 15 18.5 LUB 32 LUCL32pp 8…32
Control units Standard Advanced Multifunction
LUCA LUCB LUCC LUCD LUCL LUCM
Thermal overload protection 3
Over current protection 14.2 x the setting current 3 to 17 x the setting
current
Short-circuit protection 14.2 x the max. current
Protection against phase loss
Protection against phase imbalance
Earth fault protection (equipment protection only)
Tripping class 10 10 20 5…30
4
Motor type 3-phase Single-phase 3-phase Single-phase and 3-phase
Thermal overload test function
Overtorque
No-load running
Long starting time
Reset method Manual Parameters can be set 5
Automatic or remote With function module, or parameters can Parameters can be set
be set via the bus with a communication Parameters can be set
module (see page 1/68). via the bus with a
communication module
(see page 1/68).
Integrated function Function provided with accessory
6
Compatibility
Compatibility of References Functions
control unit LUCLpp with
The starter-controller Yes LUB 12/LUB 32 Starter-controller (magnetic protection)
The starter No LUS 12/LUS 32 Starter without either magnetic or thermal overload protection)
7
The controller No LUT M Controller (without thermal overload protection)
Add-on contact blocks Yes LUA 1C11 Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (1 N/O + 1 N/C)
with fault signalling LUA 1C20 Add-on contact blocks with fault signalling (2 N/O)
and auxiliary contacts
LUF N20 Auxiliary contacts (2 N/O)
LUF N11 Auxiliary contacts (1 N/O + 1 N/C)
LUF N02 Auxiliary contacts (2 N/C) 8
Communication Yes ASILUF C5 and AS-Interface communication modules
modules ASILUF C51
LUF C00 Parallel wiring module
LUL C033 Modbus communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C031
LUL C15
Modbus communication module (1 output)
Advantys STB communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
9
LUL C08 CANopen communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C09 DeviceNet communication module (1 output/2 inputs)
LUL C07 3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOHRXWSXWLQSXWV
Function modules No LUF W10 Alarm function module

LUF DH11 Thermal overload signalling module with manual reset 10
LUF DA01 Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/C)
LUF DA10 Thermal overload signalling module with automatic or remote reset (1 N/O)
LUF V2 Motor load indication module
1/135
Characteristics TeSys motor starters - open version
Characteristics of magnetic control unit LUCL

Protection Motor type 3-phase
1 Conforming to standard When used in conjunction with an LUB 12 or LUB 32 power base, magnetic control
unit LUCL conforms to standard IEC 60947-2.
Short-circuit protection Tripping threshold 14.2 x In (max. setting current)
Tripping tolerance ± 20 %
Environment
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV CE
2 Conforming to standards When used in conjunction an LUB power base, control unit LUCL conforms to
standard 60947-2.
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1, V 690
overvoltage category III,
Rated impulse withstand Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 kV 6
3 voltage (Uimp)
Safety separation of circuits Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 V Between the control or auxiliary circuit and the main circuit: 400
SELV appendix N Between the control and auxiliary circuits: 40
Degree of protection Front panel outside connection IP 40

Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 zone
(protection against Front panel and wired terminals IP 20
GLUHFW¿QJHUFRQWDFW
Other faces IP 20
4 Protective treatment Conforming to IEC/EN 60068 ³7+´
Conforming to/EN 60068-2-30 Cycles 12
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-11 h 48
Ambient air temperature Storage °C - 40…+ 85
around the device Operation °C Power bases and standard and advanced control units: - 25… + 70.
(At temperatures above 60°C and up to 70°C, for Ie = 32 A, leave a minimum gap of
9 mm between products).
5 Power bases and multifunction control units: - 25…+ 60.
(At temperatures above 45 °C, leave a minimum gap of 9 mm between products.
At temperatures above 55 °C up to 60 °C, leave a gap of 20 mm between products.)
Maximum operating altitude m 2000
Operating positions In relation to normal vertical

mounting plane
6
7 Flame resistance Conforming to UL 94 V2

Conforming to IEC/EN 60695-2-12 °C 960 (parts supporting live components)
°C 650
Environmental restrictions Cadmium and silicone-free, recyclable
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN60068-2-27 Power poles open: 10 gn
1/2 sine wave = 11 ms (1) Power poles closed: 15 gn
8 Vibration resistance
5…300 Hz
Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6
(1)
Power poles open: 2 gn
Power poles closed: 4 gn (2)
Resistance to Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-2 kV In open air: 8 - Level 3
electrostatic discharge kV On contact: 8 - Level 4
Immunity to radiated high- Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3 V/m 10 - Level 3
frequency disturbance
9 Immunity to
fast transient currents
Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-4 kV
kV
All circuits except for serial link: 4 - Level 4
Serial link: 2 - Level 3
Immunity to dissipated Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-2 Common mode Serial mode
shock waves Uc a 24…240 V, kV 2 1
Uc c 48…220 V
Uc = 24 V c Not applicable
Immunity to conducted Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-6 V 10
10 high-frequency disturbance
(1) Without modifying the contact states, in the most unfavourable direction.
(2) 2 gn with Advantys STB or CANopen communication modules.
1/136
Power bases and LUCL magnetic control unit
Power base and control unit type LUB 12 + LUCL LUB 32 + LUCL
Power circuit connection characteristics
Connection to Ø 4 mm screw clamp terminals 1
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 2.5…10 2.5…10
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 1.5…6 1.5…6
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 1…6 1…6
with cable end 2 conductors mm2 1…6 1…6
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 1…10 1…10
without cable end
Screwdriver
2 conductors mm2 1…6
3KLOLSVQRUÀDWVFUHZGULYHUPP
1…6
2
Tightening torque N.m 1.9…2.5 1.9…2.5
Control circuit connection characteristics
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
Flexible cable
with cable end
1 conductor mm2 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5 3
2 conductors mm2 0.34…1.5 0.34…1.5
Flexible cable 1 conductor mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
without cable end 2 conductors mm2 0.75…1.5 0.75…1.5
Tightening torque N.m 0.8…1.2 0.8…1.2
Rated control a 50/60 Hz V 24…240 24…240
4
circuit voltage c V 24…220 24…220
Voltage limits c 24 V (1) V 20…27 20…27
Operation a 24 V V 20…26.5 20…26.5
a or c 48…72 V V a 38.5…72. c 38.5…93 a 38.5…72. c 38.5…93
a 110…240 V V a 88…264 a 88…264
Drop-out
c 110…240 V
c 24 V
V
V
c 88…242
14.5
c 88…242
14.5
5
a 24 V V 14.5 14.5
a or c 48…72 V V 29 29
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V V 55 55
Typical consumption c 24 V mA 130 220
I max while closing a 24 V mA 140 220
a or c 48…72 V mA 280 280 6
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V mA 280 280
I rms sealed c 24 V mA 60 80
a 24 V mA 70 90
a or c 48…72 V mA 35 45
a 110…240 V, c 110…220 V mA 35 25
Heat dissipation W 2 3
Operating time Closing ms 99u 72 V: 50 99u 72 V: 50 7
Opening ms 35 35
Resistance to micro-breaks ms 3 3
Resistance to voltage dips IEC/EN 61000-4-11 At least 70 % of Uc for 500 ms
Mechanical durability In millions of operating cycles 15 15
Maximum operating rate In operating cycles per hour 3600 3600
Main pole characteristics
Number of poles 3 3
8
Isolation Possible Yes Yes
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1 Padlocking SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN SDGORFNZLWKPPVKDQN
Rated thermal current A 12 32
Rated operational current Conforming Category AC-41 șy 70 °C: 12 A șy 70 °C: 32 A
(Ue y 440 V) to IEC/ EN Category AC-43 șy 70 °C: 12 A șy 70 °C: 32 A
Rated operational voltage

60947-2
V 690 (3) 690 (3)
9
Frequency limits Of the operating current Hz 40…60 40…60
Power dissipated Operational current A 3 6 9 12 18 25 32
in the power circuits Power dissipated W 0.1 0.3 0.6 1.1 2.4 4.6 7.5
in all three poles
Rated breaking capacity on short-circuit V 230 440 500 600
Total breaking time

kA
ms
50
2
50
2
10
2
4
10
Thermal limit With Isc max on 440 V kA2s 90 120
(2) No consumption sealed.
(3) For 690 V, use phase barrier LU9SP0.
1/137
Combinations TeSys motor starters - open version
Coordination
7KHVWDQGDUGGH¿QHVWHVWVDWGLIIHUHQWOHYHOVRIFXUUHQWWKHSXUSRVHRIWKHVHWHVWVLV
1 to place the equipment in extreme conditions.
7KHVWDQGDUGGH¿QHVW\SHVRIFRRUGLQDWLRQDFFRUGLQJWRWKHFRQGLWLRQRIWKH
components after testing: type 1 and type 2
Type 1 coordination requires that in a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter
must not present any danger to personnel or installations and must not be able to
resume operation without repair or the replacement of parts.
The product combinations given below provide type 1 coordination
2 .
Soft start-soft stop unit/TeSysU starter controller combination
with magnetic protection
TeSys U / Altistart 48: type 1 coordination
Power TeSys U references Soft start unit reference
526112
526113
400 V (kW) (protection + power switching) Class 10 Class 20

3 5.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 – ATS48D17
7.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATS48D17 ATS48D22

+
11 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATS48D22 ATS48D32
15 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATS48D32 ATS48D38

4 Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination
with magnetic protection
TeSys U / Altivar 21 UL Type 1/IP 20: type 1 coordination
Power TeSys U references Variable speed controller reference
526112
526114
400 V (kW) (protection + power switching)
5 0.75 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV21H075N4
ATV21HU15N4
+
2.2 LUB12 + LUCL12 ATV21HU22N4
3 LUB12 + LUCL12 ATV21HU30N4
6 4 LUB12 + LUCL12 ATV21HU40N4
5.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 ATV21HU55N4
7.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 ATV21HU75N4
11 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATV21HD11N4

7 15 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATV21HD15N4
TeSys U / Altivar 21 IP 54: type 1 coordination

526112
526115

0.75 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV21W075N4/N4C
8 1.5 LUB12 + LUCL12 or LUCL05 ATV21WU15N4/N4C
+
2.2 LUB12 + LUCL12 ATV21WU22N4/N4C
3 LUB12 + LUCL12 ATV21WU30N4/N4C
9 4 LUB12 + LUCL12 ATV21WU40N4/N4C
5.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 ATV21WU55N4/N4C
7.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 or LUCL18 ATV21WU75N4/N4C
11 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATV21WD11N4/N4C
10 15 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATV21WD15N4/N4C
1/138
Combinations TeSys motor starters - open version
Variable speed controller/TeSysU starter controller combination

with magnetic protection (continued)
1
526112
526116

0.37 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV31H037N4
+
0.55 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV31H055N4
0.75 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV31H075N4 2


3

4
526112
526117

400V (kW) (protection + power switching)
0.75 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV61H075N4
+
5
5.5 LUB32 + LUCL32 ATV61HU55N4 6

526112
526118

400V (kW) (protection + power switching)
+
0.75 LUB12 + LUCL05 ATV71H075N4 7

8
10
1/139
General TeSys motor starters - open version
integral 63 contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers
integral 63: a high performance concept integral 63 contactor breakers combine all the functions of a power switching
assembly up to 63 A in a single compact device, with performance equivalent to that
for reliability of operation
1 of the best separate specialist devices.
526454
They conform to the main standards currently in force, in particular IEC 60947-1,
IEC 60947-2, IEC 60947-3, IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2 (welding of power
poles impossible), as well as to international approvals UL, CSA…, and the
European directives.
The integral range ensures reliability of operation up to 63 A. In addition to safety of

2 operation, integral has numerous other functions: increased protection,
FRPPXQLFDWLRQUHPRWHFRQWUROIDXOWLGHQWL¿FDWLRQLVRODWLRQSDGORFNLQJ
3
Functions performed by integral 63 The equipment in a power switching circuit must perform 4 main functions:
units b power switching,
b isolation,
b overload protection,
4 b short-circuit protection.
These functions are traditionally performed by separate devices which must be
combined to form a motor starter assembly, the most common being:
v fuses + contactor + thermal overload relay,
v circuit breaker + contactor + thermal overload relay.
5 Power switching
Contactor (for automatic and remote control)
526324
b Operational power for use in category AC-43:

v up to 30 kW at 400/415 V 50 Hz,
v up to 33 kW at 440/415 V 50 Hz.
b Electrical life in number of operating cycles, in category AC-43, at 415 V and at

6 rated power: 1.2 million.
b Mechanical life in number of operating cycles: 5 million.
7
Reversing pairs
526325
Two 3-pole contactors, horizontally mounted:

b mechanically interlocked.
8 &DQEH¿WWHGZLWKWKHVDPHSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHVDVLQWHJUDOFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHU
10
References: Dimensions, schemes:

pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/140
General (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Functions performed by integral 63 Isolation

units (continued)
Isolation conforming to IEC 60947 1
integral 63 contactor breakers provide isolation and padlocking functions conforming
to standards IEC 60947.
,QDGGLWLRQLQWHJUDO³/'´FRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQG³/'ÚHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRU
EUHDNHUVLQFRUSRUDWHVSHFL¿FSROHVIRUFRQWUROWHVWLQJDQGSDGORFNLQJ
Overload protection
Thermal-magnetic protection module (for protection against overload and 2
overcurrent)
534529
A range of interchangeable modules allows the equipment to be adapted to suit:

b the rated operational current (rating and settings),
b the application:
v motors,
v frequent starting motors,
v distribution circuits.
3
Short-circuit protection
High breaking capacity current limiting circuit breaker
526327
For short-circuit protection.
High breaking capacity with short-circuit limited by ultra-fast tripping. 4

Possibility of increasing the breaking capacity of the integral unit by adding a current
limiter (LA9 LB920).
7KHFXUUHQWOLPLWHULV¿WWHGXSVWUHDPRIWKHLQWHJUDOXQLW
6HYHUDOLQWHJUDOXQLWVPD\EH¿WWHGGRZQVWUHDPRIWKHFXUUHQWOLPLWHU
(Ith = 63 A, Ie = 32 A). 5
6
Signalling and attachments These devices provide comprehensive local signalling:
b pole position indicator,
b GLIIHUHQWVLJQDOOLQJIRU³RYHUORDG´DQG³VKRUWFLUFXLW´
526328
They also allow dialogue with the automated control system by means of numerous
add-on blocks:
b auxiliary contact and signalling blocks,
b remote electrical reset device,
7
b undervoltage and shunt trips,
b control circuit switching,
b etc.
6LPSOH¿[LQJDQGFDEOLQJPHWKRGV LQWHJUDOFRQWUDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQGUHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUV¿WRQWRPP7
rails using a separate mounting plate.
integral units can also be mounted on:
9
b panels,
b pre-slotted mounting plates type AM1 P,
b 2 x 35 mm 7 rails using sliding clip nuts,
b CMD prefabricated plug-in busbar trunking (providing an economical assembly,
combining safety and simplicity of use),
b AK5 panel busbar systems. 10

pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/141
Terminology TeSys motor starters - open version
Terminology Altitude
7KHUDUH¿HGDWPRVSKHUHDWKLJKDOWLWXGHUHGXFHVWKHGLHOHFWULFVWUHQJWKRIWKHDLUDQG
1 hence the rated operational voltage of the contactor breaker. It also reduces the
cooling effect of the air and hence the rated operational current of the contactor
breaker (unless the temperature drops at the same time).
No derating is necessary up to 3000 m.
Derating factors to be applied above this altitude for main pole operational voltage
2 and current (a.c. supply) are as follows:
Altitude 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 5000 m
Rated operational voltage 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60
Rated operational current 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.86

The temperature of the air surrounding the device, measured near to the device. The
3 operating characteristics are given:
b with no restriction for temperatures between - 5 and + 55 °C.
b with restrictions, if necessary, for temperatures between - 50 and + 70 °C.
Rated operational current (Ie)

7KLVLVGH¿QHGWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQWWKHUDWHGRSHUDWLRQDOYROWDJHRSHUDWLQJUDWHDQG
4 duty, utilisation category and air temperature around the device.
Conventional rated thermal current (Ith) (1)

The current Ith which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a minimum of 8
hours without its temperature rise exceeding the limits given in the standards.
Short time rating

5 The current which a closed contactor breaker can sustain for a short time, after a
period of no load, without dangerous overheating.
Rated operational voltage (Ue)

This is the voltage value which, in conjunction with the rated operational current,
determines the use of the contactor breaker or starter, and on which the
6 corresponding tests and the utilisation category are based. For 3-phase circuits, it is
expressed as the voltage between phases.
Apart from exceptional cases such as rotor short-circuiting, the rated operational
voltage Ue is less than or equal to the rated insulation voltage Ui.
Rated control circuit voltage (Uc)

The rated value of the control circuit voltage, on which the operating characteristics
7 are based. For a.c. applications, the values are given for a near sinusoidal wave form
(less than 5% total harmonic distortion).
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

7KLVLVWKHYROWDJHYDOXHXVHGWRGH¿QHWKHLQVXODWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIDGHYLFHDQG
referred to in dielectric tests determining leakage paths and creepage distances. As
WKHVSHFL¿FDWLRQVDUHQRWLGHQWLFDOIRUDOOVWDQGDUGVWKHUDWHGYDOXHVJLYHQIRUHDFK
8 of them are not necessarily the same.
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)

This is the highest peak value of an impulse voltage, of prescribed form and polarity,
ZKLFKWKHGHYLFHLVDEOHWRZLWKVWDQGZLWKRXWIDLOXUHXQGHUVSHFL¿HGWHVWFRQGLWLRQV
and to which isolation clearance values are referred.
9 The rated impulse withstand voltage of a device must be equal to or higher than the
values stated for the transient overvoltages appearing in the circuit in which the
GHYLFHLV¿WWHG
Note: WKHVHGH¿QLWLRQVDUHEDVHGRQH[WUDFWVIURPVWDQGDUG,(&
(1) Conventional free air thermal current, conforming to IEC standards.
10
References: Dimensions, schemes :

pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/142
Terminology (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Terminology (continued) Rated operational power (expressed in kW)

The rated power of the standard motor which can be switched by the contactor
breaker, at the stated operational voltage. 1
Rated breaking capacity (Iq) (1)
This is the current value which the contactor breaker can break in accordance with
WKHEUHDNLQJFRQGLWLRQVVSHFL¿HGLQWKH,(&VWDQGDUG
Rated making capacity (1)

This is the current value which the contactor breaker can make in accordance with
2
WKHPDNLQJFRQGLWLRQVVSHFL¿HGLQWKH,(&VWDQGDUG
On-load factor (m)

t 7KLVLVWKHUDWLREHWZHHQWKHWLPHWKHFXUUHQWÀRZVWDQGWKHGXUDWLRQRIWKHF\FOH7
t
m = ---
T
3
T
&\FOHGXUDWLRQGXUDWLRQRIFXUUHQWÀRZWLPHDW]HURFXUUHQW
Pole impedance
The impedance of one pole is the sum of the impedance of all the circuit components
between the input terminal and the output terminal. 4
The impedance comprises a resistive component (R) and an inductive component
X = LZ). The total impedance therefore depends on the frequency and is normally
given for 50 Hz. The average value is given for the pole at its rated operational current.
Electrical durability
This is the average number of on-load operating cycles which the main pole contacts
5
can perform without maintenance. The electrical durability depends on the utilisation
category, the rated operational current and the rated operational voltage.
Mechanical durability
7KLVLVWKHDYHUDJHQXPEHURIQRORDGRSHUDWLQJF\FOHVLHZLWK]HURFXUUHQWÀRZ
through the main poles) which the contactor breaker can perform without mechanical
failure.
6
Coordination
The coordination of protection devices involves combining, in a selective way, a
short-circuit protection device (fuses or magnetic circuit-breakers) with a contactor
and an overload protection device. Its objective is to break any abnormal current, in
plenty of time, without any danger to personnel, whilst providing adequate protection 7
of the equipment against an overload or short-circuit current.
Type 1 - IEC 60947-4-1

In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and may not be able to resume operation without repair or
the replacement of parts.
Type 2 - IEC 60947-4-1 8
In a short-circuit condition, the contactor or starter must not present any danger to
personnel or installations and must be able to resume operation. The risk of contact
welding is permissible if they can be easily separated.
Total, ensuring reliability of operation - IEC 60947-6-2
In the event of a short-circuit, no damage or risk of welding is permissible on the
equipment constituting the motor starter. Operation can be resumed without any
maintenance.
9
Note: WKHVHGH¿QLWLRQVDUHEDVHGRQH[WUDFWVIURPVWDQGDUG,(&
(1) For a.c. applications, the breaking and making capacities are expressed by the rms value of
the symmetrical component of the short-circuit current. Taking into account the maximum
asymmetry which may exist in the circuit, the contacts therefore have to withstand a peak
asymmetrical current which may be twice the rms symmetrical component.
10
References : Dimensions, schemes :

pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/143
'H¿QLWLRQ 7KHVWDQGDUGXWLOLVDWLRQFDWHJRULHVGH¿QHWKHFXUUHQWYDOXHVZKLFKWKHFRQWDFWRU
breaker must be able to make or break. These values depend on:
b the type of load being switched: squirrel cage or slip ring motor, resistors,
1 b the conditions under which making or breaking takes place: motor stalled, starting
or running, reversing, plugging.
Reminder of standards IEC 60947 b IEC 60947-1: general rules,
b IEC 60947-2: circuit breakers,
b IEC 60947-3: isolating devices,
b IEC 60947-4-1: contactors and motor starters,
b IEC 60947-5-1: control and signalling units,
2 b IEC 60947-6-2: control and protection devices,
Standards for contactor breakers IEC 60947-4-1
Standard IEC 60947-4-1: covers contactors and electromechanical motor starters. It
concerns:
b types of equipment with main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose
rated operational voltage does not exceed 1000 V for a.c. applications or 1500 V for
3 d.c. applications,
b contactors used in conjunction with overload and/or short-circuit protection
devices,
b motor starters used in conjunction with separate short-circuit protection devices
and/or with separate short-circuit protection devices and built-in overload protection
devices,
b contactors and combination motor starters which incorporate their own short-
4 circuit protection device.
IEC 60947-6-2
Standard IEC 60947-6: covers multi-function equipment.
It concerns connection, power switching and protection devices (or equipment) with
main contacts designed for connection to circuits whose rated operational voltage is
less than or equal to 1000 V for a.c. applications, or 1500 V for d.c. applications.
Such devices are designed to perform both the power switching function and the
5 SURWHFWLRQRIUHPRWHO\FRQWUROOHGFLUFXLWVIXQFWLRQWKH\FDQDOVRSHUIRUPRWKHU
functions, such as isolation.
After short-circuit (Isc) tests, the products must be able to make and break the
FXUUHQWVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKHVSHFL¿HGXWLOLVDWLRQFDWHJRULHVDQGWRWKH
QXPEHURIRSHUDWLQJF\FOHVVSHFL¿HGLQWKHVWDQGDUGZLWKRXWIDLOLQJ7KLV
series of tests is completed by temperature rise tests.
6WDQGDUG,(&VSHFL¿HVWKDWLQWKHHYHQWRIDVKRUWFLUFXLWQRGDPDJH
6 or risk of contact welding is permissible on the devices constituting the motor
starter.
The integral contactor breaker, through its design, ensures reliability of
operation. After eliminating the fault, operation can be resumed instantly
without any maintenance work on the product, other than resetting.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-1
7 This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or
greater than 0.95 (cos M y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-2
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
times the rated current of the motor.
8 b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal to
the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-3
This category applies to squirrel cage motors with breaking while motor running.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
b 2QRSHQLQJLWEUHDNVWKHUDWHGFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKHPRWRUDWWKLVSRLQWWKH
9 voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors (lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
10

pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/144
Standards for contactor breakers Utilisation categories for a.c. applications (continued)
(continued) Category AC-4
This category covers starting, plug braking and inching of squirrel cage motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
1
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Category AC-41
This category applies to all types of a.c. device (load) with a power factor equal to or 2
greater than 0.95 (cos M y 0.95). Non inductive or slightly inductive loads.
Application examples: heating, distribution.
Category AC-42
This category applies to starting, plugging and inching of slip ring motors.
b On closing, the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 2.5
b On opening, it must break the starting current, at a voltage less than or equal 3
to the mains supply voltage.
Category AC-43
7KLVFDWHJRU\DSSOLHVWRVTXLUUHOFDJHPRWRUVZLWKEUHDNLQJZKLOHPRWRUUXQQLQJ
inching or occasional reversing of limited duration are permissible if the number of
operating cycles does not exceed 5 per minute, or 10 within a 10 minute period.
b On closing the contactor breaker makes the starting current, which is about 5 to 7
times the rated current of the motor. 4
b 2QRSHQLQJLWEUHDNVWKHUDWHGFXUUHQWGUDZQE\WKHPRWRUDWWKLVSRLQWWKH
voltage at the contactor breaker terminals is about 20% of the mains supply voltage.
Breaking is light.
Application examples: all standard squirrel cage motors: lifts, escalators, conveyor belts, bucket
elevators, compressors, pumps, mixers, air conditioning units, etc.).
Category AC-44
This category covers applications with plug braking and inching of squirrel cage or 5
slip ring motors.
On closing, the contactor breaker makes a current peak which may be as high as 5
to 7 times the rated motor current. On opening, it breaks this same current at a
voltage which is higher, the lower the motor speed. This voltage can be the same as
the mains voltage. Breaking is severe.
Application examples: printing machines, wire drawing machines, hoisting equipment, metallurgy
industry.
Tripping classes of protection modules
6
The creation of thermal tripping classes allows better adaptation of the thermal
protection to suit different motor and application technologies (short or long starting
times). Conforming to IEC 60947-4-1 and IEC 60947-6-2.
Class 10 A 10 20 30
Tripping time at 7.2 Ir (1) 2…10 s 4…10 s 6…20 s 9…30 s
Standards for auxiliary contacts IEC 60947-5 7
Standard IEC 60947-5-1: covers switching devices and components for control
circuits.
It concerns electromechanical devices for control circuits.
Utilisation categories for a.c. applications
Category AC-14 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is less than 72 VA.
8
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors and relays.
Category AC-15 (2)
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads whose power drawn
with the electromagnet closed is greater than 72 VA.
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactors.
Utilisation categories for d.c. applications
Category DC-13 (3)
9
This category applies to the switching of electromagnetic loads for which the time
taken to reach 95 % of the steady state current (T = 0.95) is equal to 6 times the
power P drawn by the load (with P y 50 W).
Application example: switching the operating coil of contactor breakers.
(1) Ir = protection module setting current.
(2) Replaces category AC-11.
(3) Replaces category DC-11. 10
References: Dimensions, schemes :

pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/145
Equipment selection TeSys motor starters - open version
for starters integral 63 contactor breakers
When designing an installation, it is essential to take into account precise criteria for
determining the conductor c.s.a. and selecting equipment.
In particular:
1 b permissible currents for the conductors,
b maximum voltage drops,
b short-circuit protection,
b protection against indirect contact.
The latter three criteria must be taken into account when selecting the integral unit.
2 The principle behind the rules described below is, on the whole, common to all
European publications. However, the calculations and values concerning protection
against indirect contact are based on French standard NF C 15-100, and it is up to
the user to check the regulations in force in the country concerned.
Cable protection against overload

To achieve this, the thermal setting value Irth selected must be greater than the
3 current drawn IB and less than or equal to the permissible current Iz in the cable to
be protected.
IB < Irth y Iz
Short-circuit protection
Breaking capacity rule
4 Check that the breaking capacity (BC) of the integral unit is equal to or greater than
the prospective short-circuit current (Isc max) at the point where it is to be installed.
BC u Isc max
Breaking time rule

FRQGLWLRQVPXVWEHIXO¿OOHG
b The short-circuit current at the end of the circuit, Isc min, must be greater than or
5 equal to the minimum current required for magnetic tripping of the device,
b The short-circuit current at the start of the circuit, Isc max, must be such that:
I2sc max tm y I2oto I2oto = permissible thermal stress limit for the circuit,
tm = operating time of the integral unit or of the short-circuit
protection device.
These 2 checks need only be made when modules with a low rating are used.
6 Example: for a 6.3/10 A module, a cable c.s.a. u 2.5 mm2 is required to withstand
Isc max = 50 kA.
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes

TN multiple earthed neutral scheme
7 A
PEN B B'
8 C C'
TNC scheme
b Neutral is connected to earth.

b The earths are connected to neutral.
b Any phase/earth insulation fault causes a short-circuit.
9 b $VFRQWDFWYROWDJHLVGDQJHURXVEUHDNLQJPXVWRFFXUDWWKH¿UVWIDXOW
b The PE conductor and the neutral conductor may be:
v combined (TNC scheme),
v separate (TNS scheme).
10
General : References: Dimensions, schemes :

pages 1/140 to 1/145 pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/146
Equipment selection TeSys motor starters - open version
for starters integral 63 contactor breakers
Protection against indirect contact in TN schemes (continued)

b Protection against indirect contact (TN schemes), for dead shorts only, requires
WKDWWKHIROORZLQJFRQGLWLRQVEHIXO¿OOHGVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
v The fault current Id must be greater than or equal to the minimum current required
1
for magnetic tripping of the integral unit, i.e. 1.12 μ Irth max.
c FRHI¿FLHQWWDNLQJLQWRDFFRXQWWKHXSVWUHDPSDUWRIWKH
Uo
Id = c.q.___ fault loop impedance assumed to be equal to 0.8, unless
Zb
otherwise indicated.
q FRHI¿FLHQWGHSHQGHQWRQWKHHDUWKFRQQHFWLRQVFKHPH
and equal to 1 in the TN scheme.
2
Uo = phase-neutral voltage in volts.
Zb = fault loop impedance in m:/m such that:
Zb z R (fault loop resistance).
L = length of the fault loop equal to twice the length Lc of the
L Lc
R = U __ = 2 U ___ circuit.
S S S = Sph, c.s.a of the phase conductors = SPE = c.s.a. of the
protective conductors.
3
U = resistivity of the copper = 0.0225.
μ = ratio between the magnetic tripping current and the
maximum setting current of the instantaneous thermal
tripping device.
v The contact voltage (UL) for a dead short is at most equal to the value determined
by the safety curve for the operating time tm of the integral unit in its magnetic tripping
zone.
4
7KLVFRQGLWLRQLVJHQHUDOO\IXO¿OOHGIRUSRZHUVXSSOLHVRI9
(In fact, for UL = 50 V, a tm y 500 ms would be required and for UL = 25 V,
a tm y 110 ms would be required).
7KH¿UVWFRQGLWLRQDOORZVXVWRFDOFXODWHWKHPD[LPXPOHQJWKRIWKHFLUFXLWWRSURYLGH
protection against indirect contact in the TN scheme.
For the TN scheme:
5
c.q.Uo.Sph
__________
Ly
2U.1.μ Irth
0.8 x Uo x Sph
i.e. L max = _______________________
2 x 0.0225 x 1.2 μ Irth max
Maximum length of 230/415 V circuits with TN scheme

6
C.s.a. Irth max. μ=3 μ=6 μ = 12 μ = 15
mm2 A m m m m
1.5 10 180 90 45 36
16 112 56 28 22
2.5 10 298 149 75 60
16 186 93 47 37 7
25 118 59 32 –
32 92 46 23 –
4 16 296 148 74 60
25 190 95 48 –
32 148 74 37 –
40 118 59 30 –
6 25 284 142 71 – 8
32 222 111 56 –
40 178 89 45 –
50 142 71 36 –
10 32 370 185 93 –
40 296 148 74 –
50
63
236
188
118
94
59
47
–
–
9
16 32 590 295 148 –
40 472 236 118 –
50 378 189 95 –
63 300 150 75 –
25 32 922 461 281 –
40
50
738
590
369
295
185
148
–
–
10
63 468 234 117 –

1/147
Selection according to TeSys motor starters - open version
utilisation category and integral 63 contactor breakers
required electrical and reversing contactor breakers
durability
Selection for a temperature T y 40 °C

Rated operational voltage V 220/240 400/415 440 480/525 600/690
1 Rated operational currents (according to the rated operational voltage)
integral 63 A 63 63 63 63 63
Rated operational powers (for standard motors)

integral 63 kW 15 33 33 37 55
2 Electrical durability
Control and protection of motors at Ue y 415 V
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-4-1,
b in utilisation categories AC2, AC3 conforming to IEC 60947-6-2.
3 Millions of operating cycles

20
10
8
6 (63 A)
5
4
2 1
2
1,5
4 1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
0,06
5 0,04
0,02
0,01
1 2 3 45 79 20 40 60 80 150 200
1,5 6 8 10 63 100160 300
Current broken in A
6 1 Not having previously broken a short-circuit current

2 Having broken a short-circuit current 10 times at 30 Ie (most common values of
short-circuit current during operation)
7
Current
breaking
limit
AC-3 AC-2
AC-43 AC-42
8
10

1/148
Selection according to TeSys motor starters - open version
utilisation category and integral 63 contactor breakers
required electrical
durability
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-3, AC-41, AC-43
Rated operational currents (according to ambient temperature)
integral 63
With cable c.s.a.
16 mm2 A
T y 40 °C
63
T y 55 °C
55
T y 70 °C
50
1
a.c. supply, utilisation categories AC-1, AC-41
Maximum operating rates in operating cycles/hour
On-load On-load
factor 85 %
Operation Operation
factor 25 %
Operation
2
at Ie max at 0.5 Ie at Ie max
integral 63 Operating cycles/h 1200 2400 1800
Electrical durability Ue y 415 V
Millions of operating cycles 3

20
10
8
6 (63 A)
5
4
2
1,5 4
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,1
0,08
5
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,01
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 40 63 80 100
60
Current broken in A
6
Note: IRUXVHLQFDWHJRU\$&SOHDVHFRQVXOW\RXU5HJLRQDO6DOHV2I¿FH
10

1/149
Contactor breakers
and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Type integral 63
Number of poles 3
1 Rated operational current (Ie) In AC-3

Rated operational voltage (Ue)
A
V
63
690
Electrical durability In AC-3 at 400 V 1.2 million operating cycles
Mechanical durability at Uc 5 million operating cycles
Maximum operating rate a 3600 operating cycles/hour
at ambient temperature y 55 °C c with converter 600 operating cycles/hour
2 Environment
Conforming to standards IEC: 158-1, 204-1, 204-2, 364, 947-1/2 and 4
UTE: NF C 63-110, C 63-120, C 63-130, C 63-650, C 79-100, C 20-040
VDE: 0100, 0110, 0113, 0170, 0171, 471, 0660
BS: 5424, 4752, 4941
NEN, NBN
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV ASE, ASEFA, ASTA, BV, CSA, DEMKO, DNV, GL
3 Protective treatment
NEMKO, NKK, ÖVE, RINA, SCC, SETI, UL, USSR, LROS
³7+´
Ambient air temperature a Operation °C - 20…+ 60
around the device Storage °C - 40…+ 80
c Operation °C - 25…+ 50
(1) Storage °C - 25…+ 70
Vibration resistance 5…100 Hz Energised state: 3 gn
4 Permissible acceleration De-energised state: 3 gn
Shock resistance Impulse duration: 11 ms Energised state: 8 gn
Permissible acceleration De-energised state: 8 gn
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60144 & 60529 IP 20B
Conforming to VDE 0106 3URWHFWLRQDJDLQVWGLUHFW¿QJHUFRQWDFW
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60295-2-1, NF C 20-455 and decree of 22-12-81
(JO 27 NC of 1st and 2/2/1982)
5 Maximum operating altitude Without derating m
Conforming to UL 94 - V0 and NF T 51-072
3000
Operating positions In relation to normal From main axis
(without derating) vertical mounting plane (left-right tilt)
6 Control circuit characteristics

Rated control circuit voltage a 50 Hz V 24…660
(Uc) a 60 Hz V 24…600
c with converter V 24, 48, 110
Voltage limits Operation 0.85…1.1 Uc
at T y 55 °C Drop-out 0.25…0.7 Uc
7 Average consumption
at 20 °C and at Uc
a Inrush
Sealed
VA
VA
375 (50 Hz), 450 (60 Hz)
25 (50 Hz or 60 Hz)
c (1) Inrush W 300 for 50 ms
Sealed W 8
Heat dissipation W 8 (50 Hz), 11 (60 Hz)
Operating time (2) a 50/60 Hz ³&´ ms 12…35
at 20 °C and at Uc ³2´ ms 7…20
8 c with
converter
³&´
³2´
ms
ms
25…40
15…25
(1) With converter.

(2) The closing time “C” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched on to initial
contact of the main poles.
The opening time “O” is measured from the moment the coil supply is switched off to the
moment the main poles separate.
9
10
General : Selection : References : Dimensions and schemes :

pages 1/140 to 1/145 pages 1/146 to 1/149 pages 1/160 to 1/1711/1741/174 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/150
Contactor breakers
Type integral 63
Pole characteristics
Conventional thermal current (Ith)
Frequency limits
T y 40 °C A
Hz
63
40…60
1
of the operational current
Rated impulse Conforming to IEC 60947-4 kV 8
withstand voltage (Uimp)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to IEC 60947-1 V 690
Heat dissipation in the power Operational current A 25 32 40 50 63
circuits of the contactor breaker
and its protection module
Power per pole, hot state W 4.4 5 5.8 7 9
2
Rated making capacity
I rms Conforming to IEC 60947-4 A 12 or 15 x Ith (above this value. the breaker trips)
I peak Conforming to IEC 60947-2 kA 105
Rated breaking capacity
conforming to Operational voltage V 220/240 380/415 440 480/525 600/690
IEC 60947-2 Value of cosM
Cycle P1 (O-t-CO) Icu (1)
0.25
kA rms 50
0.25
50
0.25
50
0.25
35
0.5
10 3
Cycle P2 (O-t CO-t-CO) Ics (1) kA rms 50 50 50 35 10
conforming to IEC Icu = Ics kA rms 50 50 50 30 10
60947-6-2 ensuring
reliability of operation
Total breaking time ms 4
Electrical durability in AC-3 Prospective rms kA 3 10 25 35 50
at Ie max and at 415 V
after 1 cycle O-CO-r-CO at Isc
short-circuit current at
terminals of a new device
4
Millions of operating cycles 1 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.2
Thermal limit With Isc max. A2s 300 x 103
at 415 V, 50 Hz
Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a.
Flexible cable mm2 1 x 50 or 2 x 35 1x6
without cable end
Flexible cable mm2 2 x 25 1x6
5
with cable end
Solid cable mm2 1 x 50 1x6
Tightening torque N.m 6
Characteristics of thermal-magnetic or magnetic only protection modules
Module type LB1 LD03P LB1 LD03M LB6 LD03M LB1 LD03L
Protection
Conforming to standards
Standard motors
NF C 63-650
Standard motors
NF C 63-650
Frequent starting
NF C 63-650
Distribution circuits
NF C 63-120
6
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Number of protected poles 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage V 690 690 690 690
Max. continuous current A 13…63 13…63 13…63 13…63
Thermal protection Setting range (Irth min./Irth max.) A 10/13…45/63 10/13…45/63 – 10/13…45/63
Temperature compensation °C - 20…+ 60 20…+ 60 20…+ 60 20…+ 60 7
Protection against With With Without Without
phase imbalance
Tripping class 20 20 – –
Magnetic protection Instantaneous trip current Fixed at 15 Irth max 6…12 Irth max (usual 6…12 Irth max 3…6 Irth max
conforming to setting range setting
IEC 60947-1/2/4/6-2 9…10 Irth maxi)
Tripping tolerance
Characteristics of versions without control test function, with padlocking facility
± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 % ± 20 %
8
Conforming to standards IEC 60947
Rated operational voltage V 690
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 10 000
Padlocking %\RUSDGORFNVPPVKDQN
Characteristics of versions with control test function and padlocking facility
Conforming to standards IEC 60947, NF C 63-130, VDE 0660, VDE 0113
9
Mechanical durability Operating cycles 10 000
Padlocking RUSDGORFNVVKDQNPPPD[DQGPPPLQ:KHQÀXVKPRXQWLQJ
interlocking of the enclosure or cabinet door is possible.
(1) O: breaking short-circuit current (open),
t: time
CO: closing on short-circuit, breaking short-circuit current (closed-open) 10

pages 1/140 to 1/145 pages 1/146 to 1/149 pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 to 1/177
1/151
Characteristics (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Contactor breakers
Add-on current limiter and auxiliary contacts
Instantaneous auxiliary contacts LA1 Lpp

1 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-1
V 690
Switching capacity With U u 17 V and I u 10 mA mVA 600

Rated a category Voltage V 48 110/127 220/240 380/415 440
operational AC-15 (1) 1 million operating cycles VA 300 500 600 520 500
power
1.5 million operating cycles VA 160 300 330 300 280
Making capacity a category AC-15 VA 1500 3500 6000 7500 7000
2 Rated
operational
c category
DC-13 (2)
Voltage
1 million operating cycles
V
W
24
120
48
90
110
75
220
68
440
61
power
1.5 million operating cycles W 70 50 38 33 28
Making capacity c category DC-13 W 800 700 400 260 220
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
3 Isolating auxiliary contacts LA1 LC03p

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) a.c. supply V 690
Conforming to IEC 60947 d.c. supply V 125
and NF C 63-130
Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 1.5 or 1 x 2.5
4 Signalling contacts LA1 LC001

Rated insulation voltage (Ui) Conforming to V 250
IEC 60947-5-1
Operational power a Voltage V – – 110/127 220
for 200 000 operating cycles Resistive load VA – – 600 750
Lamp load (3) VA – – 90 125
5 Inductive load (4)
Motor (5)
VA
VA
–
–
–
–
875
160
500
200
c Voltage V 24 48 110/125 200
Resistive load W 100 100 50 50
Lamp load (3) W 50 50 6 7.5
Inductive load (4) W 75 75 50 50
Motor (5) W 75 75 6 7.5
6 Cabling mm2 Maximum c.s.a.: 2 x 2.5
Minimum c.s.a.: 2 x 1
(1) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet: making current
(cos M 0.7) = 10 times the power broken (cos M 0.4).
(2) Electrical durability on an inductive load such as the coil of an electromagnet, the time
constant increasing with the load.
(3) Lamp load: peak current = 10 times the rated current.
7 (4) Inductive load: cos M 0.4 for a.c. operation; time constant 7 ms for d.c. operation.
(5) Motor: peak current = 6 times the rated current.
10

1/152
Contactor breakers
Interface modules and converters
Type Interface modules Converters

around the device
Storage °C - 25…+ 70 - 25…+ 70 1
Operation °C - 25…+ 50 - 25…+ 50
Isolation kV rms voltage between inputs and outputs: 2.5 Common negative terminal
Cabling Min. mm2 1x1 1x1
Max. mm2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5
Operating limits 0.85...10.1 Uc 0.8...1.1 Uc (2)
Protection Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage
Against reverse polarity (by diode)
and against overvoltage 2
Module or converter type LA1 LC LA1 LC
580BD 580ED 180BD 080BD 080ED 080FD
Schemes
LA1 Lp080BD LA1 Lp080FD
LA1 LCp580pD LA1 Lp180BD
LA1 Lp080ED 3
A1 A1
+ E1 + E1 + E1
A1 + E1
A1
– E2 – E2 (0V) E3 (0V)
A2 A2 – A2 – A2
E2 E2
Indication of input state By LED – –

Input signals
(logic side)
Voltage V c 24 c 48
(E1-E2) (E1-E2)
c 5…24
(E1-E2)
c 24
(E1-E2)
c 48
(E1-E2)
c 5…24
(E1-E2)
c 24 (1) c 48 (1) –
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
c 24 (1) c 48 (1) –
(E3-E2) (E3-E2)
4
Current mA 30 20 15…24 V 50 25 15…24 V 20 10 – 20 10 –
8.5…5 V 8.5…5 V
State “0” For U V < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.5 < 2.4 < 4.8 < 2.5 <7 < 14 – <7 <14 –
guaranteed For I mA <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <2 <5 < 2.5 – <5 < 2.5 –
State “1” For U V > 20.4 > 40.8 >4 > 20.4 >4 >4 > 14 > 28 – > 14 > 28 –
guaranteed
Supply voltage V a a a a a a c c
48 (2)
c c c c 5
24…240 24…240 24…240 24…240 24…240 24…240 24 (2) 110 (2) 24 (2) 48 (2) 110 (2)
(A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (A1-A2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2) (E1-E2)
Electrical durability 5 1
in millions of operating cycles
Average
consumption
Inrush 50 Hz
VA 160 160 160 375 375 375 – – – – – – 6
VA
60 Hz 185 185 185 450 450 450 – – – – – –
cW – – – – – – 250 250 250 300 300 300
Sealed 50/60 Hz VA 12 12 12 25 25 25 – – – – – –
c W – – – – – – 4 4 4 8 8 8
Operating time Pull-in ms 15…30 15…30 10…35 20…40 20…40 10…45 30 30 30 35 35 35
at 20 °C Drop-out ms 22…35 22…35 8…30 25…45 25…45 8…30 15 15 15 20 20 20
and at Uc 7
(1) For direct control by external contact: connect E1-E3.
:DUQLQJIRUVXSSO\IURPUHFWL¿HGDFWKHIROORZLQJFRQGLWLRQVPXVWEHPHWWKHSRZHUVXSSO\PXVWH[FHHG9$DQGWKHPD[LPXPULSSOHPXVWEHy 14 %.
10

1/153
Contactor breakers
Tripping and reset devices, coil suppressor module
Environment
Conforming to standards IEC 60337-1
1 Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature Storage °C
³7+´
- 40…+ 80
around the device Operation °C - 25…+ 55
Permissible for °C - 25…+ 70
operation at Uc
Protection against Conforming to VDE 0106
GLUHFW¿QJHUFRQWDFW
2 Tripping devices
Type LA1 LC070p, LC072p LA1 LC071p
Pull-in voltage Uc 0.8…1.1 0.7…1.1
Drop-out voltage Uc 0.35…0.7 –
Average consumption Inrush VA 8 8
Sealed VA 4 4
Minimum pulse time ms – 10
3
Reset devices
Type LA1 LC052p
Consumption VA 9
Duration of a reset cycle s 9
Minimum pulse duration s 0.5
4 Suppressor module LA9 D09982

Type of protection RC (resistor-capacitor)
Connection scheme
Operational voltage V y 250
10

1/154
Contactor breakers
Breaking capacity of integral 63 contactor breakers, according to the operational

YROWDJHDQGSURWHFWLRQPRGXOH¿WWHG
Breaking capacity
1
Protection module Operational voltage
Reference Irth 220/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500 V 600/690 V
min max
A A kA kA kA kA kA
LBp LD03p16 10 13 u130 u130 u130 u130 10
LBp LD03p21 13 18 u130 u130 u130 u130 10

2
LBp LD03p22 18 25 u130 u130 50 35 10
LBp LD03p53 23 32 u130 50 50 35 10
LBp LD03p55 28 40 u130 50 50 30 10

3
LBp LD03p57 35 50 u130 50 50 30 10
LBp LD03p61 45 63 u130 50 50 30 10
10

1/155
Selection of protection TeSys motor starters - open version
module according to the Contactor breakers
tripping characteristics and reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Motor protection (normal starting)

1 By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03P (1)
Time
300
min
23 28 35 45 63
100 10 13 18 25 32 40 50 irth
min P16
2 P21
P22
P53
P55
10 P57
min P61
40 s
1 min
3
10 s
1s
195 375 600 945
4 270 480 750
0,1 s
0,01 s
5 6 10 15 20 30 40 54 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000

Current in A
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03M (1)
Time
300
6 min
10 13 18
23 28 35 45 63
25 32 40 50 irth
100
min M16
M21
M22
M53
M55
10 M57
Thermal zone
min M61
7
1 min
10 s
8
1s
Magnetic zone
78 156 240 480

108 190 300 600
150 216 380 760
0,1 s
9
0,01 s
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A
(1) Thermal protection: the average operating times shown in the above curves are for an
DPELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUHRI&ZLWKRXWSULRUFXUUHQWÀRZFROGVWDWH7KHDYHUDJH
RSHUDWLQJWLPHVDIWHUSURORQJHGFXUUHQWÀRZKRWVWDWHFDQEHFDOFXODWHGE\DSSO\LQJWKH
10 FRHI¿FLHQW

1/156
Motor protection (frequent starting)

By magnetic modules LB6 LD03M
Time
1
300
min
100
min
10 2
Thermal zone
min
1 min
10 s 3
Magnetic zone
1s
78 156 240 480
108 190 300 600
0,1 s
150 216 380 760
4
0,01 s
6 10 20 40 60 80 100 110 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A
5
Distribution circuit protection
By thermal-magnetic modules LB1 LD03L
Time
300
min 25 32 40 50
18 23 28 35 45 63 irth
6
100
min
L22
L53
L55
10 L57
min
L61
7
1 min
10 s
8
1s
75 150
95 190
120 240
150 300
0,1 s 190 380
9
0,01 s
6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000
Current in A
10

1/157
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit

3-phase 400/415 V, 50 Hz
1 Current limitation on short-circuit
Maximum peak current in kA
100 5
80 0,2
60 =
40
0,3
2 20
=
0,5 1 (1)
=
10
8
6
0,7
4 =
3 s
3 2
co
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
4 0,2
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
Prospective rms short-circuit current in kA
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
5 Maximum thermal limit on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the
short-circuit protection zone
1000
800
6 600
400
(1)
1
200
7 100
80
60
40
8 20
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 50 100 200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
9 (1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD06p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.
10

1/158
module according to the Contactor breakers and
tripping characteristics reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Current limitation and thermal limit on short-circuit (continued)

3-phase 480/500 V, 50 Hz
Current limitation on short-circuit 1
Maximum peak current in kA
100
5
80 0,2
60 =
40
0,3
20
=
2
0,5 1 (1)
=
10
8
6 0,7
=
4 s
co
3
2 3
1
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
4
0,1
0,1 0,2 0,4 0,3 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
Current limitation on short-circuit

Thermal limit I2t in kA2s in the
5
short-circuit protection zone
1000
800
600
400
6
(1)
1
200
100
80 7
60
40
20
8
10
1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 35 50 100 200
1 18 to 25 A up to 45 to 63 A
(1) LB1 LD03p22 to LD03p61: rating of associated thermal overload module.

9
10

1/159
References 1
Contactor breakers and

reversing contactor breakers integral 63
for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Without control test function, with padlocking facility
1 Standard power ratings of
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43
Operational Breaking
current
Basic reference (3)
capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
Weight
220 V 400 V for the control circuit voltage code (2)

240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V Ue y 415 V
kW kW kW kW kW A kA kg
Black knob
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD1 LD030p 3.700
2 33
With control test function and padlocking facility

LD1 LD030p Standard power ratings of Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43 current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
220 V 400 V for the control circuit voltage code (2)
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V Ue y 415 V
3 kW kW kW kW
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
kW A kA kg
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD130p 3.800

33
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop
4 15 30
33
33 37 55 63 50 LD4 LD030p 3.800
3-pole reversing contactor breakers without protection module (1)

With control test function and padlocking facility
Standard power ratings of Operational Breaking Basic reference (3) Weight
5 3-phase motors 50/60 Hz in AC-43

220 V 400 V
current capacity (Iq) To be completed by adding
for
Ue y 415 V
the control circuit voltage code (2)
240 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 660 V
kW kW kW kW kW A kA kg
Black knob (CNOMO, VDE 0113)
15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD130p 7.600
33
6 Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO) Emergency Stop

15 30 33 37 55 63 50 LD5 LD030p 7.600
33
)RUWKHXQLWWRIXQFWLRQLWPXVWEH¿WWHGZLWKDSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWREHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\VHHSDJHRSSRVLWH
7 Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380
400
415 440 480 500 600 660
LD5 LC030p
50 Hz B – D E F – M M U Q N N – S – Y
60 Hz BC CC – CE K FC LC MC MC – – UX Q – S –
c (4) BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –
8 9DULDQW8/³W\SH(´DSSURYHGYHUVLRQ63&'DW9WRRUGHUDGGVXI¿[H5 to the reference.
Example: LD1 LD030MH5.
(4) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with 1 or 2 converters, including coil suppression devices (2 converters for reversing
contactor breakers).
10
General : Selection : Characteristics : Dimensions and schemes :

1/160
References 1

for control and protection of motors
(for customer assembly)
Thermal-magnetic protection modules (compensated and differential for normal starting motors) (1)
Fixed magnetic protection, set at 15 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63
of 3-phase motors
Thermal
setting range
Magnetic
protection
Reference Weight 1
50/60 Hz in category AC-43 (Irth min to Irth max)
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V
LB1 LD03Mpp kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10…13 – LB1 LD03P16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13…18 – LB1 LD03P21 0.780 2

5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18…25 – LB1 LD03P22 0.780
7.5 15 15 18.5 22 23…32 – LB1 LD03P53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 28…40 – LB1 LD03P55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 35…50 – LB1 LD03P57 0.780

3
15 33 33 40 55 45…63 – LB1 LD03P61 0.780
Adjustable magnetic protection from 6 to 12 Irth max, for mounting on integral 63

Standard power ratings Thermal Magnetic Reference Weight
of 3-phase motors
setting range
(Irth min to Irth max)
protection
4
220 V 400 V 480 V 600 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V 690 V
kW kW kW kW kW A A kg
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 10…13 78…156 LB1 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 13…18 108…216 LB1 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 18…25 150…300 LB1 LD03M22 0.780

5
7.5 22 22 25 33 23…32 190…380 LB1 LD03M53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 28…40 240…480 LB1 LD03M55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 35…50 300…600 LB1 LD03M57 0.780

6
15 33 33 40 55 45…63 380…760 LB1 LD03M61 0.780
Magnetic only protection modules (for frequent starting motors)

Standard power ratings Magnetic protection Reference Weight
of 3-phase motors
220 V 400 V
240 V 415 V 440 V 525 V
480 V 600 V
690 V
7
LB6 LD03Mpp kW kW kW kW kW A kg
3 5.5 5.5 7.5 10 78…156 LB6 LD03M16 0.780
4 9 9 11 15 108…216 LB6 LD03M21 0.780
5.5 11 11 15 18.5 150…300 LB6 LD03M22 0.780

8
7.5 22 22 25 33 190…380 LB6 LD03M53 0.780
9 22 22 25 33 240…480 LB6 LD03M55 0.780
11 25 25 33 45 300…600 LB6 LD03M57 0.780
15 33 33 40 55 380…760 LB6 LD03M61 0.780 9

(1) Protection modules UL and CSA approved.
10

1/161
Selection 1
Contactor breakers integral 63

for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
Selecting the type of contactor breaker and protection module

Neutral point Type of Equipment Combination
1 connection
Neutral TNC
circuit
3-pole + PEN
scheme contactor breaker + protection module
LD1 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
connection (neutral and
PE combined) LD4 LD130p + LB1 LD03Lpp
LD4 LD030p + LB1 LD03Lpp
2 PEN
Note: the PEN conductor must not be isolated,

Neutral point Type of Equipment scheme Combination
connection circuit contactor breaker + protection module
Neutral TNS 3-pole LD1 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
connection (neutral and
3 PE separated) LD4 LC130p + LB1 LC03Lpp
LD4 LC030p + LB1 LC03Lpp
4 Note: all live conductors must be isolated. Neutral protection optional.
10

1/162
References 1

for control and protection of resistive circuits
in category AC-1
3-pole contactor breakers without protection module (1)

Without control test function, with padlocking facility
Rated
thermal
Maximum
operational
Maximum Breaking Number
operational capacity (Iq) of poles
Basic reference.
To be completed by adding
Weight 1
current I th current AC-1 voltage for the control voltage code (2)
T y 40 °C T y 40 °C Ue y 415 V
A A V kA kg
Black knob
63 63 690 50 3 LD1 LC030p 3.700
With control test function and padlocking facility 2

Rated Maximum Maximum Breaking Number Basic reference. Weight
thermal operational operational capacity (Iq) of poles To be completed by adding
current I th current AC-1 voltage for the control voltage code (2)
T y 40 °C T y 40 °C Ue y 415 V
A A V kA kg
Black knob (CNOMO. VDE 0113)
LD1 LD030p
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD130p 3.800 3
Red knob on yellow background (CNOMO. VDE 0113) Emergency Stop
63 63 690 50 3 LD4 LD030p 3.800
Protection modules (for customer assembly)

Thermal-magnetic (compensated)
Thermal
setting range
Magnetic
setting range
Number
of poles
Number of
protected
Reference Weight 4
(Irth min./Irth max.) (3…6 Irth max) poles
A A kg
10…13 39…78 3 3 LB1 LD03L16 0.780
13…18 54…108 3 3 LB1 LD03L21 0.780
18…25 75…150 3 3 LB1 LD03L22 0.780

5
LB1 LD03Lpp
23…32 95…190 3 3 LB1 LD03L53 0.780
28…40 120…240 3 3 LB1 LD03L55 0.780
35…50 150…300 3 3 LB1 LD03L57 0.780
45…63 190…380 3 3 LB1 LD03L61 0.780

6
)RUWKHXQLWWRIXQFWLRQLWPXVWEH¿WWHGZLWKDSURWHFWLRQPRGXOHWREHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\
Volts 24 36 42 48 110 120 220 230 240 380 415 440 480 500 600 660
400
50 Hz B
60 Hz BC
–
CC
D
–
E
CE
F
K
–
FC
M
LC
M
MC
U
MC
Q
–
N
–
N
UX
–
Q
S
–
–
S
Y
–
7
c (3) BD – – ED FD – – – – – – – – – – –
(3) For use on d.c., the unit is supplied with a converter, including coil suppression device.
10

1/163
1
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
6 T
RESE
9
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
10
1/164
References 1

Add-on blocks
Instantaneous auxiliary contact blocks (IP 20) (1)

For Type and number Composition Reference Weight
use on of blocks per unit kg
1
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4 1 block of 6 contacts comprising: LA1 LC010 0.280
or LD5 b 3 signalling contacts 2 1 –
Mounted ³FRQWDFWRUVWDWH´ – – 1
on RH side b 1 signalling contact
³FRQWURONQRELQDQ\
SRVLWLRQRWKHUWKDQ$XWR´ – – 1
2
b 1 signalling contact
tripped on short-circuit
b VLJQDOOLQJFRQWDFW³WULSSHG´ – – 1
1 block of 5 contacts comprising: LA1 LC012 0.220

b 3 signalling contacts 2 1 –
³FRQWDFWRUVWDWH´
b 1 signalling contact
1 – –
3
tripped on short-circuit 1 – –
b VLJQDOOLQJFRQWDFW³WULSSHG´
1 block of 4 contacts comprising: LA1 LC025 0.170

b 3 signalling contacts 2 1 –
³FRQWDFWRUVWDWH´ 1 1 –
b VLJQDOOLQJFRQWDFW³WULSSHG´
selectable by the user 4
1 block of 3 signalling contacts 2 1 – LA1 LC020 0.100
³FRQWDFWRUVWDWH´
LD4 1 control circuit isolating block 1 – – LA1 LC030 0.035

Mounted (1 or 2 blocks per unit)
on LH side
LD5 1 block of 3 signalling contacts 2 1 – LA1 LB021 0.100
5
Mounted ³FRQWDFWRUVWDWH´
on LH side
1 control circuit isolating block 2 – – LA1 LC031 0.100
comprising 2 contacts
Signalling contact block (IP 10) (1)

For
use on
Type and number
of blocks per unit
Composition Reference Weight
kg
6
N/O N/C C/O
LD1, LD4 1 block comprising 1 signalling – 1 – LA1 LC001 0.035
or LD5 FRQWDFW³FRQWDFWRUVWDWH´
Mounted on LH or RH side
(1) UL and CSA approved.

7
10

1/165
1
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
Off
O
T
RESE
10
1/166
References 1

Accessories
Electrical tripping and reset devices

For Type and number Basic reference. Weight
use on of devices per unit To be completed by adding
the control voltage code (1)
kg
1
LD1, LD4 1 undervoltage trip Time delay 0.2 s LA1 LC070p 0.150
or LD5
¿WWHGZLWKDQ Instantaneous LA1 LC072p 0.150
LA1 LC010 or
LA1 LC012
or 1 shunt trip Instantaneous LA1 LC071p 0.150
block
LD1, LD4
or LD5
1 remote electrical
reset device
24 V 50/60 Hz LA1 LC052B 0.320 2
¿WWHGZLWKDQ 42 V 50 Hz LA1 LC052E 0.320
LA1 LC010 or 48 V 50/60 Hz
LA1 LC012
add-on block
100/127 V LA1 LC052F 0.320
50/60 Hz
200/240 V
50/60 Hz
LA1 LC052M 0.320 3
Volts 24 48 110 120 220/230 240 380/400 415 440
50 Hz B E F – M U Q N N
60 Hz B E F F M M Q – N
4
10

1/167
1
2
AUTO
+
TRIP.
O
O
T
RESE
7
AUTO
+
TRIP.
T
RESE
AUTO
+
TRIP.
9 Off
O
RESE
T
10
1/168
References 1
Contactor breakers
Accessories and spare parts
Interface modules (1)

Mounting Type Control Operational Reference Weight
voltage
c
voltage
50/60 Hz 1
V V kg
On top of the Solid state 5…24 24…240 LA1 LD180BD 0.110
integral unit
Relay output 24 24…240 LA1 LD580BD 0.110
48 24…240 LA1 LD580ED 0.110

2
Replacement coils and voltage converters (1)
For c control circuit operation
Mounting For use Operational Consumption Description Reference (3) Weight
on integral voltage Inrush Sealed
c (2)
V W W kg
On top of the
integral unit
LDp LDpppBD 24 (4) 300 8 Coil LX1 LD0249 0.300 3
Converter LA1 LD080BD 0.150
LDp LDpppED 48 (4) 300 8 Coil LX1 LD0489 0.300
Converter LA1 LD080ED 0.150
LDp LDpppFD 110 300 8 Coil LX1 LD01109 0.300

4
Converter LA1 LD080FD 0.150
Suppressor module
Mounting Type Operational voltage Reference Weight
50/60 Hz
V kg
5
Clip-on RC circuit (Resistor-Capacitor) (5) y 250 LA9 D09982 0.010
(1) For reversing contactor breakers, order 2 interface modules or 2 voltage converters.
:KHQXVHGRQUHFWL¿HGVLQJOHSKDVHRUSKDVHVXSSO\WKHSHDNWRSHDNULSSOHYROWDJHPXVWEHHTXDOWRRUOHVVWKDQRI
the average voltage.
Operating limits 0.8 to 1.1 Uc for an ambient temperature y 40 °C.
,WLVHVVHQWLDOWKDWWKHYROWDJHFRQYHUWHUEHDVVRFLDWHGZLWKWKHVSHFL¿FFRLOLQGLFDWHG
(4) 24 V and 48 V converters can be operated by “Low level input”. In this case, the control circuit voltage must be the same as the
6
supply voltage (24 or 48 V).
(5) An RC circuit provides effective protection for circuits highly sensitive to high frequency interference. Voltage limited to 3 Uc
max. and oscillating frequency limited to 400 Hz max.
Slight increase in drop-out time (1.2 to 2 times the normal time).
10

1/169
References 1

Accessories
Protection accessories
Description For Sold in Unit Weight
1 Power terminal
use on
Upstream power
lots of
5
reference
LA9 LD701
kg
0.050
protection shroud terminals (L1, L2, L3)
Sealing cover Protection module 1 LA1 LC090 0.010
Mounting accessories
Description For Mounting Reference Weight
2 LA1 LC090 Mounting plate

use on
LD1, LD4, LD5
on
1 x 75 mm LA9 LD010
kg
0.450
7 rail or
2 x 32 mm
4 rails
Door interlock mechanisms (IP 54)

Type For Colour Unit Weight
3 Adjustable
use on
LD1
of knob
Red
reference
LA9 LC330
kg
0.400
from 0 to 185 mm
with extension Black LA9 LC331 0.400
(control knob mounted
on plate or door)
LD4, LD5 Red LA9 LC530 0.400
4 Black LA9 LC531 0.400
LA9 LD010
7
10

1/170
References 1

Coils (replacement parts)
a.c. operation
Rated control Average Inductance Voltage Reference Weight
circuit voltages
Uc 50 Hz Uc 60 Hz
resistance at of closed
20 °C ± 10 % circuit
code (1)
1
V V : H kg
– 24 0.213 0.045 BC LX1 LD020 0.300
24 – 0.323 0.071 B LX1 LD024 0.300
– 36 0.503 0.106 CC LX1 LD030 0.300

2
– 48 0.845 0.19 CE LX1 LD040 0.300
42 – 0.987 0.22 D LX1 LD042 0.300
48 – 1.26 0.29 E LX1 LD048 0.300
– 110 4.88 1 K LX1 LD090 0.300 3

– 115/120 5.89 1.18 FC LX1 LD100 0.300
LX1 LDppp
110 – 6.48 1.48 F LX1 LD110 0.300
127 – 9.80 2.13 G LX1 LD127 0.300
– 220 19.82 4.2 LC LX1 LD180 0.300 4

– 230/240 23.24 4.5 MC LX1 LD190 0.300
220/230 – 30.51 6.7 M LX1 LD220 0.300
240 – 37.66 7.9 U LX1 LD240 0.300
– 440 80.46 16.7 UX LX1 LD360 0.300

5
380/400 460/480 93.63 20 Q LX1 LD380 0.300
415/440 – 116.46 23.7 N LX1 LD415 0.300
500 575/600 152.18 31 S LX1 LD500 0.300
660 – 290.80 60 Y LX1 LD660 0.300

6
Consumption at 50 Hz: inrush (cosMWR9$VHDOHGFRVM: 0.28) 20 to 30 VA.
Consumption at 60 Hz: inrush (cos MWR9$VHDOHGFRVM: 0.30) 24 to 36 VA.
d.c. operation
7KHLQWHJUDOFDQRSHUDWHRQDGFVXSSO\ZKHQ¿WWHGZLWKDVSHFLDOFRLODQGFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
7
voltage converter: see page 1/169
(1) Coil voltage reference code, used to complete the basic reference when ordering an integral
unit.
10

1/171
Operation TeSys motor starters - open version
Auxiliary contact states
according to the positions of the control knob
LD1 LD4 Auxiliary contact actuators

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1 Auto +0
A1
A1
A2
A2
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC001 LC020 LC030
2
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
(53)
08
98
96
98
63
13
23
31
16
18
06
08
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
96
98
Contact open
ou
Contact closed
(54)
05
95
95
64
14
24
32
15
05
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
95
95
LD1 LD4
Off + control test function
3 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Off
4 13 23 31
14 24 32
16 18
15
06 08
05
96 98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
08
05
98
95
13 23 31
14 24 32
96 98
95 95
41
42
13 23 31
14 24 32
53
54
On, contactor open

AUTO AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
5 14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
On, contactor closed

AUTO AUTO 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31
16 18 06 08 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
6
Off after overload
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
7 Tripped on overload
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Tripped on short-circuit
8 TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Off after short-circuit

TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
9 14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 42 14 24 32 54
Manual reset
TRIP. + TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 41 13 23 31 53
05 95 95 95 95 14 24 32
10 RESET RESET
14 24 32 15 14 24 32 05 14 24 32 42 54
General : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

pages 1/140 to 1/145 pages 1/146 to 1/155 pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 and 1/175
1/172
Operation TeSys motor starters - open version
Reversing contactor breakers integral 63
Auxiliary contact states
according to the positions of the control knob
LD5 Auxiliary contact actuators

1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
Auto +0
ou
1
A1
A1
A2
A2
U U U
Auxiliary contacts
LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC025 LA1 LA1 LA1 LA1
LC020 LC001 LC021 LC031
2
13
23
31
96
98
13
23
31
96
98
13
23
31
41
06
08
13
23
31
08
13
23
31
53
63
16
18
98
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
ou
Contact open
14
24
32
95
14
24
32
95
95
14
24
32
42
05
14
24
32
05
14
24
32
54
64
15
95
Contact closed
Off + control test function

13 23 31 16 18 06
08
96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63 3
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Off
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64 4
On, reversing contactor open
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, closed
5
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
On, closed
AUTO 13 23 31 16 18 06
08
96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63 6
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Tripped on overload
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
TRIP. +
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
7
Off after overload
TRIP. +
13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Tripped on short-circuit 8
TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
08
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Off after short-circuit

TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06
08
05
96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
9
14 24 32 15 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
Manual reset
TRIP. + 13 23 31 16 18 06 08 96 98 13 23 31 08 98 13 23 31 96 98 13 23 31 41 13 23 31 53 63
RESET
14 24 32 15 05 95 14 24 32 05 95 14 24 32 95 95 14 24 32 42 14 24 32 54 64
10
General : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

pages 1/140 to 1/145 pages 1/146 to 1/155 pages1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/174 and 1/175
1/173
Dimensions, TeSys motor starters - open version
mounting integral 63 contactor breakers

Control circuit: a.c. Control circuit: d.c.
1 LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 LDp LDp30 + LBp LD03 + LA1 LD080
LA1 LD080
104,5
121,5
97,5
128,5
210
243
45
250
210
45
121,5
100,5
121,5
100,5
146 = 28 =
16,5
146 = 28 =
16,5
158,5 = = 158,5 = =
192 90
3 192 90
Reversing contactor breakers integral 63 Current limiter

LD5 LDp30 + LBp LD03M LA9 LB920
0
4
129,5
153,5
146
103
115
275
210
45
121,5
6 51
100,5
5 53,5
148 45
16,5
160,5 59 63 59
194 181
Add-on blocks
6 For mounting on contactor breakers integral 63
LA1 LC012 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC052 LA1 LC020 LA1 LC030 LA1 LC025
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC07p (1 ou 2) LA LC001
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC001
7 LA1 LC012
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC025
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
13 11 26 51 12 9 12 11
9
8 For mounting on reversing contactor breakers integral 63

LA1 LC021, LC025 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC010 LA1 LC052p LA1 LC020
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC001 LA1 LC07pp
LA1 LC001
LA1 LC021 LA1 LC031 LA1 LC001
LA1 LC025 LA1 LC021 LA1 LC012
9
LA1 LC010
LA1 LC070
LA1 LC071
LA1 LC072
10 13 12 26 13 11 26 51 12
11
General: References: Schemes:

pages 1/140 to 1/145 pages 1/160 to 1/171 pages 1/176 and 1/177
1/174
Mounting (continued) TeSys motor starters - open version
Mounting
On 75 mm 6 rail, with mounting plate LA9 LD010 On 32 mm 4 rails, at 220 mm centres On pre-slotted mounting plate AM1 P
1
137,5
266
210
210
220
LA9 LD010
210
DZ5 ME9
128,5
c 33 G [0 c 15 G
2
c AF1 EA5 G
75
a b c G c G c G
LD1 266 137,5 192 28 LD1 192 28 LD1 192 28
LD4 266 137,5 192 28 LD4 192 28 LD4 192 28
LD5 282 153,5 194 63 LD5 194 63 LD5 194 63 3
With mounting plate LA9 LD010
SOn 32 mm 4 rails, at 120 mm centres
LA9 LD010
DZ5 ME5 4
G
110
120
c G
LD1 192 78
68
40
c 31
LD4 192 78 5
LD5 194 94
Flush mounting (contactor breakers and reversing contactor breakers) Minimum electrical
clearance
6
30
4 (1)
a a a1 a2
LD1 LD030 90 – –
(3)
LD4 LDp30 90 – –
==
46
LD5 LDp30 181 – –

(2)
7
1
LA1 LC010 – 13 –
a1
LA1 LC012 – 13 –
a2
LA1 LC010 + LA1 LC052p – – 51
30
LA1 LC012 + LA1 LC052p – – 51
(1) Maximum door thickness for interlocking by LD4 and LD5.

(2) Centre of operating handle.
(3) Fixing centre.
Adjustable door interlock mechanisms LA9 LC33p and LA9 LC53p
8
For mounting on LD4 LDp30 and LD5 LDp30 Door drillings
9
105
105
275
= =
54
243
65
105
105
105
= =
54
54 207…357 (LD4) = 28 = 45
209…359 (LD5) =
90
= 59 63
181
59 10
General: References: Schemes:

1/175
Schemes TeSys motor starters - open version
Contactor breakers integral 63 with protection module LBp Reversing contactor breakers
integral 63
1 LD1 LD030 + LB1 LD03p LD4 LDp30 + LB1 LD03p
with protection module LBp
LD5 LDp30 + LB1 LD03M ou LD03P
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
1/L1
1/L1
3/L2
5/L3
3/L2
5/L3
2
A1
A1
A2
A2
A1
A1
A2
A2
Q1 Q1
3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
LB6 LD03M LB6 LD03M
4
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
2/T1
4/T2
6/T3
Add-on blocks
5 For contactor breakers LD4
Mounted on LH side
For contactor breakers LD1 or LD4 and reversing contactor breakers LD5
Mounted on RH side
Breaker
Isolator LA1 LC010 LA1 LC012 LA1 LC020 LA1 LC025 LA1 LC001
LA1 LC030
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
13
23
31
41
(64) (63)
53
53
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
14
24
32
42
54
54
6 Trip signallingt
96
98
1 or 2 LA1 LC030
98
98
96
95
95
95
95
Short-circuit
signalling
06
08
08
For reversing contactor breakers LD5
7 Mounted on LH side
05
05
LA1 LC001 LA1 LC021 Auto +0

16
18
41
13
23
31
15
Control knob
42
14
24
32
position
8 Isolator
LA1 LC031
53
63
54
64
10
General: References: Dimensions, mounting:

1/176
Tripping devices (1) for LD1, LD4, LD5 Remote electrical reset devices (1) for LD1 to LD5
LA1 LC071 LA1 LC070, LC072 LA1 LC052p
The use of instantaneous auxiliary

1
C1
D1 TRIP + contact block LA1 LC020 prevents

U< RESET the use of tripping devices or electrical
reset devices
C2
D2
B4 B1
M
B2
B3
2
)RUFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDQGUHYHUVLQJFRQWDFWRUEUHDNHUVDOUHDG\¿WWHGZLWKDQ/$/&RU/$/&LQVWDQWDQHRXVDX[LOLDU\FRQWDFWEORFN
3
Interface modules
LA1 LD180 LA1 LD580
A1 A1
+ E1 + E1
– E2 – E2 4
A2 A2
Voltage converter LA1 LD080 (supply with contactor breakers for c control circuit operation)
Switching by control contact Switching by “Low level” input 5
24 or 48 V 24 or 48 V
E1 E1 E1
+ A1 + A1 + A1
Supply
Low E3
E3 level +
– (0V)
E2
A2 – (0V)
E2
A2 –
input
(0V)
–
E2
A2 6
10
General: References: Dimensions, mounting:

1/177
characteristics 1
Adaptors for use with busbar systems
Presentation
Reducing the installation time of components is an important factor that also
1 increases productivity.
The comprehensive range of adaptors and mounting accessories allows this
objective to be achieved.
There are numerous advantages:
b saving of space in enclosures,
b reduced size of enclosures,
b reduced wiring time,
2 b increased protection of personnel against accidental direct contact (IP 20) through
the use of insulated mounting rails,
b ÀH[LELOLW\DQGPRGXODULW\RIHTXLSPHQW
b reliable operation of the equipment with easier maintenance.
Description
Power distribution is achieved by a 3-pole or 5-pole busbar system.
3 LA9 Z32199
The adaptors clip directly onto the busbar system, providing instantaneous electrical
connection. Busbar system pitch: 40 or 60 mm.
These adaptors allow mounting of motor starter components such as:
b GV2 ME, GV2 P or GV3 ME motor circuit-breakers,
b TeSys D and TeSys K contactors up to 38 A,
b integral 63 contactor breakers,
They are available in different sizes to allow easy installation of varying component
4 combinations.
These adaptors can be used in conjunction with interface modules communicating
with an AS-Interface cabling system. This enables motor starters to be set up on an
AS-Interface cabling system, bringing all the advantages of the 2 technologies.
General characteristics
5 Degree of protection IP 20 with insulated mounting rail LA9 Z098pp
Temperature resistance °C 120
Rated frequency of current Hz 50/60
Rated operational current Depending on type of busbar mm 12 x 5 12 x 10 15 x 5 20 x 5 20 x 10 25 x 5 30 x 5 30 x 10
and at 35 °C A 200 360 250 320 520 400 450 630
&RHI¿FLHQW.WREHDSSOLHG °C 35 40 45 50 55 60
according to ambient temperature
6 Rated insulation voltage
K
V
1 0.9 0.75 0.65 0.55
690 conforming to IEC 60947-1 and NF C 20-040
0.35

Rated permissible With insulated busbar support LA9 Z11098 and Z11099 LA9 Z11100 and Z11101
peak current Busbar dimensions mm 12 x 5 12 x 10 12 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 5 30 x 10
Rated current kA 35 35 30 35 35 45 55
Maximum let-through energy A 2s 1 x 108 4 x 108 1 x 108 11 x 108 11 x 108 6.2 x 108 24.8 x 108
7 6XSSRUW¿[LQJE\VFUHZV
Cabling, by connectors
mm 4x6
LA9 Z11103
4x5
LA9 Z11104 LA9 Z11105
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Flexible cable with cable end mm2 4 35 16 70 120 120
Multi-strand cable mm2 4 35 16 70 35 120
Solid cable mm2 4 35 – – – –
Tightening torque N.m 1x6 1 x 10 3 x 12
8 Characteristics of adaptors for use with busbar systems (3-phase)
Adaptor type LA9 Z 32196 32199 32343, 32344 32345 32253 32248
32228 32200 40132, 60132 32249
32229 32208 to 40232, 60232
210 32232
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 60529 IP 20
9 Conductor c.s.a.
(colour: black)
mm2 4
AWG 12
6
AWG 10
6
AWG 10
10
AWG 8
16
–
2.5
AWG 22/14
Type of conductor insulation PVC 105 °C –
Permissible current A 25 32 32 63 80 15
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to NF C 20-040 and IEC 60947-1 250
Rated peak current kA 6 6 6 10 10 –
Maximum let-through energy A2 s 2 x 105 2 x 105 2 x 105 3 x 105 3 x 105 –
10
References : Dimensions :
pages 1/180 to 1/187 pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/178
Characteristics 1

Short-circuit resistance
Determining the spacing between busbar supports (1)

Busbar system with 40 mm pitch Busbar system with 60 mm pitch
1
Peak current Ipk (kA)
Peak current Ipk (kA)

50 70
40
12 x 5 and 12 x 10
60
30 x 10 2
30 50
30 x 5
20 40 12 x 10
and 20 x 10
12 x 5
3
10 30
0 20
200 300 400 500 600 200 300 400 500 600
%XVEDUVXSSRUW¿[LQJFHQWUHVPP %XVEDUVXSSRUW¿[LQJFHQWUHVPP
(1) Depending on the prospective short-circuit current

4
Current capacity of busbars
For an ambient temperature of 35°C and a busbar temperature of 65°C
C.s.a. mm2 12 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 25 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10
Permissible current A 200 250 320 400 450 360 520 630
,IWKHDERYHFOLPDWLFFRQGLWLRQVDUHPRGL¿HGFRQVXOWWKHFKDUWEHORZWR¿QGWKHFRUUHFWLRQIDFWRU.2 to be applied. 5
Factor K2
Ambient temperature
°C
2,2 0
5
2,1
10
2,0 15
1,9
20
25
6
30
1,8
35
1,7 40
45
1,6 50
55
1,5
1,4
60
65
7
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
0,9
8
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
9
0,4
0,3
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125
Busbar temperature (°C)
Example: in normal operating conditions, a set of 30 x 10 tinned busbars can withstand a continuous load of 630 A.
800 A
)RUDORDGRI$WKHFRUUHFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQW.2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 630 A ). It follows that the temperature rise of the busbars will be
10
82.5 °C.
References : Dimensions :
pages 1/180 to 1/187 pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/179
1
1
hhh
40 mm : LA9 Z32228
1 60 mm : LA9 Z32229
GV2 ME, GV2 P
2
40 mm : LA9 Z32196
3 GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06…K12
LC1, LP1, LP4 K06…K12
5 40 mm : LA9 Z32199
60 mm : LA9 Z32200
6
GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40132
60 mm : LA9 Z60132
7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
8 LC1 D09…D38
9
LC1 D09…D38
10
1/180
References 1
Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - non-reversing

Motor starter type Operational Width x height Sold in Unit Weight
current AC-3
440 V
of adaptor lots of reference
1
A mm kg
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1, 12 45 x 139 4 LA9 Z32196 0.788
LP4 K06…K12
or GV2 P 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z32228 0.984
GV2 ME + LC1 D09…D38 32 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z40132 0.984

or GV2 P
54 x 182 4 LA9 Z32199 1.144
2

current AC-3 of adaptor lots of reference
440 V
A mm kg
3
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1, 12 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z32229 0.984
LP4 K06…K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC1 D09…D38 32 45 x 182 4 LA9 Z60132 0.984
or GV2 P
54 x 182 4 LA9 Z32200 1.220
4
10
Characteristics : Dimensions :
pages 1/178 and 1/179 pages 1/188 and 1/189
1/181
1
1
1 60 mm : LA9 Z32210
GV2 ME, GV2 P

2
40 mm : LA9 Z32232
3 GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2, LP2, LP5 K06…K12
LC2, LP2, LP5 K06…K12
5 40 mm : LA9 Z32208
60 mm : LA9 Z32209
6 GV2 ME, GV2 P
40 mm : LA9 Z40232
60 mm : LA9 Z60232
7
GV2 ME, GV2 P
LC2 D09…D38
9
LC2 D09…D38
10
1/182
Adaptors for busbar systems with 40 mm pitch - reversing

current AC-3
440 V
of adaptor lots of reference
1
A mm kg
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2, 12 90 x 139 2 LA9 Z32232 0.788
LP5 K06…K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09…D38 32 90 x 182 4 LA9 Z40232 1.884
or GV2 P
135 x 182 1 LA9 Z32208 0.638 2
Adaptors for busbar systems with 60 mm pitch - reversing
Motor starter type Operational Width x height Sold in Unit reference Weight
current AC-3 of adaptor lots of
440 V
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2,

A
12
mm
90 x 182 4 LA9 Z32210
kg
1.868
3
LP5 K06…K12
or GV2 P
GV2 ME + LC2 D09…D38 32 90 x 182 4 LA9 Z60232 1.948
or GV2 P
135 x 182 1 LA9 Z32209 0.651
10
1/183
1
1
60 mm : LA9 Z32253
3
GV3 ME
60 mm : LA9 Z32345
7
LD1 LD, LD4 LD
10
1/184

Motor starter type Operational current AC-3 Width x height Reference Weight
440 V
A
of adaptor
mm kg
1
integral LD1, LD4 LD 63 108 x 244 LA9 Z32345 0.887
GV3 ME 80 72 x 182 LA9 Z32253 0.347
10
1/185
1
1
LA9 Z11099 LA9 Z11098 LA9 Z11103 LA9 Z32936 LA9 Z32 LA9 Z098
40 mm
3
4 LA9 Z11098 LA9 Z11099
LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z11101

LA9 Z32248
5 LA9 Z32249
LA9 Z91413 LA9 Z11105 LA9 Z32 LA9 Z098
LA9 Z11102
6
60 mm
9
LA9 Z11100 LA9 Z11104 LA9 Z32248
LA9 Z32249
LA9 Z11118 LA9 Z11101
10 LA9 Z11105
1/186
Accessories for busbar sets with 40 mm pitch

Description Sold in Unit Weight
Busbar system supports (1) 3-pole

lots of
10
reference
LA9 Z11098
kg
1.040
1
3-pole + N + T 10 LA9 Z11099 1.400
Insulated rails For busbars, thickness 5 mm 10 LA9 Z09818 0.420

(length 1 m)
For busbars, thickness 10 mm 10 LA9 Z09820 0.940
Connector Capacity 35 mm2 50 LA9 Z11103 2.300

2
Protective cover For connector LA9 Z11103 1 LA9 Z91413 0.160
Side module, 13.5 x 182 mm For increasing the width of the adaptor 4 LA9 Z32936 0.472
Plug-in terminal blocks

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)
Width 54 mm 1 LA9 Z32248 0.066
3
Width 45 mm 1 LA9 Z32249 0.055
Accessories for busbar sets with 60 mm pitch

Description Sold in Unit Weight
lots of reference kg
Busbar system supports (1) 3-pole 10 LA9 Z11100 2.100 4
3-pole + N 10 LA9 Z11101 2.660
Insulated terminal shroud 3-pole 10 LA9 Z11102 0.310
4-pole 10 LA9 Z11118 0.380
Insulated rails For busbars, thickness 5 mm 10 LA9 Z09819 0.800

5
(length 1 m)
For busbars, thickness 10 mm 10 LA9 Z09820 0.940
Connectors Capacity 70 mm2 25 LA9 Z11104 1.875
2
3-pole capacity 120 mm 1 LA9 Z11105 (2) 0.719
6
Protective cover For connector LA9 Z11104 1 LA9 Z91413 0.160
Plug-in terminal blocks Width 54 mm 1 LA9 Z32248 0.066

on LA9 Z32ppp (7-pole)
Width 45 mm 1 LA9 Z32249 0.055
(1) For dimensions and rated operational current, see pages 1/178 and 1/179
7
(2) Supplied complete with protective cover
10
1/187
Dimensions 1

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
GV2 ME or P + LCp, LPp K GV2 ME or P + LCp D
1
x
x
x
e1
e1
e1
40/60 40/60
40/60 40/60
40/60 40/60
b
b
2
b
c a
c a c a
3 Motor starter combinations, non-reversing

Motor starter type a b 40 mm system 60 mm system e1
c Adaptor c Adaptor
a c or reference a c or Other reference
LC(1) LC(1)
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 152 125 125 LA9 Z32196 – – – – 40
4 GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 152 145 145 LA9 Z32196 – – – – 40
GV2 ME + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 184 125 125 LA9 Z32228 135 135 – LA9 Z32229 40
GV2 P + LC1, LP1 or LP4 K06 to K12 45 184 145 145 LA9 Z32228 155 155 – LA9 Z32229 40
GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18 45 200 139 139 LA9 Z40132 149 149 – LA9 Z60132 40
5 GV2 P + LC1 D09 to D18 45 200 142 142 LA9 Z40132 152 152 – LA9 Z60132 40
GV2 P + LC1 D25 to D38 45 200 146 146 LA9 Z40132 156 156 – LA9 Z60132 40
6 GV2 ME + LC1 D09 to D18 54 200 131 137 LA9 Z32199 141 147 – LA9 Z32200 33
7 integral 63 LD1, LD4 108 244 – – – – – 250 LA9 Z32345 50
GV3 ME 72 182 – – – – – 180 LA9 Z32253 50
(1) LC = Low Consumption
8 X electrical clearance Ue y 415 V Ue = 440 V Ue = 500 and 600 V

GV2 ME 40 40 40
GV2 P 40 80 120
integral 63 20 20 20
GV3 ME 40 40 50
10
Characteristics : References :
1/188
Dimensions (continued) 1

Motor starter combinations for customer assembly
Dimensions
GV2 ME or P + LC2, LP2 K integral
1
x
x
e1
e1
40/60 40/60
60
b
60
c a
c a
Motor starter combinations, reversing 3

Motor starter type a b 40 mm system 60 mm system e1
c Adaptor c Adaptor
a c or reference a c or LD5 reference
LC(1) LC(1)
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 150 125 125 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40
GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 150 145 145 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40 4
GV2 ME + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 184 – – – 135 135 – LA9 Z32210 40
GV2 P + LC2, LP2 K06 to K12 90 184 – – – 155 155 – LA9 Z32210 40
5
GV2 ME +LC2 D25 to D38 90 200 146 146 LA9 Z40232 156 156 – LA9 Z60232 40
6
GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12 90 150 – 125 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40

7
GV2 P + LP5 K06 to K12 90 150 – 145 LA9 Z32232 – – – – 40
GV2 ME + LP5 K06 to K12 90 184 – – – – 135 – LA9 Z32210 40
GV2 P + LP5 K06 and K12 90 184 – – – – 155 – LA9 Z32210 40
(1) LC = Low Consumption 8
10
Characteristics : References :
1/189
Selection guide Installation system
7H6\V4XLFN¿WIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Components with spring terminals
Functions Assembly and connection of motor starter components with spring terminals, without
using tools
1 Product type Power circuit pre-wiring

components
Control-command pre-wiring components for
TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV2 ME
For contactors TeSys D (9 to 25 A)
5 Type of starter Direct and reversing Direct Reversing
Coil control – Yes No Yes No
Use with motor starters Limited to 60 A (Ith) –
6 Limited to 8 starters (1)
Number of motor starters 1 –
Type of connection or bus – –
7 Number of channels – –
References LAD 3p LAD 9AP3pp
Pages 1/197 1/199
8 (1) With TeSys circuit-breakers GV2 ME and upstream terminal block LAD 3B1.
10
1/190
Communication with the processing part
Control-command pre-wiring components for

TeSys motor circuit-breakers GV3 P
Splitter box Parallel interface module, with Advantys STB
network interface module
1
TeSys D (40 to 65 A) – –
Direct Reversing – – 5
Yes Yes – –
– – –
6
– 8 starters per splitter box 4 starters per module
– HE 10 Modbus Plus, Fipio, CANopen, Ethernet, TCP/IP,

3UR¿EXV'3,17(5%86'HYLFH1HW
– 16 inputs/12 outputs –
7
LU9 G02 STB EPI2145
1/199 1/199
10
1/191
Presentation Installation system
7H6\V4XLFN¿WLVDPRGXODUV\VWHPZKLFKVWDQGDUGLVHVDQGVLPSOL¿HVVHWWLQJXSRI
motor starters with its pre-wired control and power circuits.
,QVWDOODWLRQRIDPRWRUVWDUWHULVWKHUHIRUHTXLFNVLPSOHVDIHDQGÀH[LEOH,QDGGLWLRQ
1 this system:
b enables the motor starter to be customised at a later date,
b reduces maintenance time and
b optimises panel space by reducing the number of terminals and intermediate
interfaces and the amount of ducting.
System for motor starters with spring terminals

2 Motor starters with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers
b From 0 to 18 A max.,
b TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers combined with TeSys D contactors from 9 to 25 A
(spring terminal version),
b 4XLFN¿WSUHZLUHGSRZHUDQGFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQV
3 Motor starters with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers

b From 9 to 65 A max.,
b TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers combined with TeSys D contactors from 40 to 65 A
(spring terminal version),
b 4XLFN¿WSUHZLUHGFRQWUROFRQQHFWLRQVRQO\
b For pre-wired power connections, use busbar sets from the TeSys D, 40 to 65 A
contactor range (see page 5/85).
4
Motor starter with GV2 ME circuit-breakers This range comprises pre-wiring components for:
b the power circuits,
b the control circuits.
Power circuit pre-wiring components

(motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
5 b a power circuit connection kit comprising, for each starter, a plate for mounting
the contactor and the circuit-breaker and two power connection modules,
b a power splitter box for 2 or 4 starters,
b an upstream terminal block for a power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
b an outgoing terminal block for connection of the motor power supply cables and
the earth cables (6 mm2).
6 Note: with GV3 circuit-breakers, no accessories are required for pre-wiring of the
power circuit. The GV3 Ppp outgoing terminal block can be removed.
This circuit-breaker is also sold with only one terminal block (reference: GV3 Ppp1).
Control circuit pre-wiring components

(motor starters with TeSys GV2 and GV3 circuit-breakers)
b a control circuit connection module which plugs directly into the contactor and
7 Motor starter with GV3 P circuit-breakers
the circuit-breaker on each starter. This module incorporates status and control data
for this motor starter.
b a parallel wiring module which concentrates the data of each motor starter:
v HE 10 connector, for centralised applications. Data is transmitted to the PLC via
the Advantys Telefast pre-wired system.
v STB, designed for decentralised automation architectures. This module is suitable
IRUXVHLQDQ$GYDQW\V67%FRQ¿JXUDWLRQIRUFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH3/&YLDD¿HOGEXV
8
10
Description : Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

pages 1/194 and 1/195 pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/196 to 1/199 pages 1/202 and 1/203 pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/192
Presentation (continued) Installation system
Control/command
HE 10 connection
1
1 3
1 Automation platform
2 Connection cable
TSXCDPpp or ABFH20pp 2 2
3 Splitter box LU9 G02
2
Connection on bus using Advantys STB (1)

&RQ¿JXUDWLRQH[DPSOH(for motor starter applications only):
Power supply module

3
Module STB PDT 3100
Connection base STB XBA 2200
Terminal block STB XTB 1130
Parallel interface module (2)
Module STB EPI 2145
Connection base STB XBA 3000 4
Network interface module (3)
CANopen STB NCO 1010 (4)
Fipio STB NFP 2210
Ethernet TCP/IP STB NIP 2210
InterBus STB NIB 1010 (4)
3UR¿EXV'3
4 Network interface module
5 Supply module DeviceNet
STB NDP 1010 (4)
STB NDN 1010 (4) 5
6 Parallel interface module Modbus Plus STB NMP 2210
Terminal block STB WTS 2120
4 5 6
7H6\V4XLFN¿W/$'$3pp used with modules APP1 Cpp

6
7
7 7H6\V4XLFN¿WPRGXOH 9
8 Adapter plate APP 2CX
9 Splitter box LU9 G02 for 8 direct motor
10
starters, with channel connections on the
APP 1C module side by two HE 10 8
connectors (20-way) and on theTeSys
4XLFN¿WVLGHE\5-FRQQHFWRUV
10 Connection cable APP 2AH40H060 7 8
The motor starter is connected to an APP 1Cp module 7 using an adapter plate
APP 2CX 8 and a connection cable APP 2AH40H060 10.
Information is available on the module for each motor starter:
9
b 1 output: motor control,
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status.
(1) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
(2) For 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters.
(3) Reference to be selected according to the network used.
(4) Optimised version. 10
Description : Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

1/193
Description Installation system
1 5 6 Power components
(only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
1 Power kits LAD 3p
Each motor starter requires a power kit which consists of a plate 1DQGWZR4XLFN¿W
technology power connection modules 2.
The plate is used for mounting TeSys D contactors 3 (9 to 25 A, direct or reversing,
ZLWKVSULQJWHUPLQDOVDQG¿WWHGZLWKDFRUGFFRLODQGWKH*90(FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
4 only. This plate is mounted on two 35 mm 7 rails or is screwed onto a base plate.
The two power connection modules 2a and 2b are identical, whatever the rating of
2 the contactor up to 18 A.
The upper power connection module 2a connects the power between the splitter box
4 and the circuit-breaker.
The lower power connection module 2b connects the power between the circuit-
breaker and the contactor.
2a
Splitter boxes LAD 32p
3 Splitter boxes 5 are available for 2 or 4 starters.
They can be combined to create motor starters up to 60 A per power supply.
A reversing starter occupies a width equivalent to that of 2 direct starters.
2b Direct supply of power to the splitter boxes is possible up to 25 A (4 mm2).
3 Upstream terminal block LAD 3B1

4 The upstream terminal block 6 performs two functions:
b power supply up to 60 A (16 mm2),
7 b power supply between two connected splitter boxes.
7KHXSVWUHDPWHUPLQDOEORFNFRQQHFWVWRWKHVSOLWWHUER[XVLQJ4XLFN¿WWHFKQRORJ\,W
is positioned on the splitter box or straddling two splitter boxes and takes up a width
equivalent to two motor starters.
5 Outgoing terminal block LAD 331

The outgoing terminal block 7 performs two functions:
b connection of the motor power supply cables up to 6 mm2,
b connection of the motor earth cables.
In addition, the terminal block enables quick connection and disconnection for
maintenance, avoiding the risk of phase reversal.
The outgoing terminal block connects to the downstream spring terminals on the
6 FRQWDFWRUXVLQJ4XLFN¿WWHFKQRORJ\
10
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/194
Description (continued) Installation system
1 Control/command components
Control circuit connection modules LAD 9 AP3 pp
The control circuit connection module 1 plugs directly into the control terminals on
the contactor and on the TeSys GV2 ME or TeSys GV3 P motor circuit-breaker, in the
1
location provided for the front-mounting block.
It is compatible with all contactor ratings up to 18 A for TeSys GV2 ME and 65 A for
TeSys GV3 P.
Mechanical locking 2 of the system onto the top of the contactor ensures a perfect
connection, whatever the operating conditions (vibrations, knocks, etc.).
These modules are available in 4 versions: for direct or reversing starter, with or
without contactor coil interface relay.
2
The coil control can be a.c. or d.c., up to a 250 V and c 130 V.
The version without relay is designed to control the contactor coils with no interface,
at 24 V d.c.
The version with relay has a connector for connecting the contactor power supply.
Module LAD9 AP3pp incorporates, in its lower part, several external connectors:
3 RJ45 connector, for connecting the automation system.
3
4 2-way connector, for connecting the contactor power supply (only on versions with
relay).
5 2-way connector, for connecting an external contact in series with the contactor coil
(supplied complete with shunt)
2 3 4 5 Parallel wiring modules 4

The parallel wiring system makes it possible to connect motor starters which
LQFRUSRUDWH7H6\V4XLFN¿WWHFKQRORJ\WRWKHSURFHVVLQJXQLW3/&TXLFNO\DQG
without any need for tools. The parallel wiring module provides the status and
command information for each motor starter.
Control connection modules LAD9 AP3pp are connected to the parallel wiring
modules using RJ45 cables LU9Rpp 6, which are available in different lengths.
The following information is available for each motor starter:
b 2 inputs: circuit-breaker status and contactor status,
5
1
b 1 output: contactor coil control.
A direct motor starter uses one RJ45 channel.
A reversing motor starter uses two RJ45 channels.
Note: for motor starters built using TeSys GV3 circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors, the
4XLFN¿WSUHZLUHGV\VWHPDOORZVWKHFRQWDFWRUWREHPRXQWHGEHORZWKHFLUFXLWEUHDNHURU
mounting of the two devices side by side. 6
Parallel wiring module LU9 G02
This module 7 enables connection of up to 8 direct or 4 reversing motor starters
directly to the I/O modules of PLCs. It is used with the Advantys Telefast pre-wiring
system (1).
This splitter box is optimised for use with card TSX DMZ28DTK.
7
Dedicated parallel interface module STB EPI 2145 (2)
This module enables 4 direct or 2 reversing motor starters to be connected via the
Advantys STB distributed I/O solution. With STB network interface modules, motor
starters can be connected to the following communication networks: Modbus Plus,
),3,2&$1RSHQ(WKHUQHW7&3,33UR¿EXV'3,17(5%86DQG'HYLFH1HW
(1) Please consult our catalogue “Power supplies, splitter boxes and interfaces”.
8
(2) Please consult our catalogue "Advantys STB I/O. The open solution".
7 6
9
10
Presentation: Characteristics: References: Dimensions: Schemes:

1/195
1
LAD 3B1
2
LAD 352
GV2 MEpp3
4 LC1 Dpp3
Power circuit pre-wiring

components
Direct starter
LAD 331
LC2 Dpp3
9 Power circuit pre-wiring

components
Reversing starter
10
1/196
References Installation system
Power circuit pre-wiring components (only for motor starters with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers)
Description Maximum Application Sold in Reference Weight
Upstream terminal block

connection c.s.a.
16 mm2 (1) Power supply of 1 or 2
lots of
1 LAD 3B1
kg
0.212
1
power splitter boxes
LAD 3B1
Description Extension by Number of starters Reference Weight
kg
Power splitter box, 60 A LAD 32p 2 LAD 322 0.120
4 LAD 324 0.240 2

Description Composition Reference Weight
kg
LAD 324
Direct starter
Power connection kit 1 plate LAD 311 for GV2 ME and LAD 352 0.078
2 power connection modules LAD 341 3
Reversing starter
To build a reversing starter, order 2 kits LAD 352
Description Maximum Application Sold in Reference Weight

connection c.s.a. lots of kg
Outgoing terminal block 6 mm2 Connection of
motor cables
10 LAD 331 0.050 4
Description No. of Sold in Unit Weight
starters lots of reference kg
Plate for mounting a 1 10 LAD 311 0.042
LAD 352 GV2 ME circuit-breaker and a contactor
Power connection module 1 10 LAD 341 0.018
5
(1) Cables with one end pre-crimped are available to allow fast connection. References:
1 set of 3 x 6 mm 2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B061, length 2 m: LAD 3B062 and length 3 m: LAD 3B063),
1 set of 3 x 10 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B101, length 2 m: LAD 3B102 and length 3 m: LAD 3B103),
1 set of 3 x 16 mm2 cables (length 1 m: LAD 3B161, length 2 m: LAD 3B162 and length 3 m: LAD 3B163).
LAD 331
10
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:

pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/194 and 1/195 pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/202 and 1/203 pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/197
LAD 32p
STB EPI 2145
GV2 MEpp3
2
LC1 Dpp3 LC2 Dpp3
4 LU9 G02
LAD 9AP3D1 LAD 9AP3D2
6
GV3 Ppp
7 LC2 DppA3
LC1 DppA3
Note: Circuit-breakers TeSys GV3 P and contactors LC1 D40A3 to D65A3 can be mounted side by side, using a set of S-shape busbars (GV3 S).
10
1/198
References (continued) Installation system
Control-command pre-wiring components

Description TeSys D Type of coil Type of Reference Weight
Control connection modules

coil voltage
a 12... 250 V or
control relay
Electromechanical
starter
Direct LAD 9AP31
kg
0.150
1
c 5...130 V Reversing LAD 9AP32 0.200
c 24 V Without relay Direct LAD 9AP3D1 0.140

Reversing LAD 9AP3D2 0.190
Parallel wiring modules (c 24 V) 2

Description Connectors Reference Weight
LAD 9AP3p PLC side Motor starter side kg
Splitter box 2 x HE 10 8 x RJ45 LU9 G02 0.260
20-way
Description Connectors Reference Weight

PLC side Motor starter side kg 3
Advantys STB parallel – 4 x RJ45 STB EPI 2145 0.165
interface module
Connection cables
Between the control connection module and the splitter box LU9 G02 or STB EPI 2145
Connectors Length
m
Reference Weight
kg
4
2 x RJ45 connectors 0.3 LU9 R03 0.045
1 LU9 R10 0.065
3 LU9 R30 0.125
Between splitter box LU9 G02 and the PLC

Type of connection
PLC side Splitter box side
Gauge C.s.a. Length Reference Weight 5
AWG mm2 m kg
HE 10 HE 10 22 0.324 0.5 TSX CDP 053 0.085
20-way 20-way 1 TSX CDP 103 0.150
2 TSX CDP 203 0.280
3
5
TSX CDP 303
TSX CDP 503
0.410
0.670
6
28 0.080 1 ABF H20 H100 0.080
2 ABF H20 H200 0.140
3 ABF H20 H300 0.210
Bare wires HE 10
20-way
22 0.324 3
5
TSX CDP 301
TSX CDP 501
0.400
0.660
7
Separate components
Description Characteristics Sold in Unit Weight
lots of reference kg
Spring terminal connections for: 2-way, 5 mm pitch 10 APE 1PRE21 0.020
b the external contact
b the auxiliary power supply
Wire c.s.a.: 0.2…2.5 mm²
8
Self-stripping connector for: 2-way, 5 mm pitch 16 APE 1PAD21 0.020
b the external contact Wire c.s.a.: 0.75 mm²
b the auxiliary power supply
Connecting cable Connectors: 1 APP 2AH40H060 0.400

between module APP 1Cp and
splitter box LU9 G02 ( length: 0.6 m)
1 x HE 10, 30-way
2 x HE 10, 20-way
9
10
Presentation: Description: Characteristics: Dimensions: Schemes:
pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/194 and 1/195 pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/202 and 1/203 pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/199
Characteristics Installation system
Type of control connection module LAD 9AP3pp

General environment
1 Standard
&HUWL¿FDWLRQV
IEC 60439-1
UL, CSA
Degree of protection Conforming to IEC 60529 IP 40 (mounted assembly)
Resistance to Conforming to IEC 60695-2-1 °C 960
incandescent wire
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27 11 ms and 15 gn (half sine wave)
Vibration resistance Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6 gn 2…100 Hz : 4 and 3…100 Hz: 0,7
2 Resistance to
and BV/LR
Conforming to IEC 61000-4-2 Level 3
electrostatic discharge
5HVLVWDQFHWRUDGLDWHG¿HOGV Conforming to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m 10 (26…1000 MHz)
Immunity to fast Conforming to IEC 61000-4-4 Level 3
transient currents
Surge withstand Conforming to IEC 61000-4-5 kV 2 in common mode, 0.6 in differential mode
Wave form: 1.2/50 μs - 8/20 μs
3 Immunity to Conforming to IEC 61000-4-6 V 10 (0.15...80 MHz)
UDGLRHOHFWULF¿HOGV
Ambient air temperature Operation in °C - 5…+ 60
ÀRRUVWDQGLQJHQFORVXUH
Operation in °C - 5…+ 40
wall-mounted enclosure
Storage °C - 40…+ 70
4 Space required around
mounted assembly
For inserting cables
and heat dissipation
mm > 30
Degree of pollution 3
$VVHPEO\¿[LQJ 2Q[PPUDLOVRUZLWK[PPVFUHZVRQSODWHIRU*90(
(with TeSys GV2 circuit-breakers only)
Suitable wire Voltage supply Number of wires 3
c.s.a. for power Flexible cable with cable end mm² 16
5 Flexible cable
without cable end
mm² 25
Solid cable mm² 25

Voltage supply Number of wires 2
for contactor Flexible cable mm² 1.5
coil control with cable end (max)
Flexible cable mm² 2.5
6 without cable end (max)
Solid cable (max) mm² 2.5
3-phase power circuit characteristics

Maximum Per power Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 60 (single power supply to one or more sub-bases or splitter boxes)
current supply
Per sub-base Conforming to IEC 60439-1 A 60
7 GV2 operating limit

Maximum current per starter A
80 % of Imax at 60° C ambient temperature (see table on opposite page)
18 (with an empty slot between two starters)
Insulation voltage V 750
Operational voltage V 690
U imp kV 6
Rated operational frequency Hz 50-60
Rated short-circuit current Conforming to IEC 60439-1 kA 50
8 conditional Isc at 415 V
Permissible Conforming to IEC 60439-1 kA 9.1 (for 70 ms)
short-time rating Icw
Contactor coil control voltage V a 12…250 (with interface relay)
V c 5…24 (without interface relay)
V c 5…130 (with interface relay)
9
10
Presentation : Description : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

1/200
Characteristics (continued) Installation system
7DEOHRI*9FLUFXLWEUHDNHUFXUUHQWOLPLWDWLRQDW&DPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHZLWK7H6\V4XLFN¿W
Circuit-breaker reference GV2 ratings (1) 0D[LPXPFXUUHQWRI*9ZLWK7H6\V4XLFN¿W
GV2 ME06
GV2 ME07
1 - 1.6 A
1.6 - 2.5 A
1.28 A
2A
1
GV2 ME08 2.5 - 4 A 3.2 A
GV2 ME10 4 - 6.3 A 5A
GV2 ME14 6 - 10 A 8A
GV2 ME16 9 - 14 A 11.2 A
GV2 ME20 13 - 18 A 14.4 A
GV2 ME21 17 - 23 A 18 A 2
Electromechanical relay characteristics
Type of control connection module LAD 9AP31, LAD 9AP32
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay control circuit (PLC side)
Rated voltage at Us V c 24
Energisation threshold at 40 °C
Drop-out voltage at 20 °C
V
V
c 19.2
c 2.4
3
Maximum operational voltage V c 30
Maximum current at Us mA 15
Drop-out current at 20 °C mA 1
Maximum power dissipated at Us W 0.36
Supply failure ms 5
Characteristics of the electromechanical relay output circuit

4
Type of contact 1F
Maximum switching voltage V a 250
V c 130
Frequency of the operating current Hz 50/60
Maximum current of the contact A 4
Other characteristics of the electromechanical relay

5
Maximum operating time Between coil energisation ms 10
at Us (including bounce) and closing of the contact
Between coil de-energisation ms 5
and opening of the contact
Maximum operating ratet No load Hz 10
Mechanical life
At Ie
In millions of operating cycles
Hz 0.5
20
6
Dielectric strength V 1000 (50/60 Hz) - 1 mn
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) kV 2.5
Primary/secondary rated insulation voltage V 300
Maximum current 24 V - DC13 A 0.6
for 500 000 operations 230 V - AC15 A 0.9
(1) Thermal trip setting range.
7
10
Presentation : Description : References : Dimensions : Schemes :

1/201
Dimensions Installation system
Dimensions
Mounted assembly, with TeSys GV2 ME circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors
1 120
2 3
2
4
1
255
285
4
4 6
110 (1)
135
1 Circuit-breaker and contactor support plate

5 2 Power connection module
3 Power splitter box
4 Control splitter box
5 Upstream terminal block
6 Outgoing terminal block
(1) 2 starters: 90 mm, 4 starters: 180 mm, 8 starters: 360 mm.
6 Mounted assembly with TeSys GV3 P circuit-breakers and TeSys D contactors (LC1 D40A3… LC1 D65A3)
Vertical mounting Side by side mounting
119
3
2 2
7 1
1
1
138
231
8
141 119
9
141 55 55
1 Control splitter box

10 2 Set of GV3 G264 busbars
3 Set of S-shape busbars GV3 S
Presentation : Description : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/192 and1/193 pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/196 to 1/199 pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/202
Dimensions (continued), Installation system
schemes 7H6\V4XLFN¿WIRUPRWRUVWDUWHUFRPSRQHQWV
Dimensions
Parallel wiring modules
Splitter box LU9 G02 Parallel wiring module Advantys STB EPI 2145 1
75 47 70
5
42
56
120
35
35
155
3
28,1 (1)
(1) Dimension to be multiplied by the number of STB EPI 2145 modules present in the
FRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
10
Schemes
4
Splitter box LU9 G02
X1 LU9 G02
Control contact
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
Output common Colours of
NC
Contactor status RJ45
NC X9
TSX CDPppp
connection cable 5
Circuit-breaker Fault X1 wires (4)
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
status Fault X2 1 White

Input common Fault X3 2 Brown
X2
Fault X4 3 Green
Fault X5 4 Yellow
RJ45 Fault X6 5 Grey
Fault X7 6 Pink
X3
Fault X8
Pole status X1
Pole status X2
7 Blue
8 Red
9 Black
6
(2)
Pole status X3 10 Violet
RJ45 Pole status X4 11 Grey-pink
Pole status X5 12 Red-blue
Pole status X6 13 White-green
X4 14 Brown-green
Pole status X7
Pole status X8 15 White-yellow
+ 24 V Aux 16 Yellow-brown
RJ45
- 24 V Aux
+ 24 V Aux
17 White-grey
18 Grey-brown 7
X5 - 24 V Aux 19 White-pink
Control contact 20 Pink-brown
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
Output common X10
NC
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Control X1
Contactor status RJ45 Control X2
NC Control X3
Circuit-breaker Control X4
status
Input common
X6
Control X5
Control X6
8
Control X7
Control X8
RJ45
(3) Not used with
7H6\V4XLFN¿W
X7
NC
NC
RJ45
NC
NC
9
X8 + c 24 V
- c 24 V
+ c 24 V
RJ45 - c 24 V
24 V 24 V Aux
10
Outputs
Inputs
(2) 20-way HE10 input connector.

Com
Com
(3) 20-way HE10 output connector.

(4) Wire colours and corresponding HE10 connector pin numbers.
Presentation : Description : Characteristics : References : Schemes :

pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/196 to 1/199 pages 1/204 and 1/205
1/203
Schemes (continued) Installation system
Wiring schemes
With relay
1 LAD9 AP31 LAD9 AP32
13
23
13
23
– Q1 – Q1
14
24
14
24
2
3
21
13
21
21
13
13
– KM1 (1)
– KM1 – KM2
(1) (1)
14
22
14
22
22
14
– KA1 (2) – KA1 (2) – KA2 (2)

4
Ph
Ph
Ph
N
N
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Shunt 1 Shunt 1 Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.
5 (1) Contactor coil.

(2) Interface relay.
10
Presentation : Description : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/196 to 1/199 pages 1/202 and 1/203
1/204
Schemes (continued) Installation system
Wiring schemes (continued)

Without relay
LAD9 AP3D1 LAD9 AP3D2 1
13
23
13
23
– Q1 – Q1
14
24
14
24
2
3
21
21
21
13
13
13
– KM1 – KM1 – KM2
(1) (1) (1)
22
14
22
22
14
14
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4
Shunt 1 Shunt 1 Shunt 2
Q1 Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breaker.

(1) Contactor coil.
10
Presentation : Description : Characteristics : References : Dimensions :

pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages 1/192 and 1/193 pages1/200 and 1/201 pages 1/196 to 1/199 pages 1/202 and1/203
1/205
2 3 1 4 5 5
3
5
4 2
5 10
11
12
6
6
9
8
7
9 6
7
13
10
10 15 12 14
1/206
Presentation Power distribution in control panels
Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5
The assembly of automated control and distribution panels requires the use of
products that are not only safe but also simple and quick to mount and cable.
The AK5 pre-assembled busbar system meets all these criteria by incorporating 1
prefabricated components which cater for 3 principal functions:
Carrying of electric current

By the pre-assembled 4-pole busbar system 1, 160 A at 35 °C.
4-pole busbar systems can be used for 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common. 2
The busbar systems are available in 6 lengths: 344, 452, 560, 668, 992, 1100 mm.
An incoming supply terminal block 2 is located at the extreme left of the busbar
system.
"Knock-out" partitions allow connection of the power supply from above or below to 3
connectors 3 which are protected by a removable cover 4.
Upstream protection of the busbar system is shown on page 1/208.
Current distribution
Tap-off units 5 (factory assembled) are available in 4 versions:
b 2-pole, 4
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3-phase + Neutral),
b 4-pole (3-phase + Common).
The tap-offs clip onto the busbar system with instantaneous mechanical and
electrical connection to the busbars.
2 ratings are available: 16 and 32 A.
The tap-off units ensure not only rapid mounting, but also a neat appearance for the 5
power distribution system and complete safety when accessing under live circuit
conditions.
Component mounting
Component mounting plates with incorporated tap-off allow mounting of and supply
of power to components.
6
They are available in 25 A or 50 A ratings.
These mounting plates clip onto the mounting rail 11, which also supports the busbar
system, and at the same time make electrical connection via the incorporated tap-
off.
2 types of mounting plate are available:

7
b single plates 6 (height 105 mm), with bolt-on 35 mm wide 7 rail 7, which may be
bolted on in one of two positions, allowing height adjustment of 10 mm.
b double plates 8 and 14 (height 190 mm), with two bolt-on, 35 mm wide 7 rails 9
PRXQWHGRQPP¿[LQJFHQWUHVHDFKUDLOPD\EHEROWHGRQLQRQHRISRVLWLRQV
allowing height adjustment in 10 mm steps. These plates are supplied with
connectors 12 to allow wiring between control and protection devices.
8
Single mounting plates enable the following types of distribution:
b 2-pole (Ph + N) and (Ph + Ph)
b 3-pole,
b 4-pole (3 Ph + N or 3 Ph + common).
Double mounting plates enable the following types of distribution: 2-pole (Ph + N,
Ph + Ph), 3-pole or 4-pole (3Ph+N and 3Ph + common). 9
Extension plates 10 can be bolted onto single and double mounting plates to enable
mounting of wider components. Using a side stop 15 in conjunction with these
extension plates also supports the AK5 JB busbar system when used vertically.
A control terminal block 13 comprising a support plate bolted onto the single or
double mounting plates and a 10-pole plug-in block, enables connection of the 10
control circuit wires (c.s.a. 1.5 mm2 max).
Characteristics : References : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

pages 1/208 and 1/209 pages 1/212 and 1/213 pages 1/214 and 1/215 pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/207
Characteristics Power distribution in control panels
Busbar system characteristics

1 3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV UL, CSA, DNV, LROS
Degree of protection Against access to live parts IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Flame resistance Conforming to IEC 60695 °C 850 (incandescent wire)
2 Conforming to standard UL 94 V0
Number of conductors AK5 JB14p 4
Supply current a
3 Rated operational frequency Hz 50 or 60
Rated operational current Ambient temperature 35 °C A 160
&RHI¿FLHQW.WREHDSSOLHG °C 35 40 45 50 55 60
according to the
4 ambient temperature
K 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.78
Rated insulation voltage Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V 690
Conforming to UL and CSA V 600

5 Operational voltage Off-load plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched on
Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V 400
Conforming to UL, CSA V 480

Plugging-in and unplugging, with supply switched off
6 Conforming to IEC 60439-1 V 690
Conforming to UL, CSA V 600

Maximum permissible kA 25
peak current
7 Maximum let-through energy A 2s 1 x 10 7
Upstream short-circuit (1) Type of protection Schneider Electric circuit-breaker Fuses

and overload protection
NS 160 H NS 160 H aM gF
Rating A 160 160 160 160
8 Prospective kA 36 70 100 100

short-circuit current
Operational current A 160 160 160 160
Cabling Maximum c.s.a. Minimum c.s.a.
9 Flexible cable with cable end mm2 70 2.5
Solid cable mm2 70 2.5
Tightening torque Nm 10
10 Mounting position Horizontal or vertical (2) Fixing with screws provided

(1) For conditions where conditional short-circuit current exceeds 25 kA.
(2) Using side stop AK5 BT01 on mounting plates AK5 PA.
Présentation : References : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

1/208
Characteristics (continued) Power distribution in control panels
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
PC12 PC12PH PC13 PC14 PC131 PC32L PC32LPH PC33
PC33L
PC34
PC34L
PC331 1
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV UL, LROS, CSA, DNV
Degree of protection Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 529
Polarity Phase
+
Phase
+
3-phase 3-phase
+
3-phase
+
Phase
+
Phase
+
3-phase 3-phase
+
3-phase
+
2
Neutral Phase Neutral Common Neutral Phase Neutral Common
Conductor c.s.a. mm2 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 4 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 2x4 2x4 3x4 4x4 3x4
(UL cables) 1 x 1.5 1 x 1.5
3
Conductor colours Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black Black
Blue Blue White Blue Blue White
(Neutral) (Neutral) (Neutral) (Neutral) (Common)
Permissible current A 16 16 16 16 16
10
32 32 32 32 32
10
4
(Common) (Common)
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to IEC 60439-1
Rated peak current kA 6
Maximum let-through energy A 2s 100 000 200 000

5
Type of conductor insulation PVC 105 °C
Tap-off characteristics
Type AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
PA211N1 PA211PH12 PA231 PA241 PA2311 PA532 PA542 PA5312
PA211N2 PA211PH13 PA232 PA242 PA2312
PA211N3
PA212N1
PA211PH23
PA212PH12
PA232S PA2312S 6
PA212N2 PA212PH13
PA212N3 PA212PH23
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV UL, LROS, CSA, DNV

7
Degree of protection Against access to live parts: IP XXB conforming to IEC 60529
Polarity Phase + Phase + 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase 3-phase

Neutral Phase + Neutral + Common + Neutral + Common
Conductor c.s.a.
(UL cables)
mm2 2x4 2x4 3x4 4x4 3x4
1 x 1.5
2 x (3 x 4) 2 x (4 x 4) 2 x (3 x 4)
1 x 1.5 8
Permissible current A 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 50
10 10
(Common) (Common)
Rated insulation voltage V 690 conforming to IEC 60439-1
Rated peak current kA 6
Maximum let-through energy A 2s 200 000 9
Type of conductor insulation PVC 105 °C
Characteristics of mounting rails AM1 DL201 and AM1 DL2017

Type Omega 7 (width 75 mm, depth 15 mm)
Material
Surface treatment
2 mm sheet steel
Galvanized 10
1/209
Mounting Power distribution in control panels
(equipment possibilities) Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
2
Note: if the equipment is wider than the AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5
mounting plate, an extension plate can be PA211N1 PA231 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 PA232 PA242 PA232S PA532 PA542
used to increase the width of the support PA211N2 PA2311 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA2312 PA2312S PA5312
plate. PA211N3 (1) PA212N3 PA212PH23 (1) (1) (1)
(1) 3-pole + common
3 Mounting
plate
Width in mm 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 108 108 108
incorporating
Height in mm 105 105 105 190 190 190 190 190 190 190
tap-off
No. of 18 mm pitches 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 6 6 6
Thermal current 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 50 A 50 A
4 Application Ph + N 3-pole 3-pole Ph + N Ph + Ph 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole

+N +N +N
Motor starter type Minimum Number of points used on the busbar system
centres
with
60 mm
ducting
5 Fuses, contactors and thermal overload relay

LS1 D25 170 4 4 – – – –
LS1 D25 + LA8 D254 170 – – 5 – – –
LS1 D25 + LC1 -D09 to D25 and
overload relay up to LR2 D1322 320 – – – 4 – –
LS1 D25 + LC1 D09 to D25
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 – – – 4 – – –
overload relay up to LR2 D1322
6 Fuses, reversing contactors + thermal overload relay
LS1 D25 + LC2 D09 to D18
(with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 – – – – 6 –
LS1 D25 + LC2 D25
with 1 add-on block LA8 D) + 320 – – – – 7 –
7 Optimal breaker switch

GK2 CF03 to CF22 170 – 3 – – – –
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks 170 – 5 – – – –
GK2 AX
GK3 EF40 270 – – – – – 6
GK3 EF40 + 4 blocks GK2 AX 270 – – – – – 6
Optimal breaker switch + contactor + thermal overload relay
8 GK2 CF03 to CF21 + LC1 D09
to D18 + overload relay up to 320 – – – 3 – –
LR2 D1322
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + LC1 D09
to D25 + overload relay up to 320 – – – 4 – –
LR2 D1322
GK2 CF03 to CF22 + 4 blocks
GK2-AX + LC1 D09 to D18 with 320 – – – 5 – –
9 1 block LA8 D + overload relay
up to LR2 D1322
Optimal breaker switch + reversing contactor + thermal overload relay
GK2 AX + LC1 D09 to D18 320 – – – – 6 –
with 1 block LA8 D + overload
relay up to LR2 D1322
10 GK2 AX + LC2 D25
with 1 block LA8 D + overload
320 – – – – 7 –
relay up to LR2 D1322
1/210
Mounting Power distribution in control panels
(equipment possibilities) Pre-assembled panel busbar system AK5
(continued)
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off mounted on AK5 JB busbar system
Note 1: if the equipment is wider than the

mounting plate, an extension plate can be 2
used to increase the width of the support
plate. AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5 AK5PA AK5 AK5 AK AK5
Note 2: for upstream protection, see page PA211N1 PA231 PA241 PA212N1 PA212PH12 232 PA242 PA232S PA532 PA542
1/208 PA211N2 PA2311 PA212N2 PA213PH13 PA2312 PA2312S PA5312
(1) 3-pole + common PA211N3 (1) PA212N3 PA212PH23 (1) (1) (1)
Mounting Width in mm 54 54 54 54 54 54 54 108 108 108
plate
incorporating
tap-off
Height in mm
No. of 18 mm pitches
105
3
105
3
105
3
190
3
190
3
190
3
190
4
190
6
190
6
190
6
3
Thermal current 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A 50 A 50 A
Application Ph + N 3-pole 3-pole Ph + N Ph + Ph 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole 3-pole
+N +N +N
Motor starter type Minimum Number of points used on the busbar system
centres with
60 mm
ducting
Motor circuit-breaker (type 1 coordination)
4
GV2p06 to p22 170 – 3 – – – –
GV3M01 to M40 270 – – – – – 6
Motor circuit-breaker + contactor

GV2p06 to p16 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270
GV2p06 to p20 + LC1 D09
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
–
–
–
–
5
to D18 270
GV2p06 to p22 + LC1 D09 or
D12 with 1 add-on block LA8 D 270 – – – 4 – –
GV3M01 to M40 with
GV1App + LC1D09 to D32 270 – – – – – 7
GV3M01 to M40 + LC1 D09
to D32 with 1 add-on block 270 – – – – – 8
6
LA8 D
Motor circuit-breaker + reversing contactor

GV2p06 to p20 + LC2-D09 to
D18 with or without add-on 270 – – – – 6 –
block LA8 D
GV2p22 with 1 add-on block
LA8 D 270 – – – – 7
–
7
C 60 circuit-breaker for circuit protection
2369p 170 2 – – 2 2 – – – – –
2370p 170 – 3 – – – 3 – 3 3 –
2371p and 2372p 170 – – 4 – – – 4 – – 4
10
1/211
References Power distribution in control panels
Busbar systems
The busbar system can be screw-mounted onto any type of support. However. if it is to be used in conjunction with
1 component mounting plates incorporating a tap-off, it is essential that it is mounted on the AM1 DL201 rail.
When mounting tap-offs, the rated operational current of the busbar system should be taken into account: 160 A at 35 °C.
Number of Number of Length Suitable for Reference Weight
conductors tap-offs at mounting in
18 mm intervals enclosure width
mm mm kg
4 (1) 12 344 600 AK5 JB143 0.700
2 18 452 800 AK5 JB144 0.900
24 560 800 AK5 JB145 1.100
30 668 800 AK5 JB146 1.300
AK5 JB1pp 48 992 1200 AK5 JB149 1.900
3 54 1100 1200 AK5 JB1410 2.100
Omega rail, width 75 mm

This rail is designed to accommodate the busbar system when it is used with AK5 PA mounting plates incorporating tap-
offs. It supportsthe busbar system. The plates simply clip onto the rail.
Material and Depth Length Sold in Unit Weight

4 surface treatment lots of reference
mm mm kg
2 mm sheet steel 15 2000 (4) 6 AM1 DL201 3.000
Removable power sockets

Use Number of points Thermal Cable Sold in Unit Weight
5 used on the
busbar system
current lengths lots of reference
A mm kg
Single-phase 1 16 200 6 (2) AK5 PC12 0.035

+
Neutral 32 1000 6 (2) AK5 PC32L 0.040
AK5 PC12
6 2-phase 1 16 200 6 (3) AK5 PC12PH 0.035
32 1000 6 (3) AK5 PC32LPH 0.040
3-phase 2 16 200 6 AK5 PC13 0.040
7 32 250 6 AK5 PC33 0.045
1000 6 AK5 PC33L 0.060
AK5 PC14 3-phase 2 16 200 6 AK5 PC14 0.045

+
Neutral 32 250 6 AK5 PC34 0.050
8 1000 6 AK5 PC34L 0.065
3-phase 2 16 200 6 AK5 PC131 0.045

+ 10 (common)
common
32 250 6 AK5 PC331 0.050
9 AK5 GF1
10 (common)
Accessories
Description Maximum no. C.s.a. mm2 Sold in Unit Weight
of connections lots of reference kg
Cable guide 4 2.5 or 4 20 AK5 GF1 0.300
(1) 4-pole: 3-phase + Neutral or 3-phase + Common.
(2) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (N + L1), 2 sockets (N + L2). 2 sockets (N + L3).
10 (3) Total of 6 sockets supplied: 2 sockets (L1 + L2), 2 sockets (L1 + L3). 2 sockets (L2 + L3).
(4) Cut and drill to suit use.
Presentation : Characteristics : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

pages 1/206 and 1/207 pages 1/208 and 1/209 pages 1/214 and1/215 pages 1/210 and 1/211
1/212
References (continued) Power distribution in control panels
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off

Single plate (height 105 mm)
Use No. of 18mm
points used on the
Phase Thermal
currentA
Number of 6
rails for com-
Reference Weight 1
busbar system ponent support kg
Single-phase 3 Ph1+N 25 1 AK5 PA211N1 0.135
+ neutral
Ph2+N 25 1 AK5 PA211N2 0.135
Ph3+N 25 1 AK5 PA211N3 0.135
2-phase 3 Ph1+Ph2 25 1 AK5 PA211PH12 0.135
Ph1+Ph3 25 1 AK5 PA211PH13 0.135 2
Ph2+Ph3 25 1 AK5 PA211PH23 0.135
AK5 PA231 3-phase 3 – 25 1 AK5 PA231 0.140
3-phase + common 3 – 25 1 AK5 PA2311 0.145
3-phase + neutral 3 – 25 1 AK5 PA241 0.145
Double plate (height 190 mm)

Prefabricated 25 A connectors are supplied for connecting the 2 protection and control devices. 3
Single-phase 3 Ph1+N 25 2 AK5 PA212N1 0.135
+ neutral Ph2+N 25 2 AK5 PA212N2 0.135
Ph3+N 25 2 AK5 PA212N3 0.135
2-phase 3 Ph1+Ph2 25 2 AK5 PA212PH12 0.135
Ph1+Ph3
Ph2+Ph3
25
25
2
2
AK5 PA212PH13
AK5 PA212PH23
0.135
0.135 4
3-phase 3 – 25 2 AK5 PA232 0.230
6 – 25 2 AK5 PA232S 0.600
50 1 AK5 PA532 0.700
3-phase + common 3 – 25 (10 common) 2 AK5 PA2312 0.235
AK5 PA232
6 – 25 (10 common)
50 (10 common)
2
1
AK5 PA2312S
AK5 PA5312
0.610
0.710
5
Extension plates
These plates bolt onto the equipment support plates, after having removed them from the rails, to be able to mount wider
components.
Use Number of tap-offs Reference Weight 6
at 18 mm intervals kg
For mounting Single 4 AK5 PE17 0.100
plates incor- Double 4 AK5 PE27 0.150
porating tap-off
Side stop (AK5 JB mounted vertically)

Use Sold in
lots of
Unit
reference
Weight
kg 7
For extension plate 50 AK5 BT01 0.005
AK5 BT01 Control terminal blocks

Description Thermal Sold in Unit Weight
current A lots of reference kg
10-pole terminal blocks, for screwing onto plate AK5 PAppp
10 10 AK5 SB1 0.065 8
10-pole front connecting plug-in terminal blocks which can be clipped onto 1 6 4 rails
Fixed part 10 10 AB1 DV10235U 0.047
Moving part 10 10 AB1 DVM10235U 0.021
Accessories
Description Marking Sold in Unit Weight
9
AK5 SB1 lots of reference kg
Strips of clip-in markers 0…9 25 AB1 Rp (1) 0.050
10 identical numbers, signs or + 25 AB1 R12 0.050
capital letters per strip – 25 AB1 R13 0.050
A…Z 25 AB1 Gp (1) 0.050
(1) Replace the p in the selected reference with the number or letter required. Example: AB1 R1 or AB1 GA. 10
Presentation : Characteristics : Dimensions : Mounting possibilities :

1/213
Dimensions Power distribution in control panels
Busbar systems
AK5 JBppp
1
82
30
79
3 AK5 a G No. of
81
45
18 mm
points
JB143 344 330 12
JB144 452 438 18
JB145 560 546 24
G
4 a
JB146
JB149
668
992
654
978
30
48
JB1410 1100 1086 54
Busbar feed units
AK5 JBppp Installation of AK5 JBppp busbar systems
Connection C.s.a. in mm2

5 Flexible cable with or without cable end
min max
1 x 2.5 1 x 70 (1)
2 x 2.5 2 x 35
Flexible bar
– 2 x (9 x 4)
6
Flexible bar
9x4 9x4
+ +
+ 1 x 2.5 1 x 35
ÀH[LEOHFDEOHZLWKRUZLWKRXWFDEOHHQG
7
(1) Maximum c.s.a. or connection of conductor without cable end.
Removable power sockets 16 and 32 A Mounting plates incorporating tap-offs, 25 A Single width extension plates
AK5 PC12p. AK5 PC32Lp AK5 PA2p1. AK5 PA2311. AK5 PA211pppp AK5 PE17
8
45,5
53 (1)
53 (1)
38 17,5
AK5 PCp3. AK5 PC33L
9 AK5 PCp4. AK5 PC34L

105
105
AK5 PCp31
10
45,5
10
15 46 54 15 7 71
10 38 35,5
Note: It is recommended that the power sockets or the removable plates are connected as close as possible to the busbar feed unit.
&DQEH¿[HGDWPP
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Mounting possibilities :

1/214
Dimensions (continued) Power distribution in control panels
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off Double extension plate

AK5 PA232. AK5 PA2312. AK5 PA242 AK5 PE27
53 (1)
53 (1) 2
40
190
100
10
100
190
10
3
10
15 46 54 15 7 71 4
Component mounting plates incorporating tap-off
AK5 PA232S. AK5 PA2312S AK5 PA532. AK5 PA5312. AK5 PA542
Side stop Control terminal block 8

AK5 BT01 AK5 SB1
0,8
20
15,5 9
4,2
22
7
10
&DQEH¿[HGDWPP
Presentation : Characteristics : References : Mounting possibilities :

pages 1/206 and 1/207 pages 1/208 and 1/209 pages 1/212 and 1/213 pages 1/210 et 1/211
1/215

CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CH1 TeSys Motor Starters - Open Version PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Contents 1 - TeSys motor starters:

b Levels of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2

Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4

b D.O.L starters, type 2 coordination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10

2 Combination starters for customer assembly

D.O.L. starters, plate mounted, for motor control

Star-delta starters for motor control

b 90 to 375 kW, without isolating device, pre-assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/45

b Add-on contact blocks and auxiliary contact modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/64

b 3UR¿EXV'3FRPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/80

integral 63 contactor breakers and reversing contactor

b Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/192

AK5 pre-assembled panel busbar system

Type 1 and type 2 coordination according to the standard

4 Type 2 coordination increases reliability of operation.

6 Current “r” (low level short-circuit 10 < I < 50 In)

Operational current Ie (AC-3) (A) Current “r” (kA)

No coordination Considerable risks to both persons and

Example: air conditioning in commercial premises.

Applications Pre-assembled starters

Level of service Type 1 coordination Type 2 coordination – –

7 Type of components Combination automatic motor starter with overload protection

Small machines starting under full load: D.O.L. starters

Total coordination Type 1 and type 2 coordination – –

Starter-controller Thermal magnetic

1/62 and 1/63 1/16 and 1/17, 1/26

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1 This pre-assembled combination comprises:

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.37 to 5.5 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

1 This pre-assembled combination comprises:

Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA 50 50 15 15 15 15 10

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 15 kW at 400/415 V, type 1 coordination

Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA

Combination automatic motor starters

D.O.L. starters, non-reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

1 This pre-assembled combination comprises:

50/60 Hz in AC-3 thermal tripping

3 – 4 6…10 138 GV2 P14 LC1 D09pp GV2 DP114pp 0.736

Combination automatic motor starters with overload

D.O.L. starters, reversing, from 0.06 to 30 kW at 400/415 V, type 2 coordination

Breaking Conforming to 400/415 V kA

Combination automatic motor starters

GV2 DMp02pp to DMp21pp to GV2 DMp02pp to DMp21pp to

Combination automatic motor starters

GV2 DPp02pp to DPp10pp to GV2 DPp02pp to DPp10pp to

GV3 Ppp1 + LC1 D40A…D65A (for customer assembly)

pages 1/6 to 1/11

2 1 L1 2/T1 1/L1 T1/2 1/L1 2/T1 1/L1

4 3 L2 4/T2 3/L2 T2/4 3/L2 4/T2 3/L2

6 5 L3 6/T3 5/L3 T3/6 5/L3 6/T3 5/L3

Combination automatic motor starters

GV2 DP1pppp GV2 DP2pppp

Mechanical interlock with integral electrical contacts

— KM1 — KM2 — KM1 — KM2 6

0.06 to 110 kW at 400/415 V: type 1 coordination

P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1) P Ie Iq (1)

3 – – – – – – 0.75 1.5 50 GV2 ME06 1…1.6 LC1 K06 or LC1 D09

15 29 10 15 26.5 6 18.5 28 4 GV2 ME32 24…32 LC1 D32